Home

Cisco Systems 15310-CL Network Card User Manual

1. 25 KEES WEF ESM SHEN Lipa 7 WABI ARAB Ache A ASE LEME IESUS EU SB SS It TENT SEE VR AaB iB RTF kE Ze S PETERE EE 0 MERE DART ASBREPUT 5 xd 80 U RLRE 15 lt 2 BRARBORBELERL 2606 ERR RT SERSAOBSERIC WEIHE Translated Safety Warnings amp 8 LC lt HEEL CHS OFRBSEERELTEUTC ESL SQ 0 2 85 Ass UE HAUC SAA AA PASSA csset 3340 auld SSS FS AN 42 Jeet Hae Ass FE AS sels SATOH AD 2 3109 OFA FEN Me SVE HSS 0 JAS SH Aa ord
2. Figure 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Faceplate and Block Diagram Ss CTX2500 CRAFT Q lt gt lt gt 7 lt gt STS1 XC SW SFPA lt gt TU XC OCN I F VT XC lt gt Wwe SFP1 REFCLK_IN gt PLL XPT and SFP Control Status From Nile2 CPLD REFCLK_OUT oT DD VN ocxo MOD lt gt Compact uU ATA VF FLASH DDR 5 c 3 lt gt SCL I F CPU I F FLASH Ei HH 8 y tt 1 t BUS x g gt FANOUT gt FPGA RX lt FPGA m gt LED 2 RJ45 E EI TX lt CPLD lt RX PROCESSOR CRAFT o lt gt jo FJ ACT STBY c gt ENWT sw lt gt 2 SFP 1 2 ENET E FAL PF gt IDPROM E SYNCH 1 ri e i m gt DC DC xi 12 eu E Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference 15310E CTX
3. Figure 2 6 ML 100T 8 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram ML 100T 8 Console 222 Option2 Packet Buffer TNI i Q unk 1 5MB SDRAM 0 8 MB g 1 li i Ethermap 0 8 gres 77MH 155MH LINK let 6 i z z 1 1 5228 8 i SMil B RJ45 Octal lt Inp340 eMDM 2151 Payload 2 4 FPGA gt 2 lt gt 8 STS 3 Ser p Act lt lt p SMII lt ae 19 44MHz 0 li 1 MB lt gt INTEL Intercard u Control Mem LXT973l Ethernet Links gt LINK lt gt 4 0 5MB SMII PHY Lg fact mf MI FT unk FCC1FCC2 60x 5 g act eMDM MI y 1 i MPC8270 Flash SDRAM i 0 Part of eMDM FPGA t 2 8MB 128MB p er 1 A CPLD pm Option 1 O The following paragraphs describe the general functions of the ML 100T 8 card and relate to the block diagram in Figure 2 6 In the ingress direction Ethernet to SDH Ethernet frames first enter from a physical Ethernet port to one of the corresponding channels of the octal PHY which performs all of the physical layer interface functions for 10 100 Ethern
4. Ostrzezenie WAZNE INSTRUKCJE DOTYCZACE BEZPIECZENSTWA Ten symbol ostrzezenia oznacza niebezpieczenstwo Zachodzi sytuacja ktora moze powodowa obrazenia ciata Przed przystapieniem do prac przy urzadzeniach nalezy zapozna sie z zagrozeniami zwiazanymi z uktadami elektrycznymi oraz ze standardowymi rodkami zapobiegania wypadkom Na koricu kazdego ostrzezenia podano numer na podstawie kt rego mo na odszuka ttumaczenie tego ostrze enia w do czonym do urz dzenia dokumencie z t umaczeniami ostrze e NINIEJSZE INSTRUKCJE NALE Y ZACHOWA Upozornenie D LE IT BEZPE NOSTN POKYNY Tento varovn symbol ozna uje nebezpe enstvo Nach dzate sa v situ cii s nebezpe enstvom razu Pred pr cou na akomko vek vybaven si uvedomte nebezpe enstvo s visiace s elektrick mi obvodmi a obozn mte sa so tandardn mi opatreniami na predch dzanie razom Pod a sla na konci ka d ho upozornenia vyh adajte jeho preklad v prelo en ch bezpe nostn ch upozorneniach ktor s prilo en k zariadeniu USCHOVAJTE SI TENTO N VOD Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EA 78 19417 01 Preface Obtainin
5. E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 00 00 00 15 00 30 hours mins 48 00 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 387 BPV 0 29700 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 3865 BPV 0 2851200 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1 day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day LOSS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend
6. E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 90 BPV 0 133315200 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1 day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min AISS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min BBE 9 count 0 287100 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min EB 9 count 0 450000 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day AISS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day BBE 90 count 0 27561600 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day EB 90 count 0 43200000 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day ES 648 0 86400 seconds m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix Network Element Defaults Table C 3 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default
7. Table 10 7 History Column Description Column Information Recorded Num An incrementing count of alarm or condition messages The column is hidden by default to view it right click a column and choose Show Column Num Ref The reference number assigned to the alarm or condition The column is hidden by default to view it right click a column and choose Show Column Ref Date Date and time of the condition Node Shows the name of the node where the condition or alarm occurred Visible in network view Object TL1 AID for the condition object For an VCMON LP or VTmon this is the monitored VC high order path or VC low order path object which is explained in Table 10 3 on page 10 3 Eqpt Type Card type in this slot only displays in network view and node view Shelf For DWDM configurations the shelf where the alarmed object is located Visible in network view Slot Slot where the condition occurred only displays in network view and node view Port Port where the condition occurred For VCTRM LP and VTTerm the port refers to the upstream card it is partnered with Path Width Width of the signal path Sev Severity level Critical CR Major MJ Minor MN Not Alarmed NA Not Reported NR ST Status raised R cleared C or transient T SA A service affecting alarm when checked Description Description of the condition Cond Condition name 10 2 7 2 Retrieving and Displayi
8. 7 Node 10 ES Node 8 i SB Protect traffic CD Node 11 Node 9 MEL Destination Primary path Secondary path 145956 PPMN also allows spans with different SDH speeds to be mixed together in virtual rings Figure 9 10 shows ONS 15310 SDH with Nodes 1 2 3 and 4 in a standard STM16 ring Nodes 5 6 7 and 8 link to the backbone ring through the STMA fiber The virtual ring formed by Nodes 5 6 7 and 8 use both the STM16 and STMA cards 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Four Node Configurations Figure 9 10 Virtual Ring for ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 1510 MA ONS 15310 MASDH ONS 15310 MA SDH Node 5 Node 1 Node 4 Node 8 A ea STM4 STM16 ST gue Um g amp ONS 15310 MASDH ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MASDH ONS 15310 MA SDH Node 6 Node 2 Node 3 Node 7 9 5 Four Node Configurations You can link multiple ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes using their STMN ports also known as creating a fiber optic bus to accommodate more access traffic than a single ONS 15310 MA SDH can support You can link nodes with STMN fiber spans as you would link any other two network nodes The nodes can be grouped in one facility to aggregate more local traffic 9 6 STMN Speed Upgrades A span is the optical fiber connection between two O
9. 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 3 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min SAS 2 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day CV 3820 BIP 0 3715200 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day S AS 8 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 BIP 0 38700 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds
10. Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 8 Time Zone GMT Hours Time Zones continued Default Value GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Vienna GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Vilnius Warsaw Zagreb GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 West Central Africa Algiers Lagos Luanda GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Windhoek Namibia GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Al Jizah Alexandria Cairo GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Amman GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Athens Bucharest Istanbul GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Beirut GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Cape Town Harare Johannesburg Pretoria GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Jerusalem GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Kaliningrad Minsk GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Aden Antananarivo Khartoum Nairobi GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Baghdad GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Kuwait Riyadh GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Moscow St Petersburg Novgorod GMT 03 30 GMT 03 30 Tehran GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Abu Dhabi Mauritius Muscat GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Aqtau T bilisi GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Baku GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Yerevan Samara GMT 04 30 GMT 04 30 Kabul GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Chelyabinsk Prem Yekaterinburg Ufa GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Islamabad Karachi Tashkent GMT 05 30 GMT 05 30 Calcutta Mumbai New Delhi Chennai GMT 05 45 GMT 05 45 Kathmandu GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Almaty GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Colombo Dhaka Astana
11. Table 1 8 UDC Cable Pin Assignments RJ 45Pin RS 232 64K Number Mode 1 TX 2 TX 3 RX 4 5 6 RX 7 8 A 1 9 Cable Routing and Management Two types of cable management brackets are available for the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly the standard bracket which ships with the ONS 15310 MA SDH ship kit and the extended bracket which ships as a separate orderable part You can install either bracket under the shelf assembly 1 9 1 Standard Cable Management Bracket The standard cable management bracket has one area in the rear that can be used for routing cables Fiber optic cable can be routed through the rear trough of the bracket Ethernet cables can be passed through the front of the bracket to be bundled and secured using tie wraps or other site specific materials Figure 1 12 shows the installation of the standard cable management bracket Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 ELM Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware M Cable Routing and Management Figure 1 12 Installing the Standard Cable Management Bracket 1 9 2 Extended Cable Management Bracket The extended cable management bracket has two areas that can be used for routing cables one in the front and one in the rear Fiber optic cables can be routed through the smaller front trough and Ethernet cables can be routed
12. CISCO Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Product and Documentation Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 August 2012 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems Inc 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 1706 USA http www cisco com Tel 408 526 4000 800 553 NETS 6387 Fax 408 527 0883 Text Part Number 78 19417 01 THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE ALL STATEMENTS INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
13. Inventory Delete Hard Reset Soft Reset Maintenance Database Backup gt x X ux xXx Restore Network Routing Table Retrieve RIP Routing Table Retrieve X PS X X 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Chapter5 Security User Privileges and Policies Table 5 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Node View continued CTC Tab Subtab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance Provisioning Superuser Maintenance OSI IS IS RIB Refresh X X X X continued ES IS RIB Refresh x x x x TDC TID to NSAP Flush x x x Dynamic Entries TDC Refresh x x x x Protection Switch Lock out x x x Lock on Clear Unlock Software Download x x x Activate Revert X Cross Connect Resource Usage Delete X X Resource Usage Refresh X X X X Overhead View X X XConnect Alarm Extenders External Alarms View X X X X External Controls View X X X X Virtual Wires View Retrieve X X X X Overhead Termination View X X X X Diagnostic Retrieve Tech Support Log x X Node Diagnostic Logs Release 9 2 Lamp Test X X X Timing Source Edit X X X Report View Refresh X X X X Audit Retrieve X Archive X X Test Access View X X X X 1 Provisioner user cannot change node name contact location
14. etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets longer than 1518 octets that were not an integral number of octets or had a bad FCS etherStatsOctets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsCollisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this segment etherStatsCRCAlignErrors The total number of packets with a length between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive that had a bad FCS or were not an integral number of octets in length etherStatsDropEvents The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources This number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped it is just the number of times this condition has been detected rxPauseFrames Number of received pause frames Note rxPauseFrames is not supported on CE 100T 8 txPauseFrames Number of transmitted pause frames amp Note txPauseFrames is not supported on CE 100T 8 ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their transmission A possible reason for discarding such packets could be to create buffer space 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Et
15. Pull the card locked disabled notInstalled Reset the card locked disabled softwareDownl oad Alarm condition is raised locked disabled FLT locked disabled Automatic In Service and mismatchofEquipment Pull the card locked disabled Automatic In Service amp notInstalled Delete the card locked disabled unassigned if the card is valid locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp unassigned if the card is invalid 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix B Administrative and Service States HZ Service State Transitions Table B 4 Current Service State Action ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Service State Transitions continued Next Service State locked disabled Automatic In Service amp softwareDownload Restart completed unlocked enabled Pull the card locked disabled Automatic In Service amp notInstalled locked disabled Automatic In Service amp notInstalled Insert a valid card locked disabled Automatic In Service amp softwareDownload Insert an invalid card locked disabled Automatic In Service amp mismatchofEquipment Delete the card locked disabled unassigned amp notInstalled locked disabled FLT Pull the card locked disabled notInstalled Delete the card locked disabled unassigned Change the administrative state to locked mainten
16. 11 5 2 E3 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 11 4 shows the signal types that support near end and far end PM parameters for the E3 Ports Figure 11 4 Monitored Signal Types for the E3 Ports Near End Far End E3 Signal E3 Signal ONS 15310 MA GE ONS 15310 MA SDH Fiber SDH E3 STM16 STM16 E3 E3 Path Near End PMs Supported lt VC3 Low Order Path PMs Supported for Near and Far End y gt lt VC4 High Order Path PMs Supported for Near and Far End 5 243071 Figure 11 5 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the E3 ports Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ka 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports Figure 11 5 PM Read Points on the E3 Ports ONS 15310 MA SDH E3 Card Cross Connect Card STM N LIU Mux Demux ASIC E3 Side SDH Side LP EB E LP BBE SES L LP ES Low LOSS L LP SES Order BTC P ES LP ESR Level P SES 3 2 LP SESR I gt LP BBER J P UAS P ESR P SESR HP BBE HP ES High gh PMs read on LIU HP SES Order RV P HP UAS Path HP ESR Level HP SESR HP BBER PMS read on Mux Demux ASIC 2 The PM parameters for the E3 ports are listed in Table 11 4 The parameters are defined in Table 11 2
17. Provisioning Provisions the ONS 15310 MA SDH node General Network OSI Protection Security SNMP Comm Channels Timing Alarm Extenders Alarm Profiles Defaults m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window MI Table 4 6 Node View Tabs and Subtabs continued Tab Description Subtabs Inventory Provides inventory information part number serial number Common Language Equipment Identification CLEI codes for cards installed in the node Allows you to delete and reset cards and to change card service state For more information on card service states see Appendix B Administrative and Service States Maintenance Performs maintenance tasks for the node Database OSI Protection Software Cross Connect Overhead XConnect Alarm Extenders Diagnostic Timing Audit Test Access 4 6 2 Network View Network view allows you to view and manage ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes that have DCC connections to the node that you logged into and any login node groups you have selected Figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Network in CTC Network View Bold letters indicate login node asterisk Icon color indicates Dots indicate indicates topology host node status selected node 22 Cisco Transport Controller File Edit Tools Help a slt e e gt t reze e I Network View
18. us ues deg min deg min gt Bottom pane Orderwire Description Alarm Extenders Alarm Profiles Time Defaults Use NTPISNTP Server 779 Mw e 2 m x 2 Status bar NET CKT 2 iD Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window 4 6 1 Node View Node view is the first view that appears after you log into an ONS 15310 MA SDH The login node is the first node shown and it is the home view for the session Node view allows you to view and manage one node The status area shows the node name IP address session boot date and time number of Critical CR Major MJ and Minor MN alarms the name of the current logged in user the security level of the user the software version and the network element default setup 4 6 1 1 CTC Card Colors The graphic area of the CTC window depicts the shelf assembly The colors of the cards in the graphic reflect the real time status of the physical card and slot Table 4 3 Table 4 3 Node View Card and Slot Colors Card and Slot Color Status Gray Slot is not provisioned no card is installed Violet Slot is provisioned no card is installed White Slot is provisioned a functioning card is installed Yellow Slot is provisioned a Minor alarm condition exists Orange Slot is provisioned a Major alarm condition exists Red Slot is provisioned
19. 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds velo nearend 1 day BBE 150 count 0 51753600 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1 day EB 125 count 0 172800000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1 day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend lday SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend lday UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line AdminSSMIn STU G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line PJVC4Montt 0 VC4 Rf 0 4 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line Send lt FF gt DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE
20. 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min BBE 10000 count 0 138600 CTX 2500 STMI PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min EB 10000 count 0 138600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min OFS 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min SES 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend IL day BBE 100000 0 13305600 count CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day EB 100000 0 13305600 count CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day ES 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day OFS 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day SES 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min BBE 15 count 0 539100 CTX 2500 STMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min EB 15 count 0 1800000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT
21. 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 6 Ethernet Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain CE 100T 8 config AINSSoakTime 08 00 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 hours mins CE 100T 8 config State locked disabled unlocked locked disabled locked maintenance unlocked automaticInService CE 100T 8 etherPortConfig 802 1Q VlanCoS 7 count 0 7 CE 100T 8 etherPortConfig IP ToS 255 count 0 255 CE 100T 8 etherPortConfig liTimer 200 ms 200 5000 CE MR config AINSSoakTime 08 00 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 hours mins CE MR config State locked disabled unlocked locked disabled locked maintenance unlocked automaticInService CE MR etherPortConfig 802 1Q VlanCoS 7 count 0 7 CE MR etherPortConfig IP ToS 255 count 0 255 CE MR etherPortConfig liTimer 200 ms 200 5000 ML100T config PreServiceAlarmSuppression FALSE TRUE FALSE ML100T config SoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 ML100T ios consolePort Access TRUE TRUE FALSE ML100T ios radiusServerAccess FALSE TRUE FALSE C 4 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 7 on page C 31 lists the node level default settings for the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco provides the following types of node level user configurable defaults Circuit settings Set the administrative state and L
22. Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Circuit Properties By default the working path on the detailed circuit map is indicated by a green bidirectional arrow and the protect path is indicated by a purple bidirectional arrow Source and destination ports are shown as circles with an S and D Port states are indicated by colors shown in Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Port State Color Indicators Port Color State Green unlocked enabled Gray locked enabled disab led Purple locked disabled Auto matic In Service Light blue locked enabled main tenance Notations within or next to the squares or selector pentagons on each node indicate switches and other conditions For example Force switch e Manual switch e L Lockout switch e Arrow Facility outward or terminal inward loopback Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Terminal Loopback in the Edit Circuits Window Edit Circuit ncp91sdh 19 91 sdh nep92sdh General Monitors State Merge Name LOP ncp91sdh 19 Circuit Type VC LO PATH CIRCUIT Circuit Size VC3 Protection Type Unprot Routing Preference Unprotected Path Show Detailed Map Show VC LO Topology 243021 Move the mouse cursor over nodes ports and spans to see tooltips with information including the number of alarms on a node organized by severity a port s service state and the protection topology Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and
23. IP over CLNS tunnels exist until they are deleted in CTC TL1 tunnel specifications and general capabilities include Each tunnel generally supports between six to eight ENEs depending on the number of tunnels at the ENE Each CTC session can support up to 32 tunnels The TL1 tunnel database is stored locally in the CTC Preferences file Automatic tunnel reconnection when the tunnel goes down Each ONS NE can support at least 16 concurrent tunnels 4 8 Common Control Card Reset You can reset the common control card for the ONS 15310 MA SDH the 15310E CTX K9 card by using the hard reset or soft reset commands CTC A soft reset reboots the 15310 9 card and reloads the operating system and the application software A hard reset temporarily removes power from the 15310E CTX K9 card and clears all buffer memory Before you hard reset a card put the card in standby mode by completing a soft reset From the node view select a card and right click to open a menu with the hard reset and soft reset commands Soft resets do not impact traffic but hard resets are service affecting A card must be in the Out of Service and Management Maintenance locked enabled maintenance service state before you can perform a hard reset 4 9 Traffic Card Reset You can reset the CE 100T 8 ML 100T 8 21 DS3 3 and 63 DS3 3 cards by using the hard reset or soft reset commands in CTC A soft reset
24. card without this symbol is C Temp compliant 2 1 Card Summary and Compatibility The Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH uses a common control card the 15310E CTX K9 and a combination of Ethernet cards CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 and electrical cards E1 21 E3 DS3 3 and E1 63 E3 DS3 3 The 15310E CTX K9 card provides optical connections for the ONS 15310 MA SDH This section provides a card summary Figure 2 1 shows the ONS 15310 MA SDH fully populated with cards Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter2 Card Reference Card Summary and Compatibility Figure 2 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH with Cards Installed CISCO ONS15310 MA SDH OPTICAL NETWORKING SYSTEM 17 BT 899 LL I A R 1_63_ 1_63_ CTX2500 E1 63 1 63 ice DS3 3 EB 47 DS3 DS3 FAL FAL K a L FAC
25. 131598 39 840 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 00 The ONS 15310 MA SDH main NSAP address is shown the node view Provisioning gt OSI gt Main Setup subtab This address is also the Router primary manual area address which is viewed and edited on the Provisioning gt OSI gt Routers subtab See the 8 6 6 OSI Virtual Routers section on page 8 32 for information about the OSI router and manual area addresses in CTC Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 x 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking 8 6 4 OSI Routing OSI architecture includes ESs and ISs The OSI routing scheme includes e Asset of routing protocols that allow ESs and ISs to collect and distribute the information necessary to determine routes Protocols include the ES IS and IS IS protocols ES IS routing establishes connectivity among ESs and ISs attached to the same single subnetwork e routing information base RIB containing this information from which routes between ESs can be computed The RIB consists of a table of entries that identify a destination for example an NSAP the subnetwork over which packets should be forwarded to reach that destination and a routing metric The routing metric communicates characteristics of the route such as delay properties or expected error rate that are used to evaluate the suitability of a route com
26. 905 7 001 200 feet Connector Wire Wrap DSX e Coaxial cables Coaxial cables connect to the electrical ports using BNC cable connectors Coaxial cables carry E3 DS3 traffic to and from the ONS 15310 MA SDH The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports up to three transmit and three receive coaxial connectors on each shelf assembly A Warning The E1 E3 ports on the ONS 15310 MA SDH are intra building ports and are suitable only for connecting to shielded cabling grounded at both ends Statement 1084 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EN 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation S Note In ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP installations E1 E3 ports are connected to the OSP The OSP cabinet is equipped with primary and secondary protections In addition isolation transformers are also provided RJ 45 cables RJ 45 cables connect to the LAN CRAFT and UDC ports An unshielded twisted pair STP 22 or 24 AWG wire is required for the CRAFT and UDC ports Unshielded twisted pair is sufficient for the alarm and LAN rear 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet STP Shielded Twisted Pair cables are used to connect the CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 cards e Alarm and timing BITS cables The Alarm In port requires a shielded cable terminated with a DB 37 connector Alarm Out requires a shielded cable terminated with a DB 25 connector and the bui
27. Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 5 Security User Privileges and Policies 5 2 User Privileges and Policies This section lists user privileges for each CTC action and describes the security policies available to Superusers 5 2 1 User Privileges by CTC Action Table 5 1 shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in node view Table 5 1 CTC Tab ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Node View Subtab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance Provisioning Superuser Alarms Synchronize Filter Delete Cleared Alarms X X X X Conditions Retrieve Filter History Session Filter Shelf Retrieve Filter Xx xXx Xx xXx Circuits Circuits Create Edit Delete Filter Search Rolls Complete Force Valid Signal Finish x lt gt x X X NK gt Provisioning General Edit Partial Network General Edit Static Routing Create Edit Delete OSPF Create Edit Delete RIP Create Edit Delete Proxy Create Edit Delete Firewall Create Edit Delete OSI Main Setup Edit TARP Config Edit TARP Static TDC Add Edit Delete PA X x x TARP MAT Add Edit Delete Routers Setup Edit Routers Subnets Edit Enable Disable Tunnels Create
28. Defaults tab existing card provisioning remains unaffected For more information about each individual node setting refer to the Change Node Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Note For Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH CTC level default settings refer to the C 2 CTC Default Settings section on page C 2 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EXE 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Default Value Default Domain NODE circuits State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInS disabled locked ervice maintenance unlocked automaticInServi ce NODE circuits sncp HO SDBER 1 00E 06 E 5 1E 6 1 E 7 1E 8 1E 9 NODE circuits sncp HO SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 NODE circuits sncp LO SDBER 1 00E 06 1 5 1 E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 NODE circuits sncp LO_SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1 5 NODE circuits sncp ProvisionWorkingGoAndReturnOnPrimary Path TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE circuits sncp ReversionTime 5 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 minutes 12 0 NODE circuits sncp Revertive FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE circuits sncp SwitchOnPDIP FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE general AllowService AffectingPortChangeToDisabled TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE general AutoPM FALSE FALSE TRUE N
29. Element ONS 15310 MA SDH NEs can derive time of day from an SNTP NTP LAN server through the GNE Process SNMPvI traps The GNE receives SNMPv1 traps from the ENE and forwards them to all provisioned SNMPv1 trap destinations The ONS 15310 MA SDH proxy server is provisioned using the Enable proxy server on port check box on the Provisioning Network General tab If checked the ONS 15310 MA SDH serves as a proxy for connections between CTC clients and ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes that are DCC connected to the proxy ONS 15310 MA SDH The CTC client establishes connections to DCC connected nodes through the proxy node The CTC client can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs If the Enable proxy server on port check box is not checked the node does not proxy for any CTC clients although any established proxy connections continue until the CTC client exits In addition you can set the proxy server as an ENE or a GNE e External Network Element ENE If set as ENE the ONS 15310 MA SDH neither installs nor advertises default or static routes CTC computers can communicate with the node using the craft port but they cannot communicate directly with any other DCC connected node In addition firewall is enabled which means that the node prevents IP traffic from being routed between the DCC and the LAN port The ONS 15310 MA SDH can communicate with machines connected to the LAN port or connected throug
30. End System The ONS 15310 MA SDH performs OSI ES functions and relies upon an IS for communication with nodes that reside within its OSI area Intermediate System Level 1 The ONS 15310 SDH performs OSI IS functions It communicates with IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area It depends upon an IS L1 L2 node to communicate with IS and ES nodes that reside outside its OSI area 8 6 4 1 End System to Intermediate System Protocol ES IS is an OSI protocol that defines how ESs hosts and ISs routers learn about each other ES IS configuration information is transmitted at regular intervals through the ES and IS hello messages The hello messages contain the subnetwork and network layer addresses of the systems that generate them The ES IS configuration protocol communicates both OSI network layer addresses and OSI subnetwork addresses OSI network layer addresses identify either the NSAP which is the interface between OSI Layer 3 and Layer 4 or the NET which is the network layer entity in an OSI IS OSI SNPAs are the points at which an ES or IS is physically attached to a subnetwork The SNPA address uniquely identifies each system attached to the subnetwork In an Ethernet network for example the SNPA is the 48 bit MAC address Part of the configuration information transmitted by ES IS is the NSAP to SNPA or NET to SNPA mapping 8 6 4 2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol 8 28 IS IS is an OSI link state
31. GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Novosibirsk Omsk GMT 06 30 GMT 06 30 Cocos Rangoon GMT 07 00 GMT 07 00 Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta GMT 07 00 GMT 07 00 Krasnoyarsk Norilsk Novokuznetsk GMT 08 00 GMT 08 00 Irkutsk Ulaan Bataar GMT 08 00 GMT 08 00 Beijing Shanghai Hong Kong Urumqi GMT 08 00 GMT 08 00 Perth GMT 08 00 GMT 08 00 Singapore Manila Taipei Kuala Lumpur GMT 09 00 GMT 09 00 Chita Yakutsk m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 8 Time Zones continued Time Zone GMT Hours Default Value GMT 09 00 GMT 09 00 Osaka Sapporo Tokyo GMT 09 00 GMT 09 00 Palau Pyongyang Seoul GMT 09 30 GMT 09 30 Adelaide Broken Hill GMT 09 30 GMT 09 30 Darwin GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 Brisbane Port Moresby Guam GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 Canberra Melbourne Sydney GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 Hobart GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 Khabarovsk Vladivostok GMT 10 30 GMT 10 30 Lord Howe Island GMT 11 00 GMT 11 00 Honiara Magadan Soloman Islands GMT 11 00 GMT 11 00 Noumea New Caledonia GMT 11 30 GMT 11 30 Kingston Norfolk Island GMT 12 00 GMT 12 00 Andyra Kamchatka GMT 12 00 GMT 12 00 Auckland Wellington GMT 12 00 GMT 12 00 Marshall Islands Eniwetok GMT 12 00 GMT 12 00 Suva Fiji GMT 12 45 GMT
32. Information Recorded Date Date and time of the condition Node Shows the name of the node where the condition or alarm occurred Visible in network view Object TL1 AID for the condition object For an VCMON LP or VTmon this is the monitored VC high order path or VC low order path object which is explained in Table 10 3 on page 10 3 Eqpt Type Card type in this slot appears only in network and node view Shelf For DWDM configurations the shelf where the alarmed object is located Visible in network view Slot Slot where the condition occurred appears only in network and node view Port Port where the condition occurred For VCTRM LP and VTTerm the port refers to the upstream card it is partnered with Path Width Width of the signal path Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EIE 78 19417 01 Chapter 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Viewing Alarms MI Table 10 6 Conditions Column Description continued Column Information Recorded Sev Severity level CR Critical MJ Major MN Minor NA Not Alarmed NR Not Reported SA Indicates a service affecting alarm when checked Cond The error message alarm name these names are alphabetically defined in the Cisco and ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide Description Description of the condition 1 alarms their severities and ser
33. Pluggable equipment does not work with the board configuration locked disabled mismatchofEq uipment 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix B Administrative and Service States HZ Service State Transitions Table B 6 Current Service State Action ONS 15310 MA SDH Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions continued Next Service State locked disabled Automati c In Service amp notInstalled Insert valid pluggable equipment unlocked enabled Insert pluggable equipment with the incorrect rate Pluggable equipment does not work with the board configuration locked disabled mismatchofEq uipment locked disabled mismatc hofEquipment Delete unsupported service rate or modify provisioning so that the pluggable equipment is no longer a mismatch unlocked enabled locked disabled notInstal led Insert valid pluggable equipment unlocked enabled locked disabled mismatc hofEquipment amp maintenance Delete unsupported service rate or modify provisioning so that the pluggable equipment is no longer a mismatch locked enabled maintenance locked disabled maintena nce amp notInstalled Insert valid pluggable equipment locked enabled maintenance locked disabled unassign ed Provision valid pluggable equipment unlocked enabled locked disabled unassign ed amp notInstalled I
34. RMON is sampled at one of four possible intervals Each interval or period contains specific history values called buckets Table 12 6 on page 12 15 lists the four sampling periods and corresponding buckets Certain statistics measured on the ML card are mapped to standard MIB if one exists else mapped to a non standard MIB variable The naming convention used by the standard non standard MIB is not the same as the statistics variable used by the card Hence when these statistics are obtained via get request get next request SNMP Trap they don t match the name used on the card or as seen by CTC TLI e Forex STATS MedialndStatsRxFramesTooLong stats is mapped to cMedialndependentInFramesTooLong variable in CERENT MIB STATS RxTotalPkts is mapped to medialndependentInPkts in HC RMON rfc3273 mib 12 10 1 Ethernet Statistics Group The Ethernet Statistics group contains the basic statistics for each monitored subnetwork in a single table named etherstats The group also contains 64 bit statistics in the etherStatsHighCapacity Table 12 10 1 1 Row Greation in etherStatsTable The SetRequest PDU for creating a row in this table contains all needed values to activate a table row in a single operation as well as assign the status variable to createRequest The SetRequest PDU OID entries must have an instance value or type OID of 0 In order to create a row the SetRequest PDU should contain the following e The etherStatsDataSource and its desi
35. Sensor 271782 In E1 63 DS3 3 cards the 63 E1 ports have backplane interface connectors as shown in Figure 2 8 Wideband Electrical Ports WBE Els 1 to 28 are connected to the AMP Champ 1 connector Ports I to 28 WBE Ports 29 to 56 to the Amp Champ 2 connector Ports 29 to 56 WBE Ports 59 to 65 to the AMP Champ 3 connector Ports 59 to 65 respectively In AMP Champ 3 you can only use the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ETE 78 19417 01 Chapter 2 Card Reference 1 21 DS3 and E1 63 053 3 Cards seven El ports from 59 to 65 You cannot use connectors 57 and 58 because the line timing configuration on the ASIC might disturb the data path in these two ports WBE Port 63 is accessed by AMP Champ 3 connector Port 65 This restriction is not applicable to the E1 21 E3 DS3 3 card Refer to the 32xE1 LFH RJ45 Panel and 32xE1 LFH 1 0 2 3 Panel sections of Cisco ONS 15305 Installation and Operations Guide Release 2 0 for information about patch panels Note When you use a third party patch panel you need to use an unconnectored cable Figure 2 8 BIC Configuration on WBE Cards J5 BITS2 J7 Al OUT S559 e 212 ES Ol Oro
36. Table A 5 Multimode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications 12 Table B 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Tables MI BE Tables Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table B 5 Table B 6 Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 Table C 5 Table C 6 Table C 7 Table C 8 ONS 15310 MA SDH Secondary States 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Administrative States B 3 ONS 15310 SDH Card Service State Transitions 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Transitions B 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions B 13 CTC Default Settings C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings C 5 E1 21 DS3 3 Card Default Settings C 15 E1 63 DS3 3 Card Default Settings C 21 CE MR 6 100 8 and ML 100T 8 Card Default Settings 28 Ethernet Card Default Settings C 29 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings C 31 Time Zones C 39 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 amp Preface Note The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer
37. in Secure Mode 8 42 8 8 5 IPv6 Limitations 8 42 8 9 FTP Support for ENE Database Backup 8 42 CHAPTER 9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades 9 1 9 1 Subnetwork Connection Protection Configurations 9 1 9 1 1 Subnetwork Connection Protection Bandwidth 9 2 9 1 2 Subnetwork Connection Protection Application Example 9 2 9 2 Terminal Point to Point and Linear ADM Configurations 9 3 9 3 Interoperability 9 4 9 3 1 Subtending Rings 9 4 9 3 2 Linear Connections 9 5 9 4 Path Protected Mesh Networks 9 6 9 5 Four Node Configurations 9 8 9 6 STMN Speed Upgrades 9 8 9 6 1 Span Upgrade Wizard 9 9 9 6 2 Manual Span Upgrades 9 9 9 7 Overlay Ring Circuits 9 9 cHAPTER 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management 10 1 10 1 Overview 10 1 10 2 Viewing Alarms 10 1 10 2 1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node s Time Zone 10 3 10 2 2 Controlling Alarm Display 10 4 10 2 3 Filtering Alarms 10 4 10 2 4 Viewing Alarm Affected Circuits 10 4 10 2 5 Conditions Tab 10 5 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 CHAPTER 11 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 Oo Contents MI 10 2 6 Controlling the Conditions Display 10 5 10 2 6 1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions 10 6 10 2 6 2 Conditions Column Descriptions 10 6 10 2 6 3 Filtering Conditions 10 7 10 2 7 Viewing History 10 7 10 2 7 1 History Column Descriptions 10 8 10 2 7 2 Retrieving and Displaying Alarm and Condition History 10 8 10 2 8 Alarm History and Log Buffe
38. 0 3715200 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1 day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend I day LOSS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend I day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min AISS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 BIP 0 38700 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix Network Element Defaults Table C 4 E1_63_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min S 5 2 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day AISS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1 day CV 3820 0 3715200 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1 day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend I day
39. OPR MAX Maximum Receive Optical Power dBm OPR MIN Minimum Receive Optical Power dBm OPT Optical Power Transmitted OPT is the measure of average optical power transmitted as a percentage of the nominal OPT OPT AVG Average Transmit Optical Power dBm OPT MAX Maximum Transmit Optical Power dBm OPT MIN Minimum Transmit Optical Power dBm RS BBE Regenerator Section Background Block Error RS BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES RS BBER Regenerator Section Background Block Error Ratio RS BBER is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs RS EB Regenerator Section Errored Block RS EB indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block RS ES Regenerator Section Errored Second RS ES is a one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect RS ESR Regenerator Section Errored Second Ratio RS ESR is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval RS SES Regenerator Section Severely Errored Second RS SES is a one second period which contains 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES RS SESR Regenerator Section Severely Errored Second Ratio RS SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval RS UAS Regenerator Section Unavailable Sec
40. PPP components used in the transport of OSI include High level data link control HDLC Performs the datagram encapsulation for transport across point to point links Link control protocol LCP Establishes configures and tests point to point connections CTC automatically enables IP over PPP whenever you create an RS DCC or MS DCC The RS DCC or MS DCC can be provisioned to support OSI over PPP 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking 8 6 2 Link Access Protocol on the D Channel LAP D is a data link protocol used in the OSI protocol stack LAP D is assigned when you provision an ONS 15310 MA SDH RS DCC as OSI only Provisionable LAP D parameters include Transfer Service One of the following transfer services must be assigned Acknowledged Information Transfer Service AITS Default Does not exchange data until a logical connection between two LAP D users is established This service provides reliable data transfer flow control and error control mechanisms Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service UITS Transfers frames containing user data with no acknowledgement The service does not guarantee that the data presented by one user will be delivered to another user nor does it inform the user if the delivery attempt fails It does not provide any flow control or error contr
41. RTN 48VDC PWR B J1 LAN J2 CRFT J3 UDC J4 BITS1 J6 ALM INPUT PWRA 48VDC RTN w OT eTg Te ps NO w N L O J27 OUT J28 IN J29 OUT J30 IN J33 HD 053 4 V an CODE CLEI CODE r S N PID VID J8 PN 2 o 9 r TF je E1 IN ox Jo E1 out J10 L 3909 3000 ava L N S JL GIA 4 J16 OUT J17 IN J14 OUT J20 HD DS3 C 2 6 1 E1 21 DS3 3and E1 63 DS3 3 Card Level Indicators The E1 21 DS3 3 and E1 63 DS3 3 cards have three card level LED indicators Table 2 10 78 19417 01 E1s 1 28 E1s 29 56 E1s 59 65 271767 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter2 Reference Filler Cards Table 2 10 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and E1 63 E3 DS3 3 Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED Indicates that the card processor is not ready This LED is on during reset The FAIL LE
42. X X New Load Compare Available X X Usage MS SPRing Create Delete Edit Upgrade X X Overhead Create Delete Edit Merge X X Search x x x x Provisionable Create Edit Delete X X Patchcords PPC Server Trails Create Edit Delete X X VLAN DB Load Store Merge Circuits X X X X Profile Add Remove Rows x x Maintenance Software Download Cancel x x x Diagnostic OSPF Node Information x x x x Retrieve Clear APC Run APC Disable APC X Refresh X X X X 1 The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users but the actions can be completely performed only by the users assigned with the required security levels 5 2 2 Security Policies Users with the Superuser security privilege can provision security policies on the ONS 15310 MA SDH These security policies include idle user timeouts password changes password aging and user lockout parameters In addition a Superuser can access the ONS 15310 MA SDH through the LAN port on the front of the node If enabled in the NE defaults superusers can be configured to override the inactive user timeout interval 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Chapter5 Security User Privileges and Policies 5 22 1 Superuser Privileges for Provisioning Users Superusers can grant permission to Provisioning users to perform a set of tasks The tasks include retrieving an
43. arbeide med noe av utstyret m du v re oppmerksom p farene forbundet med elektriske kretser og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for forhindre ulykker Bruk nummeret i slutten av hver advarsel for finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne enheten TA VARE P DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE Aviso INSTRUGOES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANGA Este s mbolo de aviso significa perigo Voc est em uma situac o que poder ser causadora de les es corporais Antes de iniciar a utilizac o de qualquer equipamento tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos el tricos e familiarize se com as pr ticas habituais de prevenc o de acidentes Utilize o nimero da instruc o fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua traduc o nos avisos de seguranca traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo GUARDE ESTAS INSTRU ES jAdvertencia INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD Este simbolo de aviso indica peligro Existe riesgo para su integridad fisica Antes de manipular cualquier equipo considere los riesgos de la corriente el ctrica y familiaricese con los procedimientos est ndar de prevenci n de accidentes Al final de cada advertencia encontrar el n mero que le ayudar a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompa a a este dispositivo GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES Varning VIKTIGA S KERHETSANVISNINGAR Denna varningssignal signalerar fara Du befinner dig i
44. as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This chapter explains Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH topologies and upgrades To provision topologies refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 9 1 Subnetwork Connection Protection Configurations page 9 1 e 9 3 Interoperability page 9 4 e 9 2 Terminal Point to Point and Linear ADM Configurations page 9 3 e 9 4 Path Protected Mesh Networks page 9 6 e 9 5 Four Node Configurations page 9 8 e 9 6 STMN Speed Upgrades page 9 8 e 9 7 Overlay Ring Circuits page 9 9 9 1 Subnetwork Connection Protection Configurations Subnetwork Connection Protection SNCP configurations provide duplicate fiber paths around the ring Working traffic flows in one direction and protection traffic flows in the opposite direction If a problem occurs with the working traffic path the receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction CTC automates ring configuration Subnetwork Connection Protection traffic is defined within the ONS 15310 MA SDH on a circuit by circuit basis If a path protected circuit is not defined within a 1 1 line protection scheme and Subnetwork Connection Protection is available and specified CTC uses Subnetwo
45. entry creation To create a SetRequest PDU for the historyControlTable the following values are required The historyControlDataSource and its desired value The historyControlBucketsRequested and it desired value The historyControlInterval and its desired value The historyControlOwner and its desired value The historyControlStatus with a value of createRequest 2 The historyControlBucketsRequested OID value is ignored because the number of buckets allowed for each sampling period based upon the historyControlInterval value is already fixed as listed in Table 12 6 The historyControlInterval value cannot be changed from the four allowed choices If you use another value the SNMP agent selects the closest smaller time period from the set buckets For example if the set request specifies a 25 minute interval this falls between the 15 minute 32 bucket variable and the 60 minute 24 bucket variable The SNMP agent automatically selects the lower closer value which is 15 minutes so it allows 32 buckets If the SetRequest PDU is valid a historyControlTable row is created If the row already exists or if the SetRequest PDU values do not make sense or are insufficient the SNMP agent does not create the row and returns an error code 12 10 2 3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests These PDUs are not restricted 12 10 2 4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table To delete a row from the table the SetRequest PDU should contain a h
46. locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment Provision a valid card locked disabled softwareDownl oad 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix B Administrative and Service States Service State Transitions Table B 4 ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Service State Transitions continued Current Service State Action Next Service State locked disabled unassigned amp Insert a valid card locked disabled softwareDownl notInstalled oad Insert an invalid card locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp unassigned Preprovision a card locked disabled Automatic In Service amp notInstalled locked enabled maintenance Change the administrative state unlocked enabled to unlocked Delete the card locked disabled unassigned Pull the card locked disabled maintenance amp notInstalled Reset the card locked disabled maintenance amp softwareDownload Alarm condition is raised locked disabled FLT amp maintenance B 32 Port and Cross Connect Service State Transitions Table B 5 lists the port and cross connect service state transitions Port states do not impact cross connect states with one exception A cross connect in the locked disabled Automatic In Service service state cannot transition autonomously into the unlocked enabled service state until the parent port is in the unlocked enabled service state You cannot transition a
47. members are in the locked disabled Automa tic In Service amp FLT or unlocked enabled service state locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state Note VCAT In Group members are in the locked enabled FLT amp maintenance service state locked enabled FLT amp maintenance Operate a loopback locked enabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance amp outOfGroup 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix B Administrative and Service States HZ Service State Transitions Table B 5 Transitions continued Current Service State Action ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State locked enabled disabled Put the port or cross connect in the unlocked administrative state unlocked enabled Put the port or cross connect in the Automatic In Service administrative state locked disabled Automatic In Service Put the port or cross connect in the locked maintenance locked enabled maintenance Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfGroup administrative state locked enabled maintenance amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfG
48. or Virtual Tributary alarm indication signal AIS V insertion on VC3 signal degrade SD parameters 2 Provisioner user cannot perform this task in secure mode 3 The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users but the actions can be completely performed only by the users with the required security levels Table 5 2 shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in network view Table 5 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Network View CTC Tab Subtab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance Provisioning Superuser Alarms Synchronize Filter Delete X X X X cleared alarms Conditions Retrieve Filter X X X X History Filter X X X X m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter5 Security User Privileges and Policies Table 5 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Network View continued CTC Tab Subtab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance Provisioning Superuser Circuits Circuits Create Edit Delete X X Filter Search X X X X Rolls Complete Force Valid Signal X X Finish Provisioning Security Users Create Delete Clear X Security Intrusion Alarm Users Change Same User Same User Same User All Users Active logins Logout Retrieve X Last Activity Time Policy Change X Alarm Profiles Store Delete
49. seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend IL day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day EB 125 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day NPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCDIFF 5760 count 0 1382400000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCS PDET 9600 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCS PGEN 9600 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PPJC PDET
50. thresholds Change path payload defect indication PDI P settings Note On the Subnetwork Connection Protection Selectors tab the SF Ber Level and SD Ber Level columns display N A for those nodes that do not support VC low order path signal BER monitoring In the Subnetwork Connection Protection Switch Counts subtab you can e Perform maintenance switches on the circuit selector e View switch counts for the selectors 7 6 1 Open Ended Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits If ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes are connected to a third party network you can create an open ended Subnetwork Connection Protection circuit to route a circuit through the network To do this you create four circuits One circuit is created on the source network This circuit has one source and two destinations with each destination provisioned to the interface that is connected to the third party network The second and third circuits are created on the third party network so that the circuit travels across the network on two diverse paths to the far end node At the destination node the fourth circuit is created with two sources one at each node interface connected to the third party network A selector at the destination node chooses between the two signals that arrive at the node similar to a regular Subnetwork Connection Protection circuit 7 6 2 Go and Return Subnetwork Connection Protection Routing The go and return Subnetwork Connection Prot
51. 01 7 25 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Server Trails Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 amp CHAPTER Management Network Connectivity This chapter provides an overview of Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH data communications network DCN connectivity Cisco Optical Networking System ONS network communication is based on IP including communication between Cisco Transport Controller CTC computers and ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes and communication among networked ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes The chapter provides scenarios showing ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes in common IP network configurations as well as information about provisionable patchcords the IP routing table external firewalls and open gateway network element GNE networks Although ONS 15310 MA SDH DCN communication is based on IP ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes can be networked to equipment that is based on the Open System Interconnection OSI protocol suites This chapter describes the OSI implementation and provides scenarios that show how the ONS 15310 MA SDH can be networked within a mixed IP and OSI environment Chapter topics include e 8 1 IP Networking Overview page 8 2 e 8 2 IP Addressing Scenarios page 8 2 e 8 3 Routing Table page 8 16 8 4 External Firewalls page 8 18 e 8 5 Open GNE page 8 20 e 8 6 TCP IP and OSI Networking page 8 22 e 8 7 IPv6 Network Compatibility page 8 40 e 8 8 IPv6 Native Support pa
52. 1 1 1 14 25 etherStatsPkts65to127Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 15 26 jetherStatsPkts128to255Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 16 27 etherStatsPkts256to5 1 I Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 17 28 etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 18 29 jetherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 19 30 EtherStatsBroadcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 6 3 EtherStatsMulticastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 7 32 EtherStatsOversizePkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 10 33 EtherStatsJabbers 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 12 34 EtherStatsOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 4 35 EtherStatsCollisions 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 13 36 EtherStatsCollisions 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 8 37 EtherStatsDropEvents 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 3 Unsupported in E100 E1000 and G1000 12 10 43 Get Requests and GetNext Requests These PDUs are not restricted m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter12 SNMP SNMP Remote Monitoring 12 10 4 4 Row Deletion in alarmTable To delete a row from the table the SetRequest PDU should contain an alarmStatus value of 4 invalid A deleted row can be recreated Note Entries in the alarmTable are preserved if the SNMP agent is restarted 12 10 5 Event RMON Group The event group controls event generation and notification It consists of two tables the eventTable which is
53. 125 Gl 0 207360000 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min CV 15 B3count 0 2160000 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend I day CV 125 B3 0 207360000 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1 day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config LineCoding HDB3 HDB3 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config LineType 1_ 1_ E1_CRCMF UNFRAMED 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA S
54. 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Pcs E 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config vc4 IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config vclo PPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min BBE 21260 count 0 2212200 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min EB 21260 count 0 2212200 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend I day BBE 212600 0 212371200 count CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend I day EB 212600 0 212371200 count CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms farend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500
55. 3 PPJC PGEN parameter 11 3 PPMN description 9 6 example ONS 15310 MA 9 7 example ONS 15310 SDH 9 6 virtual ring ONS 15310 MA 9 8 PPMs See also SFP description 2 5 preprovisioning requirement 7 2 provisioning 2 22 span upgrades 9 8 preprovisioning SFPs 7 2 printing CTC data 4 15 processing TARP data 8 30 8 31 protection switching See also automatic protection switching See also external switching commands overview 3 1 protocols DHCP 4 6 8 3 8 1 IS IS 8 28 LAP D 8 24 OSI See OSI OSPF See OSPF PPP 8 23 Proxy ARP See Proxy ARP SNMP 12 1 SSM 6 2 provisioning circuits with TL1 7 5 external alarm inputs 10 13 external alarms and controls 10 13 external control output 10 14 IP over CLNS tunnels 8 34 OSI in 8 39 PPMs 2 22 Index M TID to NSAP manually 8 32 Provisioning user description 5 1 idle user timeout 5 6 network level actions 5 4 node level actions 5 2 obtaining Superuser privileges 5 6 Proxy ARP description 8 2 enabling a gateway 8 4 use with static routes 8 5 proxy server description 8 11 filtering rules 8 15 open GNE 8 20 proxy tunnel 8 20 rack installation multiple nodes ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 5 single node ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 4 RADIUS authentication 5 8 overview 5 8 shared secrets 5 8 RAM requirements 4 4 reconfiguring circuits 7 23 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service See RADIUS remote network monitoring See RMON resetting common control cards 4 1
56. 30 30 24 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 8 38 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity 8 6 8 Provisioning OSI in CTC Table 8 14 shows the OSI actions that can be performed in CTC using the node view Provisioning tab Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for OSI procedures and tasks TCP IP and OSI Networking Table 8 14 OSI Actions from the CTC Node View Provisioning Tab Tab Actions OSI gt Main Setup e View and edit Primary Area Address Change OSI routing mode Change LSP buffers OSI gt TARP gt Config Configure the TARP parameters e PDULI L2 propagation and origination e TARP data cache and loop detection buffer e LAN storm suppression Type 4 PDU on startup TARP timers LDB El T2 DS3 E3 4 OSI TARP Static TDC Add and delete static TARP data cache entries OSI TARP MAT Add and delete static manual area table entries OSI Routers Setup Enable and disable routers e Add delete and edit manual area addresses OSI Routers Subnets Edit RS DCC MS DCC and LAN subnets that are provisioned for OSI OSI Tunnels Add delete and edit Cisco and IP over CLNS tunnels Comm Channels RS DCC e Add OSI configuration to an RS DCC e Choose the data link layer protocol PPP or LAP D Comm Channels MS DCC e Add OSI configuration
57. 8 interval maxBaseRate Tx outOctets 8 interval maxBaseRate The interval is defined in seconds The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the Ethernet port that is 1 Gbps Refer to Table 11 7 on page 11 22 for maxBaseRate values for VC high order path circuits Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports MI 11 6 1 6 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card POS Ports History Window The Ethernet POS Ports History window lists past Ethernet POS Ports statistics for the previous time intervals Depending on the selected time interval the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in Table 11 8 on page 11 22 The listed parameters are defined in Table 11 6 on page 11 20 11 7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports The following sections list the PM parameters for the STM1 STM4 and STM 16 ports The listed parameters are defined in Table 11 2 on page 11 4 11 7 1 STM1 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 11 8 shows the signal types that support near end and far end PM parameters Figure 11 8 Monitored Signal Types for the STM1 Port PTE ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA
58. 8 Card 2 6 2 3 1 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators 2 8 2 3 2 CE 100T 8 Port Level Indicators 2 8 CE MR 6 Card 2 9 2 4 1 CE MR 6 Card Level Indicators 2 12 2 4 2 CE MR 6 Port Level Indicators 2 12 ML 100T 8 Card 2 12 2 5 1 100 8 Card Description 2 13 2 5 2 ML Series Cisco IOS CLI Console Port 2 13 2 5 3 100 8 Card Level Indicators 2 18 2 5 4 100 8 Port Level Indicators 2 15 E1 21 DS3 3andE1 63 DS3 3Cards 2 16 2 6 1 E1 21 053 E1 63 DS3 3 Card Level Indicators Filler Cards 2 18 SFP Modules 2 19 2 8 1 Compatibility by Card 2 20 2 8 2 SFP Description 2 21 2 8 3 PPM Provisioning 2 22 cHAPTER 3 Card Protection 3 1 3 1 Overview 3 1 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 3 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Card and Port Protection 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 Electrical Card Protection 3 2 3 2 2 LMSP Optical Port Protection 3 4 3 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Card Equipment Protection 3 4 3 3 Automatic Protection Switching 3 5 3 4 External Switching Commands 3 5 CHAPTER 4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 4 1 4 1 CTC Software Delivery Methods 4 1 4 1 1 CTC Software Installed on the 15310E CTX K9 Card 4 1 4 1 2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation 4 2 4 2 CTC Installation Overview 4 3 4 3 PC UNIX and Mac Workstation Requirements 4 3 4 4 ONS 15310 SDH Connection 4 5 45 CTC Login 4 6 4 6 Window 4 7 46 1 Node View 4 8 4 6 1 1
59. AVSIM aic HASS ROA ALS 0 AA AFet Sa Ei etolelA 9 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Preface Aviso Advarsel Upozorenje Upozorn ni INSTRUGOES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANCA Este s mbolo de aviso significa perigo Voc se encontra em uma situa o em que h risco de les es corporais Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos el tricos e familiarize se com as pr ticas padr o de prevenc o de acidentes Use o n mero da declarac o fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua traduc o nos avisos de seguranca traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCOES VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse F r du begynder arbejde pa udstyr skal du v re opm rksom p de involverede risici der er ved elektriske kredsl b og du skal s tte dig ind i standardprocedurer til undgaelse af ulykker Brug erkl ringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde overs ttelsen i de oversatte advarsler der fulgte med denne enhed GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER GUY ol aL head uty g paid dic GIS belgie pia 3923 ILD 21 539 93 1940 Apulia lel a SIL ele le 559 Abr teca yo ail Deae AG Gades ola
60. CTX K9 Card Level Indicators The 15310E CTX K9 card has four card level LEDs described in Table 2 3 Table 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED turns on and flashes until the software deems the card operational 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter2 Reference BE 100 8 Card Table 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Card Level Indicators continued Card Level LEDs Description ACT STBY LED The ACT STBY LED is green if the card is the active 153 10OE CTX K9 card Green Amber It is amber if the card is the standby card SYNC LED The SYNC LED is green if the 15310E CTX K9 card detects both a primary Green Amber and secondary clock reference It is amber if the card detects only a single clock reference 2 2 5 15310E CTX K9 Port Level Indicators Two bicolor LEDs show the status per port Ports 1 and 2 The port LED is green if the port is available to carry traffic and is provisioned as in service The port LED is red if there is a signal failure or loss of signal on the port 2 3 CE 100T 8 Card This section describes the features and functions of the Layer 1 Ethernet card the 100 8 Note A The CE 100T 8
61. Card weight not including clam shell 0 9 Ib 0 45 kg The 15310 CTX FILLER card has the following specifications e Environmental Operating temperature I Temp 40 to 65 degrees Celsius 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity Dimensions Height 6 94 in 167 28 mm Width 1 450 in 36 83 mm Depth 8 35 in 212 09 mm Weight not including clam shell 0 51 Ib 0 23 kg A 3 SFP Specifications Table A 2 lists specifications for available SFPs that can be used with the 15310E CTX K9 card Table A 3 lists specifications for available SFPs that can be used only with the CE MR 6 card ONS 15310 MA only Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EH AppendixA Specifications BNN SFP Specifications The 15310 CL CTX card does not have a faceplate because it is located inside the chassis therefore the two SFP slots are located on the ONS 15310 CL faceplate just to the left of the LAN port The two SFP slots on the 15310E CTX K9 are located 15310E CTX K9 faceplate Table A 2 SFP Specifications Transmitter Output Receiver Input Power SFP Product ID Interface Power Min Max dBm Min Max dBm ONS SI 155 L1 OC 3 5 0 to 0 34 to 10 ONS SI 155 L2 OC 3 5 0 to 0 34 to 10 ONS SI 155 I1 OC 3 15
62. Chapter topics include e 5 1 Users IDs and Security Levels page 5 1 e 5 2 User Privileges and Policies page 5 2 e 5 3 Audit Trail page 5 7 e 5 4 RADIUS Security page 5 8 5 1 Users IDs and Security Levels A CISCO15 user ID is provided with the ONS 15310 MA SDH for use with initial login Use this ID to set up other ONS 15310 MA SDH user IDs For instructions see the Turn Up a Node chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Note Cisco Transport Controller CTC does not display the CISCO15 user ID when you log in An ONS 15310 MA SDH node can support up to 500 user IDs Each CTC or Transaction Language 1 TL1 user ID can be assigned one of the following security levels Retrieve Users can retrieve and view CTC information but cannot set or modify parameters Maintenance Users can access only the ONS 15310 MA SDH maintenance options e Provisioning Users can access provisioning and maintenance options e Superuser Users can perform all of the functions of the other security levels as well as set names passwords and security levels for other users By default multiple concurrent user ID sessions are permitted on the node that is multiple users can log into a node using the same user ID However you can provision the node to allow only a single login per user ID and prevent concurrent logins for all users See Table 5 3 on page 5 6 for idle user timeout information for each security level
63. Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Note When the card level defaults are changed the new provisioning done after the defaults have changed 15 affected Existing provisioning remains unaffected The following types of defaults are defined for Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH cards C 3 1 Configuration Defaults Most card level and port level configuration defaults correspond to settings found in the CTC card level Provisioning tabs Note The full set of ALS configuration defaults can be found in the CTC card level Maintenance gt Optical gt ALS tabs for supported cards ALS defaults are supported for PPM SFP STMN ports on the 15310E CTX K9 card Note ML 100T 8 console port access and RADIUS server access defaults can be found in the CTC card level IOS tab for ML 100T 8 cards Configuration defaults that correspond to settings that are reachable from the CTC card level Provisioning tabs except as noted include the following types of options arranged by CTC subtab Broadband Ports E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and 63 DS3 3 cards only Set the BBE port rate as DS3 E3 or unassigned DS3 is the default e EI E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and El 63 DS3 3 cards only rate port level line configuration settings e DS3 E1 21 DS3 3and El 63 DS3 3 cards DS3 rate port level line configuration settings Pluggable Port Modules 15310E CTX K9 cards only PPM SFP slot and port
64. Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware 1 1 1 1 Installation Overview 1 1 1 2 Rack Installation 1 2 1 2 1 Mounting Brackets 1 3 1 2 2 Mounting a Single Node 1 4 1 2 3 Mounting Multiple Nodes 1 5 1 3 Electrical Interface Assemblies 1 5 1 4 Front Door 1 6 1 5 Rear Cover 1 7 1 6 Power and Ground Description 1 7 1 7 Shelf Temperature 1 10 1 8 Cable Description and Installation 1 10 1 8 1 Cabling Types 1 10 1 8 2 Fiber Cable Installation 1 13 1 8 3 Coaxial Cable Installation 1 14 1 8 4 E1 Cable Installation 1 15 1 8 5 Alarm Cable Installation 1 18 1 8 6 BITS Cable Installation 1 20 1 8 7 UDC Cable Installation 1 20 1 9 Cable Routing and Management 1 21 1 9 1 Standard Cable Management Bracket 1 21 1 9 2 Extended Cable Management Bracket 1 22 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Contents 1 10 Fan Tray Assembly 1 23 1 10 1 Fan Speed and Power Requirements 1 24 1 10 2 Fan Failure 1 24 1 10 3 Air Filter 1 24 1 10 4 Orderwire 1 24 1 11 Cards and Slots 1 26 CHAPTER 2 Card Reference 2 1 24 22 2 3 2 4 25 2 6 24 28 Card Summary and Compatibility 2 1 2 1 1 Card Summary 2 2 2 1 2 Card Compatibility 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Card 2 4 2 2 1 System Cross Connect 2 5 2 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Side Switches 2 5 2 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Optical Interfaces 2 5 2 2 4 15310E CTX K9 Card Level Indicators 2 5 2 2 5 15310E CTX K9 Port Level Indicators 2 6 100
65. Connectors J8 J9 Side B EIA Connectors J21 and J22 Signal Pin Signal Pin Ring Port 1 1 Tip Port 1 33 Ring Port 2 2 Tip Port 2 34 Ring Port 3 3 Tip Port 3 35 Ring Port 4 4 Tip Port 4 36 Ring Port 5 5 Tip Port 5 37 Ring Port 6 6 Tip Port 6 38 Ring Port 7 7 Tip Port 7 39 Ring Port 8 8 Tip Port 8 40 Ring Port 9 9 Tip Port 9 41 Ring Port 10 10 Tip Port 10 42 Ring Port 11 11 Tip Port 11 43 Ring Port 12 12 Tip Port 12 44 Ring Port 13 13 Tip Port 13 45 Ring Port 14 14 Tip Port 14 46 Ring Port 15 15 Tip Port 15 47 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Table 1 2 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA Connectors J8 J9 Side B EIA Connectors J21 and J22 continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Ring Port 16 16 Tip Port 16 48 Ring Port 17 17 Tip Port 17 49 Ring Port 18 18 Tip Port 18 50 Ring Port 19 19 Tip Port 19 51 Ring Port 20 20 Tip Port 20 52 Ring Port 21 21 Tip Port 21 53 Ring Port 22 22 Tip Port 22 54 Ring Port 23 23 Tip Port 23 55 Ring Port 24 24 Tip Port 24 56 Ring Port 25 25 Tip Port 25 57 Ring Port 26 26 Tip Port 26 58 Ring Port 27 27 Tip Port 27 59 Ring Port 28 28 Tip Port 28 60 Unused 29 Unused 61 Unused 30 Unused 62 Unused 31 Unused 63 Unused 32 Unused 64 Table 1 3 lists the Champ
66. Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSD R 600 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSD S 600 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSD W 600 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min EB 15 count 0 13305600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1day EB 125 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1 day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1 day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16
67. Description Subtabs Circuits Creates deletes edits and Circuits Rolls search circuits and completes rolls Provisioning Provisions a card 15310 MA SDH electrical cards Wideband Ports Broadband Ports E1 subtabs include Line Line Thresholds Elect Path Thresholds and SDH Thresholds DS3 subtabs include Line Line Thresholds Elect Path Thresholds and SDH Thresholds E3 subtabs include Line SDH Thresholds and SDH VC high order path 15310E CTX K9 card Optical subtabs include Line SDH Thresholds SDH VC high order path and Optics Thresholds Pluggable Port Modules External Alarms External Controls and Alarm Profiles Ethernet cards subtabs depend on the card type Ether Ports POS Ports Ether VLAN Ether Card Card Ether Thresholds Alarm Profiles Maintenance Performs maintenance tasks for 15310 SDH electrical cards E1 subtabs the card include Loopback Protection Path Trace Automatic In Service Soak DS3 subtabs include Loopback Protection Path Trace Automatic In Service Soak E3 subtabs include Loopback Protection Path Trace Automatic In Service Soak 15310E CTX K9 card Optical subtabs include Loopback ALS Protection Path Trace Automatic In Service Soak External Alarms External Controls and Virtual Wires Ethernet cards Path Trace Loopback VC virtual container Allocation Bandwidth Automatic In Service Soak Performance Performs performance 15310E CTX K card E
68. Domain E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1 day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmth
69. E1 Ports Line Tx Rx Path NE VC12 LP NE FE Tx Rx Path FE CV L AISS P LP EB AISS PFE ES L BBE P LP ES BBE PFE SES L BBER P LP SES BBER PFE LOSS L EB P LP UAS EB PFE ES P LP BBE ES PFE ESR P LP ESR ESR PFE SES P LP SESR SES PFE SESR P LP BBER SESR PFE UAS P UAS PFE 1 SDH path PMs do not increment unless IPPM is enabled See the 11 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring section Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EISE Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports 2 Transmit and receive CEPT and CRC4 framing path PM parameters for the near end and far end E1 N 14 and E1 42 cards 3 Under the Provisioning Threshold tab the E1 N 14 card and the E1 42 card have user defined thresholds for the E 1 Rx path PM parameters In the Threshold tab they are displayed as EB BBE ES SES and UAS without the Rx prefix Note Under the Provisioning gt E1 gt SDH Threshold tab the E1 21 DS3 3 and E1 63 DS3 3 cards have user defined thresholds for the E1 receive Rx path PM parameters In the SDH Threshold tab they appear as CV ES FC SES and UAS without the Rx prefix Note Under the Performance tab the displayed E1 Tx path PM parameter values are based on calculations performed by the card and therefore have no user defined thresholds The tab is labeled Elect rical Path Threshold
70. Edit Delete Protection Create Delete Edit m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 5 Security Table 5 1 CTC Tab ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Node View continued Subtab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance User Privileges and Policies Provisioning Superuser Provisioning continued Security Users Create Delete Clear Security Intrusion Alarm X Users Change Same user Same user Same user All users Active Logins View Logout Retrieve Last Activity Time X Policy Edit View Prevent superuser disable NE Default X Data Comm Edit View Access Edit View RADIUS Server Create Edit Delete Move Up Move Down View Legal Disclaimer Edit SNMP Create Edit Delete Browse trap destinations Comm Channels RS DCC Create Edit Delete MS DCC Create Edit Delete PPC Create Edit Delete Timing General BITS Facilities Edit Orderwire Enable Buzzer Alarm Extenders External Alarms Edit External Controls Edit Alarm Profiles Alarm Behavior Edit Alarm Profile Editor Store Delete X X X X gt X P lt X X 0X X Alarm Profile Editor New Load Compare Available Usage Defaults Edit Import Reset Export
71. General tab the Maximum History Entries value only applies to the Session window Different views of CTC display different kinds of history The History gt Session window is shown in network view node view and card view It shows alarms and conditions that occurred during the current user CTC session The History gt Shelf window is only shown in node view It shows the alarms and conditions that occurred on the node since CTC software was operated on the node The History gt Card window is only shown in card view It shows the alarms and conditions that occurred on the card since CTC software was installed on the node Tip Double click an alarm in the History window to display the corresponding view For example double clicking a card alarm takes you to card view In network view double clicking a node alarm takes you to node view 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management viewing Alarms If you check the History window Alarms check box you display the node history of alarms If you check the Events check box you display the node history of Not Alarmed and transient events conditions If you check both check boxes you retrieve node history for both 10 2 7 1 History Column Descriptions Table 10 7 lists the History window column headings and the information recorded in each column
72. IP over CLNS provisioning on Router 1 ip routing clns routing interface ctunnel 102 ip address 10 10 30 30 255 255 255 0 ctunnel destination 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 interface Ethernet0 1 clns router isis router isis net 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 bbbbbbbbbbbb 00 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking Figure 8 20 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2 ONS Node to Router J CTC 1 10 10 10 100 24 Va Router 2 Interface 0 0 10 10 10 10 24 Interface 0 1 10 10 20 10 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 aaaaaaaaaaaa 00 Router 1 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 20 24 Interface 0 1 10 10 30 10 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 bbbbbbbbbbbb 00 OSI ug Other vendor GRE GNE Cisco IP tunnel z 2 OSI E Y osL only OSI DCC LAPD ONS NE 1 lt Other vendor 10 10 30 30 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 134356 8 6 7 4 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3 ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN Figure 8 21 shows an IP over CLNS tunnel from an ONS node to a router across an OSI DCN The other vendor NE has an OSI connection to an IP DCN to which a CTC computer is attached An OSI only LAP D RS DCC is created between the ONS NE 1 and the other vender GNE The OSI over IP tunnel can be either the Cisco IP tunne
73. MA SDH assembly is typically connected to a fuse and alarm panel that provides centralized alarm connection points and distributed power for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Fuse and alarm panels are third party equipment and are not described in this documentation If you are unsure about the requirements or specifications for a fuse and alarm panel consult the documentation for that product Note In this chapter the terms ONS 15310 MA SDH and shelf assembly are used interchangeably In the installation context these terms have the same meaning Otherwise shelf assembly refers to the physical steel enclosure that holds cards and connects power and ONS 15310 MA SDH refers to the entire system both hardware and software 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Rack Installation Note The ONS 15310 MA SDH is suitable for installation in network telecommunication facilities where National Electric Code NEC applies Install the ONS 15310 MA SDH in compliance with your local and national electrical codes e United States National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 United States National Electrical Code e Canada Canadian Electrical Code Part I CSA C22 1 Other countries If local and national electrical codes are not available refer to IEC 364 Part 1 through Part 7 Detailed compliance
74. MA SDH without the mandatory fan tray air filter 1 10 4 Orderwire Orderwire allows a crafts person to plug a phone set into an ONS 15310 MA SDH and communicate with crafts people working at other ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes or other facility equipment The orderwire is a pulse code modulation PCM encoded voice channel that uses 1 or E2 bytes in the MSOH and in the regenerator section overhead The FTA allows simultaneous either local RSOH signal or express MSOH signal orderwire channels on an SDH ring or particular optics facility Express orderwire also allows communication through regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for DCC channels In CTC you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn up so that all network elements NEs on the ring can communicate with one another Orderwire terminations that is the optics facilities that receive and process the orderwire channels are provisionable Both express and local orderwire can be configured as on or off on a particular SDH facility The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports up to four orderwire channel terminations per shelf This allows linear single ring dual ring Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Q Fan Tray Assembly and
75. MR 6 ML 100T 8 Card Ethernet Performance Monitoring Parameters CTC provides Ethernet performance information including line level parameters port bandwidth consumption and historical Ethernet statistics The CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 card Ethernet performance information is divided into Ether Ports and POS Ports tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window 11 6 1 1 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card Ether Ports Statistics Window The Ether Ports statistics window lists Ethernet parameters at the line level The Ether Ports Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero The Refresh button manually refreshes statistics Auto Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs The window also has a Clear button The Clear button sets the values on the card to zero but does not reset the CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 cards During each automatic cycle whether auto refreshed or manually refreshed using the Refresh button statistics are added cumulatively and are not immediately adjusted to equal total received packets until testing ends To see the final PM count totals allow a few moments for the PM window statistics to finish testing and update fully PM counts are also listed in the CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 card Performance gt History window Table 11 6 defines the CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 card Ether P
76. N A Static Routes N A Static Routes N A 2 8 2 7 Scenario 7 Provisioning the ONS 15310 MA SDH Proxy Server The ONS 15310 MA SDH proxy server is a set of functions that allows you to network ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes in environments where visibility and accessibility between nodes and CTC computers must be restricted For example you can set up a network so that field technicians and network operating center NOC personnel can both access the same nodes while preventing the field technicians from accessing the NOC LAN To do this one ONS 15310 MA SDH node is provisioned as a gateway network element GNE and the other nodes are provisioned as end network elements ENEs The GNE tunnels connections between CTC computers and ENEs which provides management capability while preventing access for non ONS 15310 MA SDH management purposes The ONS 15310 MA SDH proxy server performs the following tasks Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Isolates DCC IP traffic from Ethernet CRAFT port traffic and accepts packets based on filtering rules The filtering rules depend on whether the packet arrives at the DCC or CRAFT port Ethernet interface Table 8 3 on page 8 15 and Table 8 4 on page 8 16 provide the filtering rules e Processes SNTP Simple Network Timing Protocol and NTP Network Timing Protocol requests
77. N A when FacilityType 2MHz NODE timing bits 2 FramingOut FAS CAS CRC FAS CRC FAS CAS FAS CAS CRC FAS Unframed when FacilityTypeOut E1 N A when FacilityTypeOut 2MHz NODE timing bits 2 SaBit SA Bit 4 SA Bit 4 SA Bit 5 SA Bit 6 SA Bit 7 SA Bit 8 when FacilityType N A when FacilityType 2MHz NODE timing bits 2 State unlocked unlocked locked disabled NODE timing bits 2 StateOut unlocked unlocked locked disabled NODE timing general Mode External External Line Mixed NODE timing general ReversionTime 5 0 minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 12 0 NODE timing general Revertive FALSE TRUE FALSE m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings C 4 1 Time Zones Table C 8 lists the time zones that apply for node time zone defaults Time zones in the table are ordered by their relative relationships to Greenwich Mean Time GMT and the default values are displayed in the correct format for valid default input Table C 8 Time Zones Time Zone GMT Hours Default Value GMT 11 00 GMT 11 00 Midway Islands Samoa GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 Hawaiian Islands Tahiti GMT 09 00 GMT 09 00 Anchorage Alas
78. ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This chapter describes the card and port protection configurations for the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH To provision protection refer to the Turn Up a Node chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 3 1 Overview page 3 1 e 3 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Card and Port Protection page 3 1 e 3 3 Automatic Protection Switching page 3 5 e 3 4 External Switching Commands page 3 5 3 1 Overview The Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH has a pair of common control cards 15310E CTX K9 each with two optical ports and up to four electrical cards E1 21 E3 DS3 30r E1_63_E3_DS3_3 1 1 protection groups are supported for like pairs of electrical cards and 1 1 protection groups can be set up between two optical ports on the same 15310E CTX K9 card or between the optical ports on two separate 15310E CTX K9 cards When two 15310E CTX K9 cards are installed the 15310 9 card is 1 1 protected The 15310 MA SDH can function in a single 15310E CTX K9 configuration mode 3 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Card and Port Protection This section describes the card
79. Overview page 7 1 e 7 2 Circuit Properties page 7 2 e 7 3 VC 12 Bandwidth page 7 8 e 7 4 VC Low order Path Tunnels and Aggregation Points page 7 8 e 7 5 DCC Tunnels page 7 8 e 7 6 Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits page 7 9 e 7 7 Virtual Concatenated Circuits page 7 11 e 7 8 Section and Path Trace page 7 17 e 7 9 Bridge and Roll page 7 18 7 10 Merged Circuits page 7 22 e 7 11 Reconfigured Circuits page 7 23 e 7 12 Server Trails page 7 23 7 1 Overview You can create circuits across and within ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes and assign different attributes to circuits For example you can e Create one way two way bidirectional or broadcast circuits e Assign user defined names to circuits Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Circuit Properties Assign different circuit sizes Automatically or manually route circuits Automatically create multiple circuits with autoranging VC low order path tunnels do not use autoranging Provide full protection to the circuit path Provide only protected sources and destinations for circuits Define a secondary circuit source or destination that allows you to interoperate an ONS 15310 MA SDH Linear Multiplex Section Protection configuration with third party equipment Linear Multiplex Section Protection configurations Set Linear Multiplex Section Protection circuits as revertive or
80. PAL un m am NES NEU il Hh TX TX RX RX 2 2 HA Tx HI Tx RX RX IL ACT STBY IL ACT STBY FAL IJ SYNCH IL SYNCH oi 4 N ic N o 207 o m gt gt NI NI NK S S Iz N iue N N SN 5 Ut L T L T L T L I L T L T AN 2 1 1 Card Summary The ONS 15310 MA SDH cards are summarized in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Cards and Descriptions Compatible Card Platform s Description For Additional Information 15310E CTX K9 MA The 15310E CTX K9 card serves as the See the 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Card common control and central switching element for the ONS 15310 MA SDH section on page 2 4 CE 100T 8 MA The CE 100T 8 card provides eight RJ 45 See the 2 3 CE 100T 8 Card section 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports on page 2 6 CE MR 6 MA The CE MR 6 card provides six See the 2 4 CE MR 6 Card section 10 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports on page 2 9 ML 100T 8 MA The ML 100T 8 Ethernet card provides eight See the 2 5 ML 100T 8 Card ports of 10 100 Ethernet encapsulated traffic into SDH VCA STM 1 payloads section on page 2 12 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference Table 2 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Cards and Descriptions continued Card Compatible Platform s Description Card Summary and Compatibility m For Additional Inform
81. PJCS PGEN P J PMs read on BTC ASIC ae Note For PM locations relating to protection switch counts see the Telcordia GR 1230 CORE document The PM parameters for the STM4 ports are listed in Table 11 12 The listed parameters are defined in Table 11 2 on page 11 4 Table 11 12 STM4 Port PM Parameters VC4 and VC4 Xc MS NE FE 1 1 HP Path RS NE MS NE FE LMSP NE PJC NE NE FE4 RS BBE MS BBE MS PSC 1 1 HP PPJC Pdet HP BBE RS EB MS EB MS PSD HP NPJC Pdet HP BBER RS ES MS ES HP PPJC Pgen HP EB RS SES MS SES HP NPJC Pgen HP ES MS UAS HP PJCS Pdet HP ESR HP PJCS Pgen HP SES HP PJCDiff HP SESR HP UAS 1 For information about troubleshooting subnetwork connection protection SNCP switch counts refer to the Alarm Troubleshooting chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide For information about creating circuits that perform a switch refer to Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels 2 MS SPRing is not supported on the STM 1 card and STM 1E card therefore the MS PSD W MS PSD S and MS PSD R PM parameters do not increment 3 In CTC the count fields for the HP PPJC and HP NPJC PM parameters appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the Provisioning gt Line tab See the 11 3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring section m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance
82. PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day EB 125 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend IL day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day NPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds
83. PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day AISS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day BBE 90 count 0 27561600 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 4 63 DS3 3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day EB 90 count 0 43200000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day
84. PPJC and NPJC PM parameters appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the Provisioning gt Optical gt Line tab PIVC4MON drop down list 11 4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 gives a definition for each type of PM parameter found in the ONS 15310 MA SDH Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition AISS P AIS Seconds Path AISS P is a count of one second intervals containing one or more alarm indication signal AIS defects BBE Path Background Block Error BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of a severely errored second SES BBE PM Path Monitoring Background Block Errors BBE PM indicates the number of background block errors recorded in the optical transfer network OTN path during the PM time interval BBER Path Background Block Error Ratio BBER is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs BBER PM Path Monitoring Background Block Errors Ratio BBER PM indicates the background block errors ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval BBER SM Section Monitoring Background Block Errors Ratio BBER SM indicates the background block errors ratio recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval BBE SM Section Monitoring Background Block Errors BBE SM indicates the number of background block error
85. Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades S Overlay Ring Circuits mainly provided as error recovery for the wizard The Span Upgrade Wizard and the manual span upgrade procedures require at least two technicians one at each end of the span who can communicate with each other during the upgrade Upgrading a span is non service affecting and will cause no more than three switches each of which is less than 50 ms in duration To initiate the span upgrade right click the span and choose Span Upgrade Note Span upgrades do not upgrade SDH topologies for example a 1 1 group to a Linear Multiplex Section Protection configuration Refer to the Convert Network Configurations chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for topology upgrade procedures 9 6 1 Span Upgrade Wizard The Span Upgrade Wizard automates all steps in the manual 1 1 span upgrade procedure if you are upgrading two ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes The wizard can upgrade both lines of a 1 1 group The Span Upgrade Wizard requires that spans have DCCs enabled The Span Upgrade Wizard provides no way to back out of an upgrade In the case of an error you must exit the wizard and initiate the manual procedure to either continue with the upgrade or back out of it To continue with the manual procedure examine the standing conditions and alarms to identify the stage in which the wizard fail
86. Retrieve Retrieves the current set of all existing fault conditions maintained by the alarm manager from the ONS 15310 MA SDH Filter Allows you to change the Conditions window display to only show the conditions that meet a certain severity level or occur in a specified time For example you can set the filter so that only Critical conditions display on the window There is a Filter tool on the lower right of the window that allows you to enable or disable the filter feature 10 2 6 1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions The current set of all existing conditions maintained by the alarm manager can be seen when you click the Retrieve button The set of conditions retrieved is relative to the view For example if you click the button while displaying the node view node specific conditions appear If you click the button while displaying the network view all conditions for the network including ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes and other connected nodes appear and the card view shows only card specific conditions You can also set a node to display conditions using the time zone where the node is located rather than the time zone of the PC where they are being viewed Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for instructions 10 2 6 2 Conditions Column Descriptions Table 10 6 lists the Conditions window column headings and the information recorded in each column Table 10 6 Column Conditions Column Description
87. SAS 8 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend I day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min CV 15 Gl 0 2160000 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day CV 125 Gl 0 207360000 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min CV 15 B3count 0 2160000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3
88. SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM 1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min BBE 1312 count 0 137700 CTX 2500 STM 1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min EB 1312 count 0 137700 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSC 1 count 0 600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSD 300 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min SES I seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day BBE 13120 count 0 13219200 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day EB 13120 count 0 13219200 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSC 5 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day PSD 600 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 S
89. STM 16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min BBE 21260 count 0 2212200 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min EB 21260 count 0 2212200 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSC 1 count 0 600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSC W 1 count 0 600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSD 300 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSD W 300 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day BBE 212600 0 212371200 count CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day EB 212600 0 212371200 count CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSC 5 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSC R 5 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day PSC S 5 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSC W 5 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSD 600 seconds 0 86400 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m AppendixC Network Element
90. STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day BBE 100000 0 206582400 count CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day EB 100000 0 206582400 count CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day ES 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day OFS 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day SES 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min BBE 15 count 0 539100 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min EB 15 count 0 1800000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds velo farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds velo farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds velo farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1 day BBE 150 count 0 51753600 CTX 2500 S8 TM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day EB 125 count 0 172800000 CTX 2500 8 TM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 S8 TM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds velo farend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min BBE 15 count 0 539100 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 1800000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min ES 12 seconds
91. Slots Table 1 10 Port Line Rates Connector Types and Locations continued Connector Interface Ports Line Rate per Port Type Connector Location Ethernet ML 100T 8 card 8 10 1000 Mbps RJ 45 ML 100T 8 card faceplate Ethernet CE MR 6 card 6 10 100 1000 Mbps LC SFP Faceplate Copper SFP RJ4 5 1 The CE 100T 8 card with PID 15310 CE 100T 8 is not compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH The 15310 P CE 100T 8 is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assemblies 2 The ML 100T 8 card with PID 15310 ML 100T 8 is not compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH The 15310 P ML 100T 8 is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assemblies Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Card Reference This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH cards It includes descriptions and block diagrams for each card For specifications see Appendix A Specifications For card installation and turn up procedures refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 2 1 Card Summary and Compatibility page 2 1 e 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Card page 2 4 e 2 3 CE 100T 8 Card page 2 6 e 2 4 CE MR 6 Card page 2 9 e 2 5 ML 100T 8 Card page 2 12 e 2 6 EI 21 DS3 3 and E1 63 DS3 3 Cards page 2 16 e 2 7 Filler Cards page 2 18 e 2 8 SFP Modules page 2 19 Note The I Temp symbol is located on the faceplate of an I Temp compliant
92. a Critical alarm exists The port color in both card and node view indicates the port service state Table 4 4 lists the port colors and their service states For more information about port service states see Appendix B Administrative and Service States Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation Window W Table 4 4 Node View Card Port Colors and Service States Port Color Service State Description Cyan blue ocked enabled loopbac Out of Service and Management Loopback Port is in a k loopback state On the card in node view a line between ports indicates that the port is in terminal or facility loopback see Figure 4 3 on page 4 9 and Figure 4 4 on page 4 10 Traffic is carried and alarm reporting is suppressed Raised fault conditions whether or not their alarms are reported can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV COND command Cyan blue locked enabled mainten Out of Service and Management Maintenance Port is ance out of service for maintenance Traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed Alarm reporting is suppressed Raised fault conditions whether or not their alarms are reported can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV COND command Use locked enabled maintenance for testing or to suppress alarms temporarily Change the state to unlocke
93. a protection group because rules are violated 1 Plug an El 21 DS3 3 card into Slot 1 and enable the retiming option on it 2 Plug an 63 DS3 3 card into Slot 2 Because the E1 63 DS3 3 card does not support retiming it cannot become a protection card for the E1 21 053 3 card so no protection group is formed The following scenario results in the creation of a protection group because no rules are violated 1 Plug an El 21 DS3 3card into Slot 1 and provision a circuit on it 2 Plug an 63 DS3 3 card into Slot 2 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 E Chapter3 Card Protection HZ ONS 15310 MA SDH Card and Port Protection A protection group is automatically formed with the E1 21 E3 DS3 3 card operating as the working card and the E1 63 DS3 3 card operating as the protection card Automatic protection groups cannot be created or deleted by users A protection group is automatically deleted when the protect card is deleted 3 2 2 LMSP Optical Port Protection With two 15310E CTX K9 cards installed four optical ports are available two on each card A Linear Multiplex Section Protection group can be created between any two pairs of optical ports with matched port rates A protection group can be created using two ports on the same 15310E CTX K9 card or between ports on adjacent 15310E CTX K9 cards You can also create a 1 1 protect
94. a read only list of events to be generated and the logTable which is a writable set of data describing a logged event The ONS 15310 MA SDH implement the logTable as specified in RFC 2819 12 10 5 1 Event Table The eventTable is read only and unprovisionable The table contains one row for rising alarms and another row for falling ones This table has the following restrictions e The eventType is always log and trap 4 The eventCommunity value is always a zero length string indicating that this event causes the trap to be despatched to all provisioned destinations The eventOwner column value is always monitor e The eventStatus column value is always valid 1 12 10 5 2 Log Table The logTable is implemented exactly as specified in RFC 2819 The logTable is based upon data that is cached locally on a controller card If there is a controller card protection switch the existing logTable is cleared and a new one is started on the newly active controller card The table contains as many rows as provided by the alarm controller Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 E 1249 Chapter12 SNMP SNMP Remote Monitoring Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 APPENDIX A Specifications Note The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do
95. address resolution request 40 0 3600 T4 Timer starts when T2 expires used during error recovery 20 0 3600 Table 8 12 shows the main TARP processes and the general sequence of events that occurs in each process Table 8 12 TARP Processing Flow Process General TARP Flow Find a NET that 1 TARP checks its TDC for a match If a match is found TARP returns the matches a TID result to the requesting application 2 If no match is found a TARP Type 1 PDU is generated and Timer is started 3 If Timer El expires before a match if found a Type 2 PDU is generated and Timer T2 is started 4 If Timer T2 expires before a match is found Timer T4 is started 5 If Timer T4 expires before a match is found a Type 2 PDU is generated and Timer T2 is started Find a TID that A Type 5 PDU is generated Timer DS3 E3 is used However if the timer matches a NET expires no error recovery procedure occurs and a status message is provided to indicate that the TID cannot be found Senda notification TARP generates a Type 4 PDU in which the tar ttg field contains the NE s TID of TID or protocol value that existed prior to the change of TID or protocol address Confirmation address change that other NEs successfully received the address change is not sent 8 65 2 TARP Loop Detection Buffer The TARP loop detection buffer LDB can be enabled to prevent duplicate TARP PDUs from entering the TDC When a TARP Type 1 2 or 4 PD
96. alarmTable the following values are required The alarmInterval and its desired value e The alarmVariable and its desired value The alarmSampleType and its desired value The alarmStartupAlarm and its desired value The alarmOwner and its desired value The alarmStatus with a value of createRequest 2 If the SetRequest PDU is valid an alarmTable row is created If the row already exists or if the SetRequest PDU values do not make sense or are insufficient the SNMP agent does not create the row and returns an error code In addition to the required values the following restrictions must be met in the SetRequest PDU The alarmOwner is a string of length 32 characters e The alarmRisingEventIndex always takes value 1 The alarmFallingEventIndex always takes value 2 The alarmStatus has only two values supported in SETs createRequest 2 and invalid 4 The AlarmVariable is of the type OID ifIndex where ifIndex gives the interface this alarm is created on and OID is one of the OIDs supported in Table 12 7 Table 12 7 OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable No ColumnName 0 Stus 1 ifInOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 2 IfInUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 3 ifInMulticastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 2 Unsupported in E100 E1000 4 ifInBroadcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 3 Unsupported in E100 E1000 5 ifInDiscards 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 13 Unsupported in E100 E1000 6 ifInErrors 1
97. and keywords in body text Command input that is supplied by the user Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional A choice of keywords represented by x appears in braces separated by vertical bars The user must select one The control key For example where Ctrl D is written hold down the Control key while pressing the D key Examples of information displayed on the screen Examples of information that the user must enter Command parameters that must be replaced by module specific codes Note AN Means reader take note Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the document Caution Means reader be careful In this situation the user might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Preface A Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any equipment be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES D
98. are downloaded required 250 MB of free space required for from the TCC2 TCC2P to your Release 9 2 computer These files occupy around 100MB 250MB to be safer or more space depending on the number of versions in the network Operating PC Windows 2000 Windows XP Use the latest patch Service Pack System Windows Vista SP1 Windows Server released by the OS vendor Check with 2003 Windows 7 Windows Server the vendor for the latest patch Service 2008 for Release 9 2 Pack e Workstation Solaris version 9 or 10 e Apple Mac OS X CTC Needs to be installed using the CachelInstaller available on CCO or the Release CD for Release 9 2 Java Runtime JRE 5 0 JRE 1 6 for Release 9 2 JRE 5 0 JRE 1 6 for Release 9 2 is Environment installed by the CTC Installation Wizard included on the Cisco ONS 15454 software CD JRE 5 0 JRE 1 6 for Release 9 2 provides enhancements to CTC performance especially for large networks with numerous circuits Cisco recommends that you use JRE 5 0 for networks with Software R9 1 JRE 1 6 for Release 9 2 nodes If CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software R7 0 or R7 2 Cisco recommends JRE 1 4 2 or JRE 5 0 If CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software R5 0 or R6 0 Cisco recommends JRE 1 4 2 CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software earlier than R5 0 Cisco recommends JRE 1 3 1_02 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual R
99. are measured by the offset in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the VC high order path synchronous payload envelope SPE called the J1 byte Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss You can enable positive pointer justification count PPJC and negative pointer justification count NPJC PM parameters for LTE cards PPJC is a count of path detected PPJC Pdet or path generated PPJC Pgen positive pointer justifications NPJC is a count of path detected NPJC Pdet or path generated NPJC Pgen negative pointer justifications depending on the specific PM parameter A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes A difference between the counts means that the node transmitting the original pointer justification has timing variations with the node detecting and transmitting this count Positive pointer adjustments occur when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in relation to the rate of the VC3 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions For pointer justification count definitions depending on the cards in use see the 11 7 1 STMI Port Performance Monitoring Parameters section on page 11 25 and the 11 7 2 STMA Port Performance Monitoring Parameters section on page 11 27 In CTC the count fields for
100. by 10 4 viewing history 10 7 applying alarm profiles 10 12 APS See automatic protection switching audit trail capacities 5 8 logentries 5 7 overview 5 7 automatic protection switching nonrevertive 3 5 revertive 3 5 balancing DCC loads 7 8 bandwidth path protection configurations 9 2 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Index percentage used for Ethernet ports 11 22 11 24 VTI 5 7 8 BBE parameter definition 11 4 BBE PM parameter definition 11 4 BBER parameter definition 11 4 BBER PM parameter definition 11 4 BBER SM parameter definition 11 4 BBE SM parameter definition 11 4 BIEC parameter definition 11 4 BIE parameter definition 11 4 bipolar violations CV L parameter 11 4 BITS BITS cable ONS 15310 SDH 1 20 external node timing source 6 1 pin assignments ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 20 specifications A 3 BNC connectors 1 12 BNC tool 1 15 BPV See bipolar violations bridge and roll 7 18 cables See also CRAFT cable BITS ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 20 ground ONS 15310 SDH 1 7 PC or workstation requirement 4 5 RJ 11 to RJ 45 adapter 2 13 routing 1 21 twisted pair 1 13 type descriptions ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 10 UDC ONS 15310 SDH 1 20 card compatibility 2 3 cards See also CE 100T 8 card See also CE MR 6 card See also CTX2500 card See also E1_21_E3_DS3_3 card See also E1_63_E3_DS3_3 card See also ML 100T 8 card colors on sc
101. circuits in network node or card view based on circuit name size type direction and other attributes In addition you can export the Circuit window data in HTML comma separated values CSV or tab separated values TSV format using the Export command from the File menu 7 2 1 Circuit Status The circuit statuses that appear in the Circuit window Status column are generated by Cisco Transport Controller CTC based on conditions along the circuit path Table 7 1 shows the statuses that can appear in the Status column Table 7 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Circuit Status Status Definition Activity CREATING CTC is creating a circuit DISCOVERED CTC created a circuit All components are in place and a complete path exists from circuit source to destination DELETING CTC is deleting a circuit PARTIAL A CTC created circuit is missing a cross connect or network span or a complete path from source to destination s does not exist In CTC circuits are represented using cross connects and network spans If a network span is missing from a circuit the circuit status is PARTIAL However a PARTIAL status does not necessarily mean a circuit traffic failure has occurred because traffic might flow on a protect path Network spans are in one of two states up or down On CTC circuit and network maps up spans appear as green lines and down spans appear as gray lines If a failure occurs on a network span during a CTC session the s
102. connector pin assignments and the corresponding EIA connector mapping for connectors J10 and 711 on the EIA installed on the A side and connectors 723 and J24 on the EIA installed on the B side Table 1 3 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA Connectors J10 and J11 Side B EIA Connectors J23 and J24 Signal Pin Signal Pin Ring Port 29 1 Tip Port 29 33 Ring Port 30 2 Tip Port 30 34 Ring Port 31 3 Tip Port 31 35 Ring Port 32 4 Tip Port 32 36 Ring Port 33 5 Tip Port 33 37 Ring Port 34 6 Tip Port 34 38 Ring Port 35 7 Tip Port 35 39 Ring Port 36 8 Tip Port 36 40 Ring Port 37 9 Tip Port 37 41 Ring Port 38 10 Tip Port 38 42 Ring Port 39 11 Tip Port 39 43 Ring Port 40 12 Tip Port 40 44 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Table 1 3 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA Connectors J10 and J11 Side B EIA Connectors J23 and J24 continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Ring Port 41 13 Tip Port 41 45 Ring Port 42 14 Tip Port 42 46 Ring Port 43 15 Tip Port 43 47 Ring Port 44 16 Tip Port 44 48 Ring Port 45 17 Tip Port 45 49 Ring Port 46 18 Tip Port 46 50 Ring Port 47 19 Tip Port 47 51 Ring Port 48 20 Tip Port 48 52 Ring Port 49 21 Tip Port 49 53 Ring Port 50 22 Tip Port
103. displays Unknown because CTC has Unknown not yet discovered the name of the node 4 6 2 2 Network View Tabs Table 4 8 lists the tabs and subtabs available in the network view Table 4 8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs Tab Description Subtabs Alarms Lists current alarms CR MJ MN for the network and updates them in real time Conditions Displays a list of standing conditions on the network History Provides a history of network alarms including date type and severity of each alarm Circuits Creates deletes edits filters and searches for Circuits Rolls network circuits Provisioning Provisions security alarm profiles Security Alarm Profiles MS SPRing overhead circuits server trails MS SPRing Overhead Circuits and loads manages VLAN databases Provisionable Patchcords PPC Server Trails VLAN DB Profile Maintenance Displays the working and protect software Software Diagnostic APC versions and allows software to be downloaded retrieves Open Shortest Path First OSPF node information and displays the list of automatic power control APC domains for a network m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 4 6 2 3 DCC Links Window Mi The lines between nodes in the network view indicate DCC connections between the nodes Active DCC connections appear as
104. e After circuit creation you can change a circuit state in the Edit Circuit window or from the Tools gt Circuits gt Set Circuit State menu Note After you have created an initial circuit in a CTC session the subsequent circuit states default to the circuit state of the initial circuit regardless of which nodes in the network the circuits traverse or the node ckt state default setting During circuit creation you can apply a service state to the drop ports in a circuit You cannot transition a drop port from the unlocked enabled service state to the locked enabled disabled service state you must first put the port in the locked enabled maintenance state before changing it to the locked enabled disabled state For more information about port service state transitions see Appendix B Administrative and Service States Circuits do not use the soak timer but ports do The soak period is the amount of time that the port remains in the locked disabled Automatic In Service service state after a signal is continuously received When the cross connects in a circuit are in the locked disabled Automatic In Service service state the ONS 15310 MA SDH monitor the cross connects for an error free signal It changes the state of the circuit from locked to unlocked or to locked PARTIAL as each cross connect assigned to the circuit path Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 me 78 19417 01 Chapter 7 Circu
105. errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES LP SESR Low Order Path Severely Errored Second Ratio LP SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval LP UAS Low Order Path Unavailable Seconds LP UAS is a count of the seconds when the VC path was unavailable A low order path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as LP SESs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as LP SESs MS BBE Multiplex Section Background Block Error MS BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES MS BBER Multiplex Section Background Block Error Ratio MS BBER is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs MS EB Multiplex Section Errored Block MS EB indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Parameter Definition MS ES Multiplex Section Errored Second MS ES is a one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect MS ESR Multiplex Section Errored Second Ratio MS ESR is the ratio of errored seconds to total seco
106. far ele Hetwork View va454 55 28 Topology Id 1 J Critical 0 Tui va454 58 Major 0 Minor 4 Y ux EP E ise ism f 454 54 7 va600 55 4 Alarms Conditions History Circuits Provisioning Maintenance Date Node Object EgptType siet Pot Sev SA Cond Description Retrieve Fitter Exclude Same Root Cause 159515 Nodes with DCC connections to the login node will not appear if you selected Disable Network Discovery on the Login dialog box Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EXIN Chapter 4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window The graphic area displays a background image with colored ONS 15310 MA SDH icons A Superuser can set up the logical network view feature which enables each user to see the same network view Selecting a node or span in the graphic area displays information about the node and span in the status area The icon colors indicate the node status Table 4 7 4 6 2 1 CTC Node Colors The color of a node in network view indicates the node alarm status Table 4 7 lists the node colors shown in network view Table 4 7 Node Colors Indicating Status in Network View Color Alarm Status Green No alarms Yellow Minor alarms Orange Major alarms Red Critical alarms Gray with Node initializing for the first time CTC
107. green solid or green dashed Solid means circuits can be routed through the link and dashed means circuits cannot be routed through the link A gray link is in a fail state 4 6 2 4 Link Consolidation CTC provides the ability to consolidate the DCC general communications channel GCC optical transport section OTS provisionable patchcord PPC and server trail links shown in the network view into a more streamlined view Link consolidation allows you to condense multiple inter nodal links into a single link The link consolidation sorts links by class meaning that for example all DCC links are consolidated together You can access individual links within consolidated links using the right click shortcut menu In OSP installations the ONS 15310 MA SDH cannot be monitored through a standard Ethernet LAN connection So an alternate connection is established through the optical link of the aggregated client traffic SDH and a supporting Network Element NE The support node installed indoors and the ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP node are set up with a direct IP access to a far end ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP node over a Data Communications Channel DCC network Each link has an associated icon Table 4 9 Table 4 9 Link Icons Icon Description DCC icon GCC icon OTS icon PPC icon gt b Server Trail icon y Note Link consolidation is only available on non detailed maps Non detailed maps display n
108. inch 84 position DSX 1 panel DI G2CUI e Four feet F M 32 pair Champ Amp extension cables Hubbell Gen Plug and cover 60 A e Valere Power Plant e w 3 20 A Rectifiers AC Cords Controller Temperature Probe and Alarm Cable Shelf CD8D ANN VC e El secondary protection module 050 612 00 NEBS e ADC DI M3GUI Front cross connect 84 ckt Cisco WW amp 64 AMP DSX 1 e PCI Alarm Panel cable for ONS 15310 Eight hour Battery backup NorthStar NSB 170FT El cables from ONS 15310 MA SDH to secondary protector module HRC 2835 005 El Cables from secondary protector module to primary protector module HRC 2835 006 e OSP EI 50 pins 25 pair cables with 710 connectors HRC 2840 030 shielded cables ground terminated at both ends e Steward ferrites PN 28B2000 100 applied to OSP Elcables 2 turns on the cabinet unshielded section e Flat copper braids 1 inch wide for grounding the following OSP cabinet Bonding of different cabinet sections ONS 15310 MA chassis Note The tested braids are consolidated tinned copper braid 1398 for information see www conwire com 50 feet DS3 E3 BNC BNC cables 3 feet DS3 E3 BNC BNC ONS 15310 MA SDH to DS3 secondary protection module 3 feet DS3 E3 BNC BNC 053 secondary protection module to DS3 non protected cross connect and block A 4 1 Power Specifications The Purcell FLX25GT cabinet and accessories has the followin
109. manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco s installation instructions it may cause interference with radio and television reception This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation Modifying the equipment without Cisco s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices In that event your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off If the interference stops it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices If
110. mib 116 P BRIDGE MIB rfc2674 mib 117 PerfHist TC MIB rfc2493 mib 118 Q BRIDGE MIB rfc2674 mib 119 RFC1213 MIB rfc1213 mib 120 RFC1253 MIB rfc1253 mib 121 RIPv2 MIB rfc1724 mib 122 RMON MIB rfc2819 mib 123 RMON2 MIB rfc2021 mib 124 RMONTOK rfc1513 mib 125 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB rfc2571 mib 126 SNMP MPD MIB mib 127 SNMP NOTIFY MIB rfc3413 mib 128 SNMP PROXY MIB rfc3413 mib 129 SNMP TARGET MIB rfc3413 mib 130 SNMP USER BASED SM MIB rfc3414 mib 131 SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB rfc3415 mib 132 SNMPv2 MIB rfc1907 mib 133 SONET MIB rfc2558 mib S Note If you cannot compile the ONS 15310 MA SDH MIBs call the Cisco Technical Assistance Center Cisco TAC Contact information for Cisco TAC is listed in the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section in Preface Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter12 SNMP SNMP Trap Content W 12 6 SNMP Trap Content The ONS 15310 MA SDH use SNMP traps to generate all alarms and events such as raises and clears The traps contain the following information Object IDs that uniquely identify each event with information about the generating entity such as the slot or port synchronous transport signal VC high order path and Virtual Tributary VC low order path e Severity of the alarm critical major m
111. mm 1 35 in Depth 236 68 mm 9 318 in Weight not including clam shell 0 499 kg 1 1 Ib A 2 5 E1 21 053 63 053 3 Cards The E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and 63 DS3 3 cards have the following specifications For El e Environmental Operating temperature I Temp 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity Power consumption El 63 DS3 3 40 00 W 0 96 E1 21 DS3 3 27 60 W 0 70 A Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Appendix A Specifications Card Specifications e Input Bit rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm Frame format EI EI CRCMF El unframed Line code HDB3 Termination AMP Champ Input impedance 120 ohms Cable loss Max 655 feet ABAM 22 or 24 AWG AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant e Output Bit rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm Frame format EI EI CRCMF unframed Line code HDB3 Termination AMP Champ Input impedance 120 ohms Cable loss Max 655 feet ABAM 22 or 24 AWG AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Power level 12 5 to 17 9 dBm centered at 772 KHz 16 4 to 11 1 dBm centered at 1544 KHz Pulse shape Telcordia GR 499 CORE Figure 9 5 Pulse amplitude 2 4 to 3 6 V peak to peak Loopback modes Terminal and facility Line build out 0 131 ft 132 262 ft 263 393 ft 3
112. node level severities If one or more alarm profiles is stored as files from elsewhere in the network onto the local PC or server hard drive where CTC resides you can use as many profiles as you can physically store by deleting and replacing them locally in CTC so that only eight are active at any given time 10 4 1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles Alarm profiles are created in the network view using the Provisioning gt Alarm Profiles tabs After loading the default profile or another profile on the node you can use the Clone feature to create custom profiles After the new profile is created the Alarm Profiles window shows the original profile frequently Default and the new profile Tip To see the full list of profiles including those available for loading or cloning click the Available button You must load a profile before you can clone it In the Inherited profile alarms inherit or copy severity from the next highest level For example a card with an Inherited alarm profile copies the severities used by the node housing the card If you choose the Inherited profile from the network view the severities at the lower levels node and card are copied from this selection You do not have to apply a single severity profile to the node card and port level alarms Different profiles can be applied at different levels For example you could use the inherited or default profile on a node and on all cards and ports but app
113. not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This appendix contains the following e Shelf card and Small Form factor Pluggable SFP specifications for Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Cabinet power and environmental specifications for the Purcell FLX25GT ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP cabinet e OSP cabinet configuration details A 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Specifications This section provides ONS 15310 MA SDH topologies Cisco Transport Controller CTC specifications LAN TL1 modem alarm and electrical interface assembly EIA interface specifications timing power and environmental specifications and shelf dimensions S Note The UDC Interface TL1 Craft Interface and BITS Interface are not used in OSP installations A 1 1 Alarm Interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH alarm interface has the following specifications The alarm interface provides 32 alarm inputs and 8 contacts for alarm outputs e Connector J6 Alarm inputs Connector J7 Alarm outputs Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 NH AppendixA Specification
114. on page 11 4 Table 11 4 PM Parameters for the E3 Ports Line NE Path NE VC3 Low End Path NE FE VC4 HP Path NE FE CV L ES P LP BBE HP BBE ES L ESR P LP BBER HP BBER SES L SES P LP EB HP EB LOSS L SESR P LP ES HP ES UAS P LP ESR HP ESR LP SES HP SES LP SESR HP SESR LP UAS HP UAS 11 5 3 DS3 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 11 6 shows the signal types that support near end and far end PM parameters for the DS3 Port Figure 11 7 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3 E3 Port 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports Figure 11 6 Near End DS3 Signal ONS 15310 m CD Monitored Signal Types for the DS3 Port gt Far End DS3 Signal CEA ons 15310 MA SDH DS3 243072 Cross Connect SDH Fiber DS3 STM16 STM16 C Bit and M23 Framing DS3 Path Near End PMs Are Supported VC3 Low Order Path PMs Supported for Near and Far End VC4 High Order Path PMs Supported for Near and Far End FTF Figure 11 7 PM Read Points on the DS3 Port ONS 15310 MA SDH DS3 Card Mux Demux ASIC CV L ES L LIU DS3 Side SDH Side SES L SDH Side LOSS L LP EB AISS P 2 s LP ES Low BTC CVP P LP SES Orde
115. page 11 1 e 11 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring page 11 3 e 11 3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring page 11 3 e 11 4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions page 11 4 e 11 5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports page 11 13 e 11 6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards page 11 19 e 11 7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports page 11 25 Note When circuits transition from the out of service state to the in service state the performance monitoring counts during the out of service circuit state are not part of the accumulation cycle 11 1 Threshold Performance Monitoring Thresholds are used to set error levels for each PM parameter You can program PM parameter threshold ranges from the Provisioning gt Line Thresholds tab in card view For procedures for provisioning card thresholds such as line path and SDH thresholds refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring I Threshold Performance Monitoring During the accumulation cycle if the current value of a PM parameter reaches or exceeds its corresponding threshold value a threshold crossing alert TCA is generated by the node and is sent to CTC TCAs provide early detection of performance degradation When a threshold is crossed the node continues to count the errors during a given accumulation p
116. path nearend I day PJCDIFF 5760 count 0 1382400000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCS PDET 9600 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCS PGEN 9600 0 86400 seconds m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix Network Element Defaults Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 8 TM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day PPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM 16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min BBE 10000 count 0 2151900 CTX 2500 S8TM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min EB 10000 count 0 2151900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min OFS 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min SES 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500
117. port IP over CLNS tunnel commands 8 34 Cisco IP tunnel 4 16 Cisco Transport Controller See CTC CLNP 8 24 CLNS overview 8 24 tunnels over IP See IP over CLNS tunnels coaxial cables installing ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 14 colors alarm and condition severities 10 2 cards in node view 4 8 nodes in network view 4 12 Index M port colors and service states 4 9 port state 7 7 common fiber routing 7 12 comparing alarm profiles 10 11 computer requirements 4 3 conditions changing the display 10 5 displaying 10 6 filrering 10 7 retrieving 10 6 retrieving history 10 8 tab description 10 5 10 6 connecting ONS node to another vendor s GNE 8 34 ONS node to a router 8 35 ONS node to a router across an OSI DCN 8 37 console port CE 100T 8 card inactive 2 6 ML 100T 8 card 2 13 corporate LAN 4 6 cost 8 8 CRAFT cable ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 13 craft connection 4 6 CRAFT port proxy server 8 12 creating alarm profiles 10 10 multiple circuits automatically 7 2 CTC card colors 4 8 card compatibility 2 3 computer requirements 4 3 4 4 description 4 1 exporting data 4 15 installation overview 4 3 login 4 6 manage multiple ONS nodes 4 16 NE defaults C 2 printing data 4 15 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Index provisioning OSI 8 39 specifications 2 timing setup 6 1 CTX2500 card 1 1 electrical protection 3 1 database description 4 20 description 2 4 equipment protectio
118. possible the ONS 15310 MA SDH designates the cards in Slots 1 and 5 as working If Slot 1 or 5 cannot be working due to violation of one of the other rules then Slot 2 or 6 will be the working slot 3 Cards can protect like cards In addition an E1 63 DS3 3 card can protect E1 21 DS3 3 card However E 21 DS3 3 card cannot protect an 63 DS3 3 card 4 Ifthe first card to be provisioned has existing circuits or is in use as a timing source when the second card is provisioned then the first card must become the working card and cannot become the protect card 5 The timing source will not switch to a protect card when a soft reset is executed on the card that is used as a timing source 6 Automatic protection groups default to nonrevertive The protection group can be edited to turn on reversion and set a revert time The protection group can also be edited to change the protection group name The following scenario does not result in the creation of a protection group because rules are violated 1 Plug an 63 DS3 3 card into Slot 1 and provision a circuit on it 2 Plug an El 21 DS3 3 card into Slot 2 The E1 63 E3 DS3 3 card needs to be the working card because it has a circuit on it see Rule 4 However the 21 E3 DS3 3 card cannot protect the E1 63 DS3 3 card see Rule 3 so no protection group is formed The following scenario also does not result in the creation of
119. rate configuration settings e Optical 15310E CTX K9 cards only STMN rate port level line configuration and SDH VC high order path settings e ALS card level Maintenance gt Optical gt ALS tab 15310E CTX K9 cards only PPM SFP STMN port ALS configuration defaults e IOS card level IOS tab ML 100T 8 cards only Console port and RADIUS server access settings Ether Ports CE 100T 8 cards only Line configuration settings including IEEE 802 1p CoS and IP ToS e POS Ports CE 100T 8 cards only Line configuration settings Note Line configuration defaults for the CE 100T 8 apply to both Ethernet port and POS port settings where the same setting exists for both Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 NN Appendix Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Note PPM SFP slots and ports are unassigned by default You can optionally use the Defaults editor to change these defaults to automatically assign PPM slots to take a single port PPM and to automatically assign PPM port STMN rates However use discretion in changing the default PPM port rate in cases where single rate PPMs might be inserted in a card since preprovisioned PPM port rates that are applied to a single rate PPM of the wrong rate will result in a mismatch of equipment and software S Note For further information about the
120. reset the CTC password to its default value otbu 1 To reset the password press the lamp test button for at least five seconds release it for a maximum of five seconds then press it again for at least five seconds After the button is released the default password is set A 1 8 BITS Interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH has the following building integrated timing supply BITS specifications Supports two BITS inputs and two BITS outputs The BITS I O ports support a 100 ohm termination for external 2 048 Mbps for El Connector J4 BITS1 Connector J5 BITS2 A 1 9 System Timing The ONS 15310 MA SDH has the following timing specifications e 20 ppm SDH Synchronous Equipment Timing Source SETS free running internal clock e Maintains SETS holdover 4 6 ppm for first 24 hours in the event of reference frequency loss e Timing reference External BITS line optical port any E1 clock and internal clock Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EH AppendixA Specifications Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Specifications A 1 10 Power Specifications The ONS 15310 MA SDH has the following power specifications Input power 48 VDC nominal Maximum power consumption Chassis with no cards installed fan tray only 55 W Chassis with cards installed 347 W Power requirements 44 to 52 VDC e Power terminals Three prong male locking connector Not
121. roll has been canceled TL1 ROLL roll was initiated Note If a roll is created using TL1 a CTC user cannot complete or cancel the roll Also if a roll is created using CTC a TL1 user cannot complete or cancel the roll You must use the same interface to complete or change a roll INCOMPLETE This state appears when the underlying circuit becomes incomplete To correct this state you must fix the underlying circuit problem before the roll state will change For example a circuit traveling on Nodes A B and C can become INCOMPLETE if Node B is rebooted The cross connect information is lost on Node B during a reboot The Roll State on Nodes A and C will change to INCOMPLETE 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels Bridge and Roll 7 9 3 Single and Dual Rolls Circuits have an additional layer of roll types single and dual A single roll on a circuit is a roll on one of its cross connects Use a single roll to e Change either the source or destination of a selected circuit Figure 7 7 and Figure 7 8 respectively Roll a segment of the circuit onto another chosen circuit Figure 7 9 on page 7 20 This roll also results in a new destination or a new source In Figure 7 7 you can select any available VC high order path on Node 1 for a new source Figure 7 7 Single Source Roll Node 1
122. small hub and spoke configurations Keep in mind that orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as multiplex section shared protection ring MS SPRing and subnetwork connection protection SNCP Note The Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Orderwire functionality is compatible with Cisco ONS 15454 Orderwire functionality Caution Do not configure orderwire loops Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel The ONS 15310 MA SDH implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature The line acts as a party line Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other participants on the connected orderwire subnetwork The local orderwire party line is separate from the express orderwire party line Up to four STM N facilities for each local and express orderwire are provisionable as orderwire paths The FTA supports selective dual tone multifrequency DTMF dialing for telephony connectivity which causes specific or all ONS 15310 MA SDH FTAs on the orderwire subnetwork to ring The ringer buzzer resides on the FTA There is also a ring LED that mimics the FTA ringer It flashes when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork A party line call is initiated by pressing 0000 on the DTMF pad The orderwire ports are standard RJ 11 receptacles The pins on the orderwire ports correspond to the tip and ring orderwire assignments Table 1 9 describes th
123. the Circuits tab and CTC will give you the option to enable circuit management These options are useful if you want to log in to a node to perform a single task such as placing a card in or out of service and do not want to wait while CTC discovers DCC connections and circuits 46 CTC Window The CTC window Figure 4 2 appears after you log into an ONS 15310 MA SDH The CTC window includes a menu bar toolbar and a top and bottom pane The top pane provides status information about the selected objects and a graphic of the current view The bottom pane provides tabs and subtabs to view ONS 15310 MA SDH information and perform provisioning and maintenance The CTC window provides three views network node and card Figure 4 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node View Default Login View 310ma 25 Cisco Transport Controller Menu bar Edt view Tools Help Tool bar lee SBF es s6160 2 Status area gt nse agar 10 89 19 Booted 8 17 06 1 User CISCO15 Authority Superusel SW Version 08 00 00 Defaults Factory I gt Top pane Graphic area i gt Tabs gt Alarms Conditions History Circuits Provisioning Inventory Maintenance General General Network ost NodeNamejTID 310ma 25 Contact res c SENT Location Subtabs Latitude 2 2 Longitude walizaa 2 Comm Channels
124. the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio That is make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems Inc could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California Berkeley UCB as part of UCB s public domain version of the UNIX operating system All rights reserved Copyright 1981 Regents of the University of California NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITH ALL FAULTS CISCO AND THE ABOVE NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIR
125. through the larger rear trough Figure 1 13 shows the installation of the extended cable management bracket Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ELM 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Fan Tray Assembly Figure 1 13 Installing the Extended Cable Management Bracket 1 10 Fan Tray Assembly The fan tray assembly is located at the top of the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly under the air filter rear exhaust and air inlet The fan tray is a removable drawer that holds four fans the fan control circuitry and the fuse control circuitry for the ONS 15310 MA SDH After you install the fan tray you should only need to access it if a fan failure occurs The new fan tray assembly FTA2 has a fuse control circuitry that is capable of blowing a low current fuse 1 4 A to 1 2 A This is useful when you are using power distribution equipment that has a low current fuse connected in parallel with the main fuse to help detect any failures in the main fuse The fuse control circuitry independently draws a short current approximately 900 mA for about 0 7 seconds Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EL Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Assembly every 15 minutes at 24 degrees Celsius 120 degrees Fahrenheit alternating between power s
126. to 8 0 28 to 8 ONS SI 622 L1 OC 12 3 0 to 2 0 28 to 8 ONS SI 622 L2 OC 12 3 0 to 2 0 28 to 8 ONS SI 622 I1 OC 12 OC 3 15 to 8 0 28 to 8 ONS SI 155 SR MM OC 3 STM 1 20 to 14 30 to 14 ONS SE 155 1470z through OC 3 0 to 5 34 to 3 at BER ONS SE 155 1610 10 ONS SE 622 1470 through OC 12 0 to 5 28 to 3 at BER ONS SE 622 1610 10 19 ONS SI 2G I1 OC 48 5 0 to 0 18 to 0 ONS SI 2G L1 OC 48 3 to 2 27 to 9 ONS SI 2G L2 OC 48 3 to 2 28 0 9 ONS SI 2G S1 OC 48 10 to 3 18 to 3 ONS SC 2G 28 7 through OC 48 0 to 4 28 0 9 ONS SC 2G 60 6 ONS SE Z1 OC 3 STM1 5 to 0 18 OC 48 STM 16 OC 12 STM 4 22 GE OC 48 STM 16 Fibre Channel 23 OC 12 STM 4 1 and 2 Gbps 23 OC 3 STM 1 GE ONS SI 155 SR MM OC 3 STM 1 19 to 14 14 to 5 ONS SC 155 EL STMI 1 ONS SC 2G 28 7 ONS SC 2G 33 4 ONS SC 2G 41 3 ONS SC 2G 49 3 and ONS SC 2G 57 3 are supported from Release 8 5 and later Table A 3 CE MR 6 SFP Specifications Transmitter Output Receiver Input Power SFP Product ID Interface Power Min Max dBm Min Max dBm ONS SI GE SX GE 9 5 to 0 17 to 0 ONS SI GE LX GE 9 5 to 3 19 to 3 ONS SI GE ZX GE 5 23 to 3 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix A Specifications SFP Specifications Table A 3 CE MR 6 SFP Sp
127. to an RS DCC Table 8 15 shows the OSI actions that can be performed in CTC using the node view Maintenance tab Table 8 15 OSI Actions from the CTC Maintenance Tab Tab Actions OSI ISIS RIB View the IS IS routing table OSI ESIS RIB View ESs that are attached to ISs OSI TDC e View the TARP data cache and identify static and dynamic entries e Perform TID to NSAP resolutions Hlush the TDC 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IPv6 Network Compatibility 8 7 IPv6 Network Compatibility IPv6 simplifies IP configuration and administration and has a larger address space than IPv4 to support the future growth of the Internet and Internet related technologies It uses 128 bit addresses as against the 32 bit used in IPv4 addresses Also IPv6 gives more flexibility in designing newer addressing architectures Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH can function in an IPv6 network when an Internet router that supports Network Address Translation Protocol Translation NAT PT is positioned between the GNE such as an ONS 15310 MA SDH and the client workstation NAT PT is a migration tool that helps users transition from IPv4 networks to IPv6 networks NAT PT is defined in RFC 2766 IPv4 and IPv6 nodes communicate with each other using NAT PT by allowing both IPv6 and IPv4 stacks to interface between the IPv6 DCN a
128. trails in the following ways Manual routing e Automatic routing Diverse routing This method enables VCAT circuit routing over diverse server trail links Note When creating circuits or VCATs you can choose a server trail link during manual circuit routing CTC may also route circuits over server trail links during automatic routing VCAT common fiber automatic routing is not supported Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Er 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Server Trails For a detailed procedure on how to route a VCAT circuit over a server trail refer Chapter 6 Create Circuits and VT Tunnels Section NTP A264 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit and Section NTP A265 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide 7 12 2 1 Shared Resource Link Group The Shared Resource Link Group SRLG attribute can be assigned to a server trail link using a commonly shared resource such as port fiber or span For example if two server trail links are routed over the same fiber an SRLG attribute can be assigned to these links SRLG is used by Cisco Transport Manager CTM to specify link diversity If you create multiple server trails from one port you can assign the same SRLG value to all the links to indicate that they originate from the same port Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417
129. unlocked administrative outOfGroup State Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States Table B 5 Transitions continued Action Service State Transitions ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State Current Service State locked disabled FLT Alarm condition is cleared unlocked enabled Put the port or cross connect in the Automatic In Service administrative state locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT Put the port or cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect Put the port or cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfGroup administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup locked disabled FLT amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is cleared unlocked enabled or locked enabled maintenance If an In Group member is unlocked enabled or
130. wander at the point of egress from a synchronous network Any incoming E1 signal from the transport element can also be used as a timing source The E1 21 E3 DS3 3 and E1 63 E3 DS3 3 cards can be installed in Slots 1 2 5 and 6 Card installed in Slots 1 and 2 correspond with the electrical interface assembly EIA installed on Side A at the rear of the shelf assembly and cards in Slots 5 and 6 correspond with the EIA installed on Side B See the 3 2 1 1 1 Electrical Card Protection section on page 3 2 for information about electrical card protection and supported shelf configurations Figure 2 7 shows the 21 DS3 3 and 63 DS3 3 card faceplates and block diagram Figure 2 7 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 and E1 63 E3 DS3 3 Card Faceplates and Block Diagram LET 63 PSOC Power Supply Es DS3 3 Monitor Voltages 48V gt 3 3V EM Power Sequence _ 3 3V1 5V 1 8V 2 5V 2 5V Power Shutdown 2 5V gt 1 2V 1 25V G stay E stay Headers JTAG Clocks 6 ITURI H H PLL 4 2 FPGA Flash d F F 4Mx16 N Address Data PLD Buffers kam Octal T1 LIUs x11 DIRE Mictorsx4 ENET 998 DS3 E3 XFMR 6 x2 fre amp Relays
131. with OSI based NEs Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 a22 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking Table 8 7 TCP IP and OSI Protocols OSI Model IP Protocols OSI Protocols IP OSI Tunnels Layer 7 e TLI TARP TL1 over Application e FTP OST 2 HTTP FTAM 3 Telnet ACSE Layer 6 e Presentation tate Layer 5 Session Session Layer 4 e TCP Transport IP over CLNS Transport UDP Class 4 tunnels Layer 3 IP CLNP etwa OSPF ES IS 15 15 Layer 2 Data e PPP e PPP hak LAP D Layer 1 DCC LAN fiber DCC LAN fiber electrical Physical electrical 1 TARP TID Address Resolution Protocol 2 FTAM File Transfer and Access Management 3 ACSE association control service element 4 Administrative State Presentation layer 5 CLNS Connectionless Network Layer Service 6 CLNP Connectionless Network Layer Protocol 7 ES IS End System to Intermediate System 8 IS IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System 9 LAP D Link Access Protocol on the D Channel 8 6 1 Point to Point Protocol Point to Point protocol PPP is a data link Layer 2 encapsulation protocol that transports datagrams over point to point links Although PPP was developed to transport IP traffic it can carry other protocols including the OSI Connectionless Network Protocol CLNP
132. 0 AU AINS Port 5 D 1 008 AU AINS 297 74 24 73 Port 6 D 1 00 AU AINS 4 2 22 14 Port 7 81 008 5 08 22 23 24 Port 8 D 1 00 AU AINS _ Port 9 D 1 00S AU AINS Port 10 D 1 00 AU AINS 4 11 42 25 4 4 lt gt 22 52 26 54 Alarms Conditions History Circuits Provisioning Maintenance Performance Num Ref New Date Object Port Path width sev st sa Description lt Synchronize Fier Delete Cleared Alarms AutoDelete Cleared Alarms 159514 Table 4 10 shows the tabs and subtabs available in card view The subtabs fields and information shown under each tab depend on the card type selected Table 4 10 Card View Tabs and Subtabs Tab Description Subtabs Alarms Lists current alarms CR MJ MN for the card and updates them in real time Conditions Displays a list of standing conditions on the card History Provides a history of card alarms Session displays alarms and events for the current including date object port and Card displays alarms and events retrieved severity of each alarm from a fixed size log on the card Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ex 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window MI Table 4 10 Card View Tabs and Subtabs continued Tab
133. 0 IP Address 192 168 1 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router N A Static Routes N A Static Routes Destination 192 168 1 31 Mask 255 255 255 255 Next Hop 192 168 1 30 271890 8 2 4 Scenario 4 Default Gateway on CTC Computer Scenario 4 is similar to Scenario 3 but ONS 15310 MA SDH Node 2 and Node 3 reside on different subnets 192 168 2 0 and 192 168 3 0 respectively Figure 8 5 Node 1 and the CTC computer are on subnet 192 168 1 0 Proxy ARP is not used because the network includes different subnets For the CTC computer to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3 Node 1 is entered as the default gateway on the CTC computer Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 5 Scenario 4 Default Gateway on a CTC Computer IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 10 Host Routes N A CTC Workstation LANA ONS 15310 1 IP Address 192 168 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Static Routes N A ne ONS 15310 en 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 2 20 IP Address 192 168 3 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router N A 8 Static Routes N A Static Routes N A E 82 5 Scenario 5 Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs Static route
134. 0 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking Table 8 9 TARP PDU Fields continued Field Abbreviation Size bytes Description TID of Target tar ttg n 0 1 2 TID value for the target NE TID of tar tor n 0 1 2 TID value of the TARP PDU originator Originator Protocol tar por n 0 1 2 Protocol address for the protocol type identified in the Address of tar pro field of the TARP PDU originator When the Originator tar pro field is set to FE hex tar por will contain a CLNP address that is the NET Table 8 10 shows the TARP PDU types that govern TARP interaction and routing Table 8 10 TARP PDU Types Type Description Procedure 1 Sent when a device has a TID for which After an NE originates a TARP Type 1 PDU the PDU it has no matching NSAP is sent to all adjacencies within the NE s routing area 2 Sent when a device has a TID for which After an NE originates a TARP Type 2 PDU the PDU it has no matching NSAP and no is sent to all Level 1 and Level 2 neighbors response was received from the Type 1 PDU 3 Sent as a response to 1 Type 2 After a TARP Request Type 1 or 2 PDU is received Type 5 PDUs a TARP Type 3 PDU is sent to the request originator Type 3 PDUs do not use the TARP propagation procedures 4 Sent as a notification when a change A Type 4 PDU is a notif
135. 00 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ex 78 19417 01 Appendix Network Element Defaults Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSC I count 0 600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSC W 0 count 0 600 CTX 2500 S8 TMA PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSD 300 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min PSD W 0 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day BBE 53150 count 0 53049600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day EB 53150 count 0 53049600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSC 5 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend I day PSC W 0 count 0 57600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day PSD 600 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day PSD W 0 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day SES 4 s
136. 00T 8 card and relate it to the block diagram in Figure 2 3 In the ingress direction Ethernet to SDH an octal PHY which performs all of the physical layer interface functions for 10 100 Mbps Ethernet sends the frame to the packet processor for queuing in the respective packet buffer memory The packet processor performs packet processing packet switching and classification The Ethernet frames are then passed over SMI channels to the POS mappers where Ethernet traffic is terminated and is encapsulated using the PPP HDLC or GFP framing protocols The encapsulation method is selected on a per port basis The encapsulated Ethernet frames are then mapped into a configurable number of VCAT low order and high order payloads such as VC12 synchronous payload envelope SPE VC3 SPE or a contiguous concatenated CCAT payload such as VC4 SPE Up to 63 VC12 SPEs or three VC3 SPEs can be virtually concatenated 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter2 Card Reference BE 100 8 Card The SPE from each POS mapper up to VC4 carrying encapsulated Ethernet frames are passed onto the multiplexer demultiplexer mux demux next where the VC4 frames from both POS mappers are multiplexed to form an VC4 4 frame for transport over the SDH network by means of the Bridging Transmission Convergence BTC 48 application specific integrated circuit ASIC Note Although the VC4 frames are m
137. 0T mode 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 card POS ports parameter for GFP F Table 11 10 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 POS Ports Parameters for GFP F Mode Definition Parameter Time Last Cleared A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset Link Status Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receiving a valid Ethernet signal carrier from the attached Ethernet device up means present and down means not present iflnOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing octets 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards Table 11 10 100 8 CE MR 6 ML 100T 8 POS Ports Parameters for GFP F Mode continued Parameter Definition txTotalPkts The total number of transmit packets ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol iflnErrors Number of inbound packets discarded because they contain errors ifOutOctets The total number of transmitted octets including framing packets rx TotalPkts The total number of receive packets ifOutOversizePkts Number of packets larger than 1518 bytes sent out into SDH Packets larger than 1600 bytes do not get transmitted gfpStatsRxSBit
138. 1 DS3 E3 Optical monitoring for the card Ethernet cards subtabs depend on the card type Ether Ports POS Ports 4 6 4 Print and Export CTC Data You can use the File gt Print or File gt Export options to print or export CTC provisioning information for record keeping or troubleshooting The functions can be performed in card node or network views The File gt Print function sends the data to a local or network printer File gt Export exports the data to a file where it can be imported into other computer applications such as spreadsheets and database management programs Whether you choose to print or export data you can choose from the following options Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EX Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes Entire frame Prints or exports the entire CTC window including the graphical view of the card node or network This option is available for all windows Tabbed view Prints or exports the lower half of the CTC window containing tabs and data The printout includes the selected tab on top and the data shown in the tab window For example if you print the History window tabbed view you print only history items appearing in the window This option is available for all windows Table Contents Prints CTC data in table format without
139. 1 EIEIN Chapter11 Performance Monitoring BEN Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EI 78 19417 01 12 SNMP This chapter explains Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as implemented by the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH For SNMP set up information refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 12 1 SNMP Overview page 12 1 12 2 SNMP Basic Components page 12 2 e 12 3 SNMP Version Support page 12 4 12 4 SNMP Message Types page 12 4 12 5 SNMP Management Information Bases page 12 5 12 6 SNMP Trap Content page 12 11 e 12 7 SNMPv1 v2 Community Names page 12 12 e 12 8 SNMPvI v2 Proxy Support Over Firewalls page 12 13 e 12 9 SNMPv3 Proxy Configuration page 12 13 e 12 10 SNMP Remote Monitoring page 12 14 12 1 SNMP Overview SNMP is an application layer communication protocol that allows network devices to exchange management information SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan network growth Up to ten SNMP trap destinations and five concurrent Cisco Transport Controller CTC user sessions are allowed per node The ONS 15310 MA SDH use SNMP to provide asynchronous event notification to a network management system NMS ONS SNMP implementation uses standard Internet Engineering Task Force IETF management in
140. 1 63 DS3 3 card can protect an adjacent 21 DS3 3 card However an 1 21 DS3 3 card cannot protect an adjacent 63 DS3 3 card Figure 3 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Chassis Card Layout a PWRA CR MJ L LAE cp n n ACO LAMP XXX XXXXX XX XX FAIL REM CO Date jar 0 4 n 9 lemen 33 E FAL FAL as Ml ace LAN Fg gl ng CTX2500 CTX2500 051 84 051 84 051 84 051 84 053 DS3 ECI 3 CRAFT D53 EC1 3 DS3 EC 3 FAL ec oo oo lag ll DSi SF 053 SF 053 SFI Ses H B 1 1 TX TX RX RX 2 2 H Tx HA RX RX 2 9 IL ACT STBY IL ACT STBY FAL EI FALL SYNCH e C o ali o RE 71 ES 7I 71 p 7 TR ls 5 Du NN Y Y L Y L Y L Y E Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and
141. 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Chassis Card Layout 3 2 Figure 4 1 CTC Software Versions in an ONS 15310 MA SDH Node View 4 2 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EUN Figures Figure 4 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node View Default Login View 4 7 Figure 4 3 Terminal Loopback Indicator 4 9 Figure 4 4 Facility Loopback Indicator 4 10 Figure 4 5 Network in CTC Network View 4 1 Figure 4 6 CTC Card View of an E1 21 DS3 3Card 4 14 Figure 4 7 Static IP Over CLNS Tunnels 4 17 Figure 4 8 TL1 Tunnels 4 18 Figure 6 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Timing Example 6 2 Figure 7 1 Terminal Loopback in the Edit Circuits Window 7 7 Figure 7 2 Subnetwork Connection Protection Go and Return Routing 7 11 Figure 7 3 VCAT Common Fiber Routing 17 12 Figure 7 4 VCAT Split Fiber Routing 7 13 Figure 7 5 Open Ended VCAT 7 16 Figure 7 6 Rolls Window 7 18 Figure 7 7 Single Source Roll 7 20 Figure 7 8 Single Destination Roll 7 20 Figure 7 9 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit Destination Changes 7 20 Figure 7 10 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit Source Changes 7 21 Figure 7 11 Dual Roll to Reroute a Link 7 21 Figure 7 12 Dual Roll to Reroute to a Different Node 1 22 Figure 8 1 Scenario 1 CTC and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes on the Same Subnet 8 3 Figure 8 2 Scenario 2 CTC and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Connected to Router 8 4 Figure 8 3 Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP 8 5 Figure 8 4 Scenario 3 Using Proxy A
142. 12 45 Chatham Island GMT 13 00 GMT 13 00 Nuku alofa Tonga GMT 13 00 GMT 13 00 Rawaki Phoenix Islands GMT 14 00 GMT 14 00 Line Islands Kiritimati Kiribati Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Numerics 1 1 optical port protection creating linear ADMs 9 3 description ONS 15310 MA 3 4 1 1 electrical card protection ONS 15310 MA 3 2 15310 MA SDH CTX2500 card resetting 4 19 A adapter cable 2 13 ADM See linear ADM administrative states 2 AIC I card orderwire 1 24 air filter 1 24 AISS P parameter definition 11 4 alarm cable See external alarms and controls ALARM port Alarm In and Alarm Out on the ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 18 alarm profiles applying 10 12 changing 10 10 comparing 10 11 creating 10 10 deleting 10 10 description 10 9 displaying by node 10 11 editing 10 11 loading 10 10 row display options 10 12 saving 10 10 alarms autodelete 10 4 changing default severities See alarm profiles changing display 10 4 deleting 10 4 entries in session 10 7 filrering 10 4 object identification 10 3 retrieving history 10 8 severities 10 9 10 11 suppressing 10 12 10 13 synchronizing 10 4 tab description 10 2 time zone 10 3 viewing 10 1 viewing circuits affected
143. 13 node status information 4 8 views See card view See network view See node view virtual routers See OSI virtual routers virtual wires 10 14 VPC parameter definition 11 13 VTI 5 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Index See also circuits bandwidth 7 8 cross connect capacity ONS 15310 MA 7 8 tunneling 7 8 VT aggregation points 7 8 VT tunnels 7 8 8 2 warning definition i xxiv Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01
144. 15310 MA SDH is discarded Rejected packets are silently discarded 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity Routing Table Table 8 4 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When the Packet is Addressed to the ONS 15310 MA SDH Packets Arrive At Accepts Rejects 15310E CTX K9 All User Datagram Protocol UDP e UDP packets addressed to the LAN port packets except those in the SNMP trap relay port 391 Rejected column DCC interface AIL UDP packets TCP packets addressed to the e All TCP packets except those Telnet port packets addressed to the Telnet and e TCP packets addressed to the proxy SOCKS proxy server ports server port e OSPF packets e All packets other than UDP TCP Internet Control Message Protocol OSEE ICME ICMP packets If you implement the proxy server keep the following rules in mind 1 All DCC connected ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes on the same Ethernet segment must have the same Craft Access Only setting Mixed values produce unpredictable results and might leave some nodes unreachable through the shared Ethernet segment All DCC connected ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes on the same Ethernet segment must have the same Enable Firewall setting Mixed values produce unpredictable results Some nodes might become unreachable If you check Enable Firewall always check Enable Proxy If Enable Pro
145. 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day EB 125 count 0 691200000 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 3 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1
146. 168 2 1 Static Routes N A e SDH RING e ONS 15310 Ba 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 3 20 IP Address 192 168 4 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router N A 2 Static Routes N A Static Routes N A Figure 8 9 shows the same network without OSPF Static routes must be manually added to the router for CTC computers on LAN A to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3 because these nodes reside on different subnets Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 9 Scenario 6 OSPF Not Enabled Router IP Address of interface iAi to LAN A 192 168 1 1 IP Address of interface iBi to LAN 192 168 2 1 LANA Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 pines Static Routes Destination 192 168 3 20 Next Hop 192 168 2 10 Destination 192 168 4 30 Next 192 168 2 10 n A CTC Workstation Int B IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Host Routes N A LAN B ONS 15310 1 IP Address 192 168 2 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192 168 2 1 Static Routes Destination 192 168 1 100 Mask 255 255 255 255 Next Hop 192 168 2 1 Cost 2 ONS 15310 2 ONS 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 3 20 IP Address 192 168 4 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router
147. 17 01 Appendix A Specifications Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications A 4 4 ONS 15310 MA OSP configuration The following ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP accessories were tested and is complaint with OSP and WW EMC requirements 15310 E MA SA 15310 MA FTA 15310 EIA HD A 15310 EIA HD B 15310E EIA HDA 15310E EIA HDB 15310 E 28WBE 3BBE 15310 E 84WBE 3BBE 15310 CE MR 6 15310 CTX 2500 K9 15310E CTX K9 To install ONS 15310 MA SDH in an OSP with a different cabinet and if NEBS compliance is required the cabinet must be GR 487 compliant In addition the ONS 15310 MA SDH installed in the cabinet must be tested to NEBS requirements and following components must be installed DSI primary and secondary surge protection modules To install ONS 15310 MA SDH in an OSP with a different cabinet which does not require NEBS compliance and if FCC and or other WW EMC requirements must be covered the following primary surge protection modules must be installed 051 ADC ComProtect DS1 protection module ComProtect Solid State DS3 ADC ComProtect DS3 protection module ADC P3M To install ONS 15310 MA SDH in an OSP with a different cabinet and safety compliance with UL 60950 1 is required the following components must be installed EI DSI insulation transformer rated 1500 Vac rms Two Cylix DS1 E1 Secondary Protection Modules PCI 050 628 02 Cylix DS3 E3 Seco
148. 17 01 EN Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Figure 1 3 High Density EIA Connectors J5 BITS2 J7 ALM OUT 1 ooo J Q KG 0555990908009 A LI E LON KY e gt ORONG TO 9 RIN 48vDC PWRB 4 J2 CRFT J3 UDC J4BITS1 J6 ALM INPUT PWRA 48VDC RTN C 2 P N 11 P N c a 1 r coo q a 2 r coo 7 E1 amp o E1 OUT OUT 23234 ee r 71 E1 E1 se v0 L AN AN 1 wo 1 8 2 1 t our 8 ou J23 a m J10 1 Q E1 IN m IN J24 8 9 Jn m L 2 E1 E1 OUT OU Je Js H 1 P 1 1 IN 1 J26 9 p J29 OUT 4304 J31 OUT VEN J28 IN J27 OUT C J33 HD DS3 21 C J20 HD DS3 271766 To install the EI
149. 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line Send lt FF gt DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line SendAISOnFacility Loopback TRUE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config vc4 IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM 1 PORT config vclo IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min BBE 1312 count 0 137700 CTX 2500 STM 1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min EB 1312 count 0 137700 CTX 2500 STM 1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM 1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STMI PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day BBE 13120 count 0 13219200 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day EB 13120 count 0 13219200 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA
150. 2 Bandwidth 7 8 7 4 VC Low order Path Tunnels and Aggregation Points 7 8 7 5 DCC Tunnels 7 8 7 5 1 Traditional DCC Tunnels 7 9 7 5 2 IP Encapsulated Tunnels 7 9 7 6 Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits 7 9 7 6 1 Open Ended Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits 7 6 2 Go and Return Subnetwork Connection Protection Routing 7 7 Virtual Concatenated Circuits 1 11 7 7 1 Circuit States 7 11 7 7 2 Member Routing 1 12 7 7 3 Link Capacity Adjustment 7 13 7 1 4 Circuit Size 7 14 7 7 5 Open Ended VCAT 7 15 7 7 5 1 Open Ended VCAT Protection 7 16 7 8 Section and Path Trace 1 17 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 CHAPTER 8 7 9 Bridge and Roll 7 18 7 9 1 Rolls Window 7 18 7 9 2 Roll Status 7 19 7 9 3 Single and Dual Rolls 7 20 7 9 4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll 7 22 7 9 5 Protected Circuits 7 22 7 10 Merged Circuits 7 22 7 11 Reconfigured Circuits 7 23 7 12 Server Trails 7 23 7 12 1 Server Trail Protection Types 7 24 7 12 2 Circuit Routing over Server Trails 7 24 7 12 2 1 Shared Resource Link Group 7 25 Management Network Connectivity 8 1 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 IP Networking Overview 8 2 IP Addressing Scenarios 8 2 8 2 1 Scenario 1 CTC and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes on the Same Subnet 8 3 8 2 2 Scenario 2 CTC and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Connected to a Router 8 3 8 2 3 Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP to Enab
151. 20 271799 SDH Figure 8 14 shows a remote node connected to an ENE Ethernet port Proxy and firewall tunnels are useful in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC and foreign node This configuration also requires a firewall tunnel on the ENE Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity BN TCP IP and OSI Networking Figure 8 14 Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port Remote 10 10 20 10 Y 27 10 10 20 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 0 24 ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH Gateway NE S amp S External NE 10 10 10 100 24 10 10 10 150 24 ONS 15310 MA SDH e ONS 15310 MA SDH External NE aa 19 External NE 10 10 10 250 24 10 10 10 200 24 r Non ONS node a Ethernet Foreign NE Local Craft CTC 130 94 122 199 28 192 168 20 20 SDH 271800 8 6 TCP IP and OSI Networking ONS 15310 MA SDH DCN communication is based on the TCP IP protocol suite However ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes can also be networked with equipment that uses the OSI protocol suite While TCP IP and OSI protocols are not directly compatible they do have the same objectives and occupy similar layers of the OSI reference model Table 8 7 shows the protocols that are involved when TCP IP based NEs are networked
152. 255 255 0 Scenario 5 Static Route with Multiple LAN Destinations Router 2 Router 1 IP Address of interface fAi to LAN iA 192 168 1 1 IP Address of interface iBi to LAN iBi 192 168 2 1 c 255 255 255 0 Int B LAN B ONS 15310 1 IP Address 192 168 2 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192 168 2 1 Static Routes Destination 0 0 0 0 Mask 0 0 0 0 Next Hop 192 168 2 1 Cost 2 SDH RING ONS 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 2 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router N A Static Routes N A Static Routes N A 271794 8 2 6 Scenario 6 Using OSPF Open Shortest Path First OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol Link state protocols use a hello protocol to monitor their links with adjacent routers and to test the status of their links to their neighbors Link state protocols advertise their directly connected networks and their active links Each link state router captures the link state advertisements and puts them together to create a topology of the entire network or area From this database the router calculates a routing table by constructing a shortest path tree Routes are recalculated when topology changes occur Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios The ONS 15310 MA SDH uses OSPF protocol in internal ONS 15310 MA SDH net
153. 2G xx x cable distance varies depending on DWDM system installation Table A 5 Multimode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications SFP Product ID Wavelength Fiber Type Cable Distance ONS SI 155 SR MM 1310 nm 62 5 125 2 km 1 2 miles Intermediate Reach micron MMF A 4 Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications The following Purcell FLX25GT outdoor enclosure specifications accessories are tested and complaint with OSP cabinet and WW EMC requirements Purcell 25RU FLX25GT Equipment Bay 25RU Blank Equipment Bay Door Battery Bracket Kit GT 14 inch Battery Pedestal 25RU GT 16 inch PMTM with Battery pedestal 8 Position AC Load Center w TVSS Transient Voltage Suppression Module for AC power PN AC2050M 07 NEBS and WW complaint AC load center Europe and WW PN MCD 01 950 01 w Surge Srrestors DEHNguard T275 DEHNgap TC255 25RU GT Solar shield with 14 inch Battery pedestal Heat Exchanger 80W C 1539 W GR 487 complaint rear door GT Anchor Plate 1EB 16 inch PMTM Left E1 100 Pair Protector Blocks e w 710 connectors PN 6659 1 105 00 06A ADC CPAUS240A1 E1 Protectors ADC 1 Cross connect block Per Term Assy NT 28 ckt PN 6634 1 971 07 ADC DS3 E3 protector module mounting panels P3C 175002 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ex 78 19417 01 Appendix A Specifications Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications e ADC DS3 E3 protector modules P3M PB2001 e ADC 23
154. 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 14 7 ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter12 SNMP B SNMP Remote Monitoring Table 12 7 OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable continued No Column Name OID Status 8 ifOutUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 9 ifOutMulticastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 4 Unsupported in E100 E1000 10 jifOutBroadcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 5 Unsupported in E100 E1000 11 l ifOutDiscards 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 19 Unsupported in E100 E1000 12 Dot3StatsAlignmentErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 2 13 Dot3StatsFCSErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 3 14 Dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 4 15 Dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 5 16 Dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 7 17 Dot3StatsLateCollisions 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 8 18 Dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions 13 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 9 19 Dot3StatsFrameTooLong 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 13 20 Dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 11 Unsupported in E100 E1000 21 Dot3StatsSQETestErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 6 Unsupported in E100 E1000 22 jetherStatsUndersizePkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 9 23 etherStatsFragments 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 11 24 etherStatsPkts64Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16
155. 310E CTX K9 card slot Slots 3 and 4 on the 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly Only a CTX FILLER card should be installed in the 15310E CTX K9 slot Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ETE 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference SFP Modules Figure 2 10 shows the 15310E CTX K9 filler card faceplate for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Figure 2 10 153 10E CTX K9 Filler Card CTX FILLER 145769 A Caution Do not attempt to install the CTX FILLER card in a traffic card slot Slots 1 2 5 and 6 in the ONS 15310 MA SDH Only 15310 EXP FILLER cards should be installed in the traffic card slots 2 8 SFP Modules This section describes the small form factor pluggables SFPs that can be used with the CE MR 6 and 15310E CTX K9 cards to provide optical interfaces The SFP slots for the ONS 15310 MA SDH are located at the bottom of the 15310E CTX K9 card The CE 100T 8 ML 100T 8 and electrical cards do not use SFPs Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference SFP Modules 2 8 1 Compatibility by Card AN Table 2 11 lists the SFPs compatible with the 15310E CTX K9 and CE MR 6 cards For more information about SFPs see the A 3 SFP Specifications section on page 9 Caution Only u
156. 4 Bi Facility Loopback Indicator Table 4 5 lists the card statuses Table 4 5 Node View Card Statuses Card Status Description Stby Card is in standby Act Card is active NP Card is not present Mis Card is mismatched Ldg Card is resetting 4 6 1 2 Node View Card Shortcuts If you move your mouse over cards in the graphic popups display additional information about the card including the card type card status active or standby the type of alarm such as Critical Major and Minor if any and the alarm profile used by the card Right click a card to reveal a shortcut menu which you can use to open reset or delete the card Right click a card slot to preprovision it before installing the card 4 6 1 3 Node View Tabs Table 4 6 lists the tabs and subtabs available in the node view Table 4 6 Tab Node View Tabs and Subtabs Description Subtabs Alarms Lists current alarms CR MJ MN for the node and updates them in real time Conditions Displays a list of standing conditions on the node History Provides a history of node alarms including date type and severity of each alarm The Session subtab displays alarms and events for the current session The Node subtab displays alarms and events retrieved from a fixed size log on the node Session Node Circuits Creates deletes edits and maps circuits Circuits Rolls
157. 417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports Figure 11 13 PM Parameter Read Points on the STM16 Ports ONS 15310 MA SDH MA STM16 Port Cross Connect STM N Pointer Processors RS EB BTC RS ES RS SES ASIC VC CV P N MS EB VC ES P gt MS ES VG VC SES P I VCUAS P MS UAS s PPJC PDET gt jeu PPJC Pdet NPJC PDET PPJC PGEN gt NPJC Pdet NPJC PGEN PPJC Pgen NPJC Pgen PJC DIFF P PJCS PDET P PMs read on PMC PJCS PGEN P J PMs read on BTC ASIC ae 271813 Note For PM locations relating to protection switch counts see the Telcordia GR 1230 CORE document The PM parameters for the STM16 ports are listed in Table 11 13 The listed parameters are defined in Table 11 2 on page 11 4 Table 11 13 STM16 Port PM Parameters VC4 and VC4 Xc MS 1 1 HP Path RS NE MS NE FE LMSP NE PJC NE NE FE4 5 RS BBE MS BBE MS PSC 1 1 HP PPJC Pdet HP BBE RS EB MS EB MS PSD HP NPJC Pdet HP BBER RS ES MS ES HP PPJC Pgen HP EB RS SES MS SES HP NPJC Pgen HP ES MS UAS HP PJCS Pdet HP ESR HP PJCS Pgen HP SES HP PJCDiff HP SESR HP UAS 1 For information about troubleshooting subnetwork connection protection SNCP switch counts refer to the Alarm Troub
158. 50 54 Ring Port 51 23 Tip Port 51 55 Ring Port 52 24 Tip Port 52 56 Ring Port 53 25 Tip Port 53 57 Ring Port 54 26 Tip Port 54 58 Ring Port 55 27 Tip Port 55 59 Ring Port 56 28 Tip Port 56 60 Unused 29 Unused 61 Unused 30 Unused 62 Unused 31 Unused 63 Unused 32 Unused 64 Table 1 4 lists the Champ connector pin assignments and the corresponding EIA mapping for connectors J12 and J13 on the A side EIA and connectors J25 and J26 on the B side EIA Table 1 4 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA Connectors J12 and J13 Side B EIA Connectors J25 and J26 Signal Pin Signal Pin Not used 1 Not used 33 Not used 2 Not used 34 Ring Port 57 3 Tip Port 57 35 Ring Port 58 4 Tip Port 58 36 Ring Port 59 5 Tip Port 59 37 Ring Port 60 6 Tip Port 60 38 Ring Port 61 7 Tip Port 61 39 Ring Port 62 8 Tip Port 62 40 Ring Port 63 9 Tip Port 63 41 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Table 1 4 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA Connectors J12 and J13 Side B EIA Connectors J25 and J26 continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Unused 10 Unused 42 Unused 11 Unused 43 Unused 12 Unused 44 Unused 13 Unused 45 Unused 14 Unused 46 Unused 15 Unused 47 Unused 16 Unused 48 Un
159. 51 AL Refer to Table 2 1 for compatible E1 cables available from Lorom Industrial Co LTD Lorom Industrial Co LTD 15th Floor Room 2 Number 78 Sec 2 AN HO Road Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2706 6037 Fax 886 2 2704 6396 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Figure 1 8 32 PAIR 24 GAUGE T1 SHIELDED CABLE ASSEMBLY 22 16 GA x 25 bolt term ring T amp B 20 GA stranded green 4 40 x 425 4 40 x 425 PVC hookup wire alpha captive captive l P H M S P H M S lt XXX gt AMP AMP p cj ER 32 PR 24 GA T1 shielded cable ADC 64 male 1 1 64 male bail lock connector AMP connector AMP Figure 1 9 25 PR 24 GA CORR SHIELD OUTDOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 2 2 1 Heat shrink black 25 PR 24 GA CORR Shield 50 Pin male outdoor cable general 710 splice connector 3M XXX lt E Pin 1 J 50 POS 710 cover 3M 274041 Table 1 1 E1 cables for wire wrap connection ACS Part Numbers Length Description 905 01 25 feet Connector Wire Wrap DSX PCAM90SPA10CO001 50 feet Connector Wire Wrap DSX PCAM90SPA3MCO01 100 feet Connector Wire Wrap DSX
160. 5min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day EB 125 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day NPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCDIFF 5760 count 0 1382400000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJCS PDET 9600 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PJ
161. 6 or 64 consecutive bytes You can use the strings to monitor interruptions or changes to circuit traffic For the ONS 15310 MA SDH node JO section trace is supported for optical and E3 ports on the 15310E CTX K9 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 or E1_63_E3_DS3_3 cards Table 7 9 shows the ONS 15310 SDH cards and or ports that support J1 and or J2 path trace Table 7 9 ONS 15310 MA SDH Cards Ports Capable of J1 J2 Path Trace Trace Function J1 or J2 Cards Ports Transmit and receive 6 ML 100T 8 and J2 CE 100T 8 J2 ONS 15310 MA SDH STMN and E1 ports Receive Ji ONS 15310 MA SDH STMN EI and DS3 ports If the string received at a circuit drop port does not match the string that the port expects to receive an alarm is raised Two path trace modes are available e Automatic The receiving port assumes that the first string it receives is the baseline string e Manual The receiving port uses a string that you manually enter as the baseline string 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Bridge and Roll 7 9 Bridge and Roll The CTC Bridge and Roll wizard reroutes live traffic without interrupting service The bridge process takes traffic from a designated roll from facility and establishes a cross connect to the designated roll to facility When the bridged signal at the receiving end point is verified the roll proc
162. 6400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings C 3 3 4 Ethernet Card Default Settings Table C 6 lists the CE MR 6 CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 card default settings for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Table C 5 CE 100T 8 config A INSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins CE MR 6 CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 Card Default Settings 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 CE 100T 8 config S locked disabled unlocked locked disabled locked maintenance unlocked tate automaticInService 7 count 0 7 CE 100T 8 etherPor tConfig 802 1Q Vla nCoS 255 count 0 255 CE 100T 8 etherPor tConfig IP ToS 200 ms 200 5000 CE 100T 8 etherPor tConfig liTimer CE MR config AIN SSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 CE MR config State locked disabled unlocked locked disabled locked maintenance unlocked automaticInService 7 count 0 7 CE MR etherPortCo nfig 802 1Q VlanC oS 255 count 0 255 CE MR etherPortCo nfig IP ToS 200 ms 200 5000 CE MR etherPortCo nfig liTimer m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2
163. 8 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE security other InactiveDuration 45 days 1 2 3 99 when nothing TRUE 45 when nothing FALSE NODE security other PreventInactiveSuperuserDisable FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security other SingleSessionPerUser FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security passwordA ging EnforcePasswordA ging FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security passwordA ging maintenance A gingPeriod 45 days 20 90 NODE security passwordA ging maintenance WarningPeriod 5 days 2 20 NODE security passwordA ging provisioning AgingPeriod 45 days 20 90 NODE security passwordA ging provisioning WarningPeriod 5 days 2 20 NODE security passwordAging retrieve AgingPeriod 45 days 20 90 NODE security passwordAging retrieve WarningPeriod 5 days 2 20 NODE security passwordA ging superuser A gingPeriod 45 days 20 90 NODE security passwordA ging superuser WarningPeriod 5 days 2 20 NODE security passwordChange CannotChangeNewPassword FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security passwordChange CannotChangeNewPasswordForNDays 20 days 20 95 NODE security passwordChange NewPasswordMustDifferFromOldB yNCharacters 1 1 5 characters NODE security passwordChange PreventReusingLastNPasswords I times 1 10 NODE securi
164. 8c and VC4 16c VCAT circuits are VC 12 nv or VC3 nv where n is the number of members Protection The type of circuit protection Direction The circuit direction either two way or one way Status The circuit status See the 7 2 1 Circuit Status section on page 7 3 Source The circuit source in the format node slot port port name VC Port name appears quotes Node and slot always appear port port name VC might appear depending on the source card circuit type and whether a name is assigned to the port If the port uses a pluggable port module PPM the port format is PPM port number for example p2 1 If the port is a E1 DS3 or port port type is indicated for example pE1 If the circuit size is a concatenated size 9c 12c VCs used in the circuit are indicated by an ellipsis for example S7 9 VCs 7 8 and 9 or S10 12 VCs 10 11 and 12 Destination The circuit destination in the same format as the circuit source of Spans The number of internode links that constitute the circuit Right clicking the column displays a shortcut menu from which you can choose to show or hide circuit span detail Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels Circuit Properties e State The circuit state See the 7 2 2 Circuit States section on page 7 4 The Filter button allows you to filter the
165. 9 electrical cards 4 19 Ethernet cards 4 19 Retrieve user description 5 1 idle user timeout 5 6 network level actions 5 4 node level actions 5 2 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Index retrieving alarm history 10 8 condition history 10 8 conditions 10 6 reverting software database to protect load 4 20 rings See also SNCP subtending 9 4 RJ 11 connector 1 25 port 1 25 RJ 11 to RJ 45 console cable adapter 2 13 RJ 45 connectors alarm input pin assignments ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 19 alarm output pin assignments ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 19 BITS pin assignments ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 20 PC or workstation requirement 4 5 TLI interface 2 UDC cable pin assignments ONS 15310 MA 1 21 RMON 12 14 to 12 19 alarm group 12 17 description 12 14 Ethernet history group 12 16 Ethernet Statistics group 12 14 event group 12 19 history control group 12 15 OIDs 12 17 roll automatic 7 18 bridge and roll 7 18 dual 7 20 to 7 22 manual 7 19 one cross connection 7 20 path 7 19 protected circuits 7 22 restrictions on two circuit rolls 7 22 single 7 20 to 7 22 states 7 19 status 7 19 two cross connections 7 20 unprotected circuits 7 22 window 7 18 routing common fiber 7 12 go and return path protection 7 10 OSI 8 27 split 7 12 table in CTC 8 16 VCAT members 7 12 RS BBE parameter definition 11 10 RS BBER parameter definition 11 10 RS EB parameter definit
166. 92 168 20 20 Default gateway 192 168 20 1 271796 Table 8 2 shows recommended settings for ONS 15310 MA SDH GNEs and ENEs in the configuration shown in Figure 8 10 Table 8 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH and ENE Settings Setting ONS 15310 MA SDH GNE ONS 15310 MA SDH ENE OSPF Off Off SNTP Server if used SNTP server IP address Set to node GNE IP address SNMP if used 5 trap destinations 5 SNMPv1 trap destinations to node GNE Figure 8 11 shows the same proxy server implementation with ONS 15310 MA SDH ENEs on different subnets In this example GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown in Table 8 2 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 11 Scenario 7 Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets NOC CTC station NOCLAN 97 1 1 x Interface 0 0 97 1 1 1 Interface 0 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH 86 1 1 1 ENE Central Office LAN IP 192 168 0 0 24 ONS 15310 MA SDH GNE IP 86 10 10 100 mu Default gateway 86 1 1 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH Local CTC station ENE IP 10 10 10 10 271797 Figure 8 12 shows the implementation with ONS 15310 MA SDH ENEs in multiple rings In this example GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown i
167. 94 524 ft 525 655 ft e Electrical interface 64 pin Champ connectors on high density EIA For DS3 Input Bit rate 44 736 Mbps 20 ppm Frame format Unframed M13 C bit Line code B3ZS Termination Unbalanced coaxial cable Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet with 734A or 728A AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Output Bit rate 44 736 Mbps 20 ppm Frame format Unframed M13 C bit Line code B3ZS Termination Unbalanced coaxial cable Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet with 734A or 728A cable m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix A Specifications SFP Specifications AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Power level 1 8 to 5 7 dBm Pulse shape ANSI E1 102 1988 Figure 8 Pulse amplitude 0 36 to 0 85 V peak Loopback modes Terminal and facility Line build out 0 to 225 feet 226 to 450 feet e Electrical interface BNC Connectors on high density EIA A 2 6 Filler Cards The 15310 EXP FILLER card has the following specifications Environmental Operating temperature I Temp 40 to 65 degrees Celsius 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity e Dimensions Height 6 93 in 176 mm Width 1 35 in 34 29 mm Depth 9 38 238 25 mm
168. A 9 Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications 12 A 4 1 Power Specifications 13 A 4 2 Environmental Specifications 13 A 4 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP Statements 14 A 4 4 ONS 15310 MA OSP configuration 15 Turn off or on AC power in Purcell FLX25GT OSP cabinet 15 APPENDIX B Administrative and Service States B 1 B 1 5 2 Service States 1 Administrative States 2 78 19417 01 Contents MI Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Contents Service State Transitions B 3 B 3 1 Card Service State Transitions 3 B 3 2 Port and Cross Connect Service State Transitions 6 B 3 3 Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions B 13 APPENDIX C Network Element Defaults C 1 C 1 Network Element Defaults Description 6 1 C 2 Default Settings C 2 C 3 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings C 2 C 3 1 Configuration Defaults C 3 C 3 2 Threshold Defaults C 4 C 3 3 Defaults by Card c 4 C 3 3 1 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings C 5 0 3 3 2 E1 21 DS3 3 Card Default Settings 15 0 33 3 E1_63_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings C 21 C 3 3 4 Ethernet Card Default Settings C 28 C 4 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings C 29 C 4 1 Time Zones 39 INDEX m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 FIGURES Figure 1 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Dimensions 1 3 Fig
169. A on the rear of the shelf assembly you must first remove the standard sheet metal covers The EIAs use the same screw holes as the standard sheet metal covers but they use three holes for panhead screws and two holes for jack screws When installed with the standard door and cabling on the backplane the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf measures approximately 13 7 inches 34 8 cm deep when fully populated with backplane cables 1 4 Front Door The ONS 15310 MA SDH is orderable with a front door You must install the ground strap on the door after you install the door Figure 1 4 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Rear Cover Ml Figure 1 4 ONS 15310 MA SDH Door Ground Strap 144706 1 5 Rear Cover The ONS 15310 MA SDH is orderable with an optional clear plastic rear cover The rear cover protects the connectors installed on the back plane of the chassis Rear cover specifications are Environmental Operating temperature 40 to 65 degrees Celsius 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Dimensions 10 59 in x 10 44 in x 0 5 in 26 9 cm x 26 52 cm x 1 27 cm Weight Approximately 0 67 Ib 300 g 1 6 Power and Ground Description This section describes how to connect the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly to the power supply For det
170. AL_TLI circuit Note PARTIAL tunnel circuits do not split into multiple circuits during reconfiguration 7 12 Server Trails A server trail is a non DCC logical or virtual link across a third party network that connects two CTC network domains A server trail allows A Z circuit provisioning when no DCC is available You can create server trails between two distant optical or STM 1E ports The end ports on a server trail can be different types for example an STM 4 port can be linked to an STM 1 port Server trails are not allowed on DCC enabled ports 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Server Trails S The server trail link is bidirectional and can be VC3 VC11 VC12 VC4 VC4 2c VC4 3c VC4 4c VC4 6c VC4 8c VC4 12c VC4 16c VC4 32c and VC4 64c you cannot change an existing server trail to another size It must be deleted and recreated A circuit provisioned over a server trail must match the type and size of the server trail it uses For example an VC4 3c server trail can carry only VC4 3c circuits and not three VC4 circuits Note There is no OSPF or any other management information exchange between NEs over a server trail 1 12 1 Server Trail Protection Types S The server trail protection type determines the protection type for any circuits that traverse it A server trail link can be one of the following pr
171. AS circuits you can add or delete members without affecting service Before deleting a member Cisco recommends that you put the member in the locked enabled outOfGroup service state Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels 7 7 5 Open Ended VCAT Virtual Concatenated Circuits For SW LCAS circuits used when interoperating with ONS 15454 ML Series cards you cannot add or delete members Fornon LCAS VCAT circuits that use CE 100T 8 or CE MR 6 cards adding and deleting members to from the circuit is possible but service affecting For ML 100T 8 cards you cannot add or delete members from non LCAS VCAT circuits without affecting the entire VCAT circuit Table 7 7 summarizes the VCAT capabilities for the CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 cards Table 7 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH VCAT Card Capabilities Support Adda Delete a locked enabled o Card Mode Member Member utOfGroup CE 100T 8 LCAS Yes Yes Yes SW LCAS No No No Non LCAS Yes Yes No ML 100T 8 LCAS Yes Yes Yes SW LCAS No No No Non LCAS No No No CE MR 6 LCAS Yes Yes Yes SW LCAS Yes Yes No Non LCAS Yes Yes No 1 For CE 100T 8 cards you can add or delete members after creating a VCAT circuit with no protection During the time it takes to add or delete members from seconds to minutes the entire VCAT circuit will be unable to carry traffic For ap
172. After the E 1 path becomes unavailable it becomes available when ten consecutive seconds occur with no SESs The ten seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time Tx BBER P Transmit Path Background Block Error Ratio BBER P is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs Tx EB P Transmit Path Errored Block EB P indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block UAS Path Unavailable Seconds UAS is a count of the seconds when the VC path was unavailable A high order path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as HP SESs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as HP SESs UASCP P Unavailable Seconds CP bit Path UASCP P is a count of one second intervals when the DS3 path is unavailable A DS3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive SESCP Ps occur The ten SESCP Ps are included in unavailable time After the DS3 path becomes unavailable it becomes available when ten consecutive seconds with no SESCP Ps occur The ten seconds with no SESCP Ps are excluded from unavailable time Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EIN 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameter
173. Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE security grantPermission RetrieveAuditLog Superuser Provisioning Superuser NODE security idleUserTimeout Maintenance 01 00 00 00 00 01 hours mins 00 02 16 39 NODE security idleUserTimeout Provisioning 00 30 00 00 00 01 hours mins 00 02 16 39 NODE security idleUserTimeout Retrieve 00 00 00 00 00 01 hours mins 00 02 16 39 NODE security idleUserTimeout Superuser 00 15 00 00 00 01 hours mins 00 02 16 39 NODE security lanAccess LANAccess May disconnect CTC from node Front amp NoLAN Access Backplane Backplane Only Front Only Front amp Backplane NODE security lanAccess RestoreTimeout 5 minutes 0 60 NODE security legalDisclaimer LoginWarningMessage lt html gt lt cent er gt lt b gt WAR NING lt b gt lt center gt This system is restricted to authorized users for business purposes Unauthorize d lt p gt access is a violation of the law This service may be monitored for administrativ e lt p gt and security reasons By proceeding you consent to this monitoring Free form field NODE security other DisableInactiveUser FALSE FALSE TRUE m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 7
174. C Because all three nodes are on the same subnet Proxy ARP enables Node to serve as a gateway for Nodes 2 and 3 Note This scenario assumes all CTC connections are to Node 1 If you connect a laptop to either Node 2 or Node 3 network partitioning occurs and neither the laptop or the CTC computer is able to see all nodes If you want laptops to connect directly to end network elements you need to create static routes see Scenario 5 or enable the ONS 15310 MA SDH proxy server see Scenario 7 Figure 8 3 Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP zx CTC Workstation IP Address 192 168 1 100 72 ss Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway N A LANA ONS 15310 1 IP Address 192 168 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Static Routes N A es e SDH RING e ONS 15310 NY 15310 43 IP Address 192 168 1 20 IP Address 192 168 1 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router N A Static Routes N A Static Routes N A 271791 You can also use proxy ARP to communicate with hosts attached to the craft Ethernet ports of DCC connected nodes Figure 8 4 The node with an attached host must have a static route to the host Static routes are propagated to all DCC peers using OSPF The existing proxy ARP node is the gateway for additional hosts Each node examines its routing table for routes to hosts that are not connected to the DCC network but are wit
175. CC tunnel is configured as one dedicated path across a network and does not provide a failure recovery mechanism if the path is down An IP encapsulated tunnel is a virtual path which adds protection when traffic travels between different networks IP encapsulated tunneling has the potential to flood the DCC network with traffic which causes CTC performance to degrade The data originating from an IP tunnel can be throttled to a user specified rate which is a percentage of the total RS DCC bandwidth Each ONS 15310 MA SDH supports one IP encapsulated tunnel You can convert a traditional DCC tunnel to an IP encapsulated tunnel or an IP encapsulated tunnel to a traditional DCC tunnel Only tunnels in the Discovered status can be converted A Caution Converting from one tunnel type to the other is service affecting 1 6 Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits From the Subnetwork Connection Protection Selectors subtab in the Edit Circuits window you can perform the following View the Subnetwork Connection Protection SNCP circuit s working and protection paths Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EIN Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits amp e Edit the reversion time e Set the hold off timer HOT for linear multiplex section protection selector switching e Edit the Signal Fail SF Signal Degrade SD bit error rate BER
176. CG 2 Member 2 VCAT Function Member 1 VCG 1 Member 2 VCAT Member 1 C Member 2 271783 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Virtual Concatenated Circuits Figure 7 4 shows an example of split fiber routing Figure 7 4 VCAT Split Fiber Routing Virtually Concatenated Intermediate Group I NE gt Member 1 Pu m VCAT Ps Functi Traffic 2 NIE CU gt Intermediate Member amp 2 aj with Traffic ee Ec d NE 27 Differential l d Delay Buffer Source VCAT at NE imi intermediate Member 43 Destination VCAT at NE Table 7 5 Switch Times Type of circuit For CE100T 8 card For CE MR 6 card CCAT 60 ms 60 ms HO VCAT 60 ms 90 ms HO LCAS 90 ms 148 ms LO VCAT 202 ms 202 ms LO LCAS 202 m 256 ms SWLCAS 500 ms 1 The calculated number for HO LCAS includes all the inherent delays of the protocol Also the CE 100 T numbers are for a group size of only three members S Note The switch time values shown in Table 7 5 does not include differential delay The maximum differential delay for 100 8 is 48ms This differential delay is added to the switch time to get the maximum time 7 7 3 Link Capacity Adjustment The CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 a
177. CS PGEN 9600 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day PPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min BBE 10000 count 0 553500 CTX 2500 STMA PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min EB 10000 count 0 553500 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min OFS 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min SES 500 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day BBE 100000 0 53136000 count CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day EB 100000 0 53136000 count CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day ES 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend I day OFS 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day SES 5000 0 86400 seconds CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds rs nearend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min BBE 15 count 0 539100
178. CTC Card Colors 4 8 4 6 1 2 Node View Card Shortcuts 4 10 4 6 1 3 Node View Tabs 4 10 4 6 2 Network View 4 11 4 6 2 1 CTC Node Colors 4 12 4 6 2 2 Network View Tabs 4 12 46 2 3 DCC Links 4 13 4 6 2 4 Link Consolidation 4 13 4 6 3 Card View 4 14 4 6 4 Print and Export CTC Data 4 15 4 7 Using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 4 8 Common Control Card Reset 4 19 4 9 Traffic Card Reset 4 19 4 10 Database Backup 4 20 4 11 Software Revert 4 20 CHAPTER 5 Security 5 1 5 1 Users IDs and Security Levels 5 1 5 2 User Privileges and Policies 5 2 5 2 1 User Privileges by CTC Action 5 2 5 2 2 Security Policies 5 5 4 16 Contents MI Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Contents CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 5 2 2 1 Superuser Privileges for Provisioning Users 5 6 5 2 2 2 Idle User Timeout 5 6 5 2 2 3 User Password Login and Access Policies 5 6 5 3 Audit Trail 5 7 5 3 1 Audit Trail Log Entries 5 7 5 3 2 Audit Trail Capacities 5 8 5 4 RADIUS Security 5 8 5 4 1 RADIUS Authentication 5 8 5 4 2 Shared Secrets 5 8 Timing 6 1 6 1 Timing Parameters 6 1 6 2 Network Timing 6 2 6 3 Synchronization Status Messaging 6 2 Circuits and Tunnels 7 1 7 1 Overview 7 1 7 2 Circuit Properties 7 2 7 2 1 Circuit Status 7 3 7 2 2 Circuit States 7 4 7 2 3 Circuit Protection Types 7 5 7 2 4 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuits Window 7 6 7 3 VC 1
179. CTX 2500 STMA PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min EB 15 count 0 1800000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STMA PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STMA PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1 day BBE 150 count 0 51753600 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 S8 TMA PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day EB 125 count 0 172800000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vcelo farend I day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1 day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min BBE 15 count 0 539100 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 1800000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend I day BBE 150
180. D flashes during the boot process Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists in flashing ACT STBY LED When the ACT STBY LED is green the card is operational and ready to carry traffic When the ACT STB Y LED is amber the card is operational and G Acti si in standby protect mode Amber Standby Amber El and 053 SF Indicates a signal failure or condition such as LOS or LOF on one or more LEDs card ports 2 7 Filler Cards A If acard slot is left empty a filler card must be installed in the slot The filler card serves three functions it prevents exposure to hazardous voltages and currents inside the chassis it eliminates electromagnetic interference EMI that might disrupt other equipment and it directs the flow of cooling air through the chassis Caution A Do not operate the ONS 15310 MA SDH system unless a card is plugged into each card slot The blank card is a printed circuit board PCB with a blank faceplate and two rear connectors that plug into receptacles at the back of the slot CTC detects when a filler card is plugged in and displays it in node view Figure 2 9 shows the filler card faceplate This card is used in ONS 15310 MA SDH traffic card slots Figure 2 9 Filler Card FILLER Je 131669 Caution Do not attempt to install the FILLER card in a 15
181. D or the contextName columns are used to determine the row in the Proxy Forwarder Table that could be used for forwarding the received message e Single Target Out Refers to the Target Address Table After you select a row in the Proxy Forwarder Table for forwarding this objectis used to get the target address and the target parameters that are used for forwarding the request This object is used for requests with proxy types read or write which only requires one target 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter12 SNMP B SNMP Remote Monitoring Multiple Target Out Tag Refers to a group of entries in the Target Address Table Notifications are forwarded using this tag The Multiple Target Out tag is only relevant when proxy type is Trap and is used to send notifications to one or more NMSs 12 10 SNMP Remote Monitoring The ONS 15310 MA SDH incorporate RMON to allow network operators to monitor Ethernet card performance and events The RMON thresholds are user provisionable in CTC Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for provisioning procedures Note Typical RMON operations other than threshold provisioning are invisible to the CTC user ONS 15310 MA SDH system RMON is based on the IETF standard MIB RFC2819 and includes the following five groups from the standard MIB Ethernet Statistics History Control Ethernet History Alarm and Event
182. DH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 3 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config RetimingEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SaBit SA Bit 4 SA Bit 4 SA Bit 5 SA Bit 6 SA Bit 7 SA Bit 8 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendAIS VOnDefects FALSE FALSE TRUE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendDoNotUse FALSE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SyncMsgIn FALSE FALSE TRUE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config TreatLOFAsDefect FALSE FALSE TRUE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 9 BPV 0 1388700 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900
183. DH with Two ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Subtending Linear Multiplex Section Protection Configurations 9 4 Figure 9 5 ONS 15310 MA SDH with Two Subtending Linear Multiplex Section Protection Configurations 9 5 Figure 9 6 ONS 15310 MA SDH Ring Subtended from an ONS 15454 Ring 9 5 Figure 9 7 Linear or Linear Multiplex Section Protection Connection Between ONS 15454 and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes 9 5 Figure 9 8 Path Protected Mesh Network for ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes 9 6 Figure 9 9 Path Protected Mesh Network for ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes 9 7 Figure 9 10 Virtual Ring for ONS 15310 MA SDH 9 8 Figure 9 11 Overlay Ring Circuit 9 10 Figure 10 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Select Affected Circuits Option 10 5 Figure 10 2 Alarm Profile for a 15310 MA SDH 15310E CTX K9 Card 10 12 Figure 11 1 TCAs Displayed in CTC 11 2 Figure 11 2 Monitored Signal Types for the E1 Ports 11 14 Figure 11 3 PM Parameter Read Points on the E1 Ports 11 15 Figure 11 4 Monitored Signal Types for the Ports 11 16 Figure 11 5 PM Read Points on the Ports 11 17 Figure 11 6 Monitored Signal Types for the 053 Port 11 18 Figure 11 7 PM Read Points on the DS3 Port 11 18 Figure 11 8 Monitored Signal Types for the STM1 Port 11 25 Figure 11 9 PM Parameter Read Points on the STM1 Port 11 26 Figure 11 10 Monitored Signal Types for the STM4 Ports 11 27 Figure 11 11 PM Parameter Read Points on the STM4 Ports 11 28 Figure 11 12 Monitored Signal Types for the STM16 Ports 11 29 Figur
184. DIUS server The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS servers and then acting on the response that is returned RADIUS servers are responsible for receiving user connection requests authenticating the user and returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service to the user The RADIUS servers can act as proxy clients to other kinds of authentication servers Transactions between the RADIUS client and server are authenticated through the use of a shared secret which is never sent over the network In addition any user passwords are sent encrypted between the client and RADIUS server This prevents someone monitoring an unsecured network from determine a user s password Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide to implement RADIUS authentication 5 4 2 Shared Secrets A shared secret is a text string that serves as a password between e A RADIUS client and a RADIUS server A RADIUS client and a RADIUS proxy e A RADIUS proxy and a RADIUS server Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter5 Security RADIUS Security MI For a configuration that uses a RADIUS client a RADIUS proxy and a RADIUS server the shared secret that is used between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS proxy can be different from the shared secret used between the RADIUS proxy and the RADIUS server Shared secrets are used to Veri
185. DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day CV 125 B3 0 207360000 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 48 00 00 00 00 15 00 30 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 4 E1_63_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config LineCoding HDB3 HDB3 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config LineType 1_ 1_ E1_CRCMF UNFRAMED E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config RetimingEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 07 E 5 1 6 1 7 1E 8 1E 9 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SaBit SA Bit 4 SA Bit 4 SA Bit 5 SA Bit 6 SA Bit 7 SA Bit 8 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendAIS VOnDef
186. E SNMP Management Information Bases Table 12 3 MIB Number ONS 15310 MA SDH Proprietary MIBs continued Module Name 36 BGP4 MIB my 37 CERENT 454 MIB mib 38 CERENT ENVMON MIB mib 39 CERENT FC MIB mib 40 CERENT GENERIC MIB mib 41 CERENT GENERIC PM MIB mib 42 CERENT GLOBAL REGISTRY mib 43 CERENT HC RMON MIB mib 44 CERENT IF EXT MIB mib 45 CERENT MSDWDM MIB mib 46 CERENT OPTICAL MONITOR MIB mib 47 CERENT TC mib 48 CISCO CDP MIB my 49 CISCO CLASS BASED QOS MIB my 50 CISCO CONFIG COPY MIB my 51 CISCO CONFIG MAN MIB my 52 CISCO ENTITY ASSET MIB my 53 CISCO ENTITY EXT MIB my 54 CISCO ENTITY VENDORTYPE OID MI 55 CISCO FRAME RELAY MIB my 56 CISCO FTP CLIENT MIB my 57 CISCO HSRP EXT MIB my 58 CISCO HSRP MIB my 59 CISCO IGMP SNOOPING MIB mib 60 CISCO IMAGE MIB my 61 CISCO IP STAT MIB my 62 CISCO IPMROUTE MIB my 63 CISCO MEMORY POOL MIB my 64 CISCO OPTICAL MONITOR MIB mib 65 CISCO OPTICAL PATCH MIB mib 66 CISCO PING MIB my 67 CISCO PORT QOS MIB my 68 CISCO PROCESS MIB my 69 CISCO PRODUCTS MIB my 70 CISCO RTTMON MIB my H Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 gi Cisco ONS 15310 SD 78 19417 01 Chapter 12 SNMP SNMP Man
187. E3 DS3 3 Yes FILLER Card Yes CTX FILLER Card Yes 1 The CE 100T 8 card with product ID PID 15310 CE 100T 8 is not compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH 15310 P CE 100T 8 is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly 2 The ML 100T 8 card with PID 15310 ML 100T 8 is not compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly 15310 P ML 100T 8 is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter2 Card Reference BE 15310E CTX K9 Card 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Card The 15310E CTX K9 card for use with the ONS 15310 MA SDH is a fully nonblocking cross connect card that operates in either a simplex or duplex redundant configuration It performs system initialization provisioning alarm reporting maintenance diagnostics IP address detection resolution SDH DCC termination system fault detection and cross connect maintenance and management for the ONS 15310 MA SDH The card also provides the circuitry for the STM1 STM4 STM 16 interfaces and ensures that the system maintains timing with SETS stability Caution If system loses power or the 15310E CTX K9 card is reset you must reset the ONS 15310 MA SDH clock unless the node has been previously provisioned to use Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to update the clock over the LAN Figure 2 2 shows the 15310E CTX K9 card faceplate and block diagram
188. ECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and or its affiliates in the U S and other countries To view a list of Cisco trademarks go to this URL www cisco com go trademarks Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company 1110R Any Internet Protocol IP addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses Any examples command display output and figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and 9 2 Copyright 2008 2012 Cisco Systems Inc All rights reserved CONTENTS Preface xxi Revision History xxi Document Objectives xxii Audience xxii Related Documentation xxii Document Conventions xxiii Obtaining Optical Networking Information xxix Where to Find Safety and Warning Information xxix Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM xxix Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request xxix cHAPTER 1
189. EIAs installed A2 Card Specifications This section provides specifications for the 15310 MA SDH electrical and 15310E CTX K9 cards For compliance information refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document A 2 1 15310E CTX K9 Card The 15310E CTX K9 card is installed in Slots 3 and 4 of the ONS 15310 MA SDH only The 15310E CTX K9 has the following specifications e LAN Port Supports a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet interface for Cisco Transport Controller Transaction Language One CTC TL 1 provisioning For node access in secure mode SSL for TL1 and HTTPS for CTC security protocols are supported e CRAFT Port EIA TIA 232 craft interface is provided and is used for TL1 provisioning The craft interface is set to 9600 baud no parity and 1 stop bit by default e Nonvolatile memory 128 MB Compact Flash card e Optical ports Line Bitrate STMI 155 520 Mbps STM4 622 080 Mbps and STM16 2488 320 Mbps depending on the SFP installed Note Both optical interfaces on the card can be configured as STM1 STM4 or STMI6 Code Scrambled NRZ Fiber depends on the SFP used see the A 3 SFP Specifications section on page A 9 Loopback modes Terminal and facility Connectors LC duplex connector for each SFP Compliance ITU T G 707 ITU T G 957 e Optical ports Transmitter Maximum transmitter output power Depends on the SFP us
190. Errors Receive frames with single bit errors CHEC tHEC eHEC gfpStatsRxMBitErrors Receive frames with multibit errors CHEC tHEC eHEC gfpStatsRxTypelnvalid Receive frames with invalid type PTI EXI UPI gfpStatsRxCRCErrors Receive data frames with payload CRC errors gfpStatsRxCIDInvalid Receive frames with invalid CID gfpStatsCSFRaised Number of Rx client management frames with client signal fail indication ifInPayloadCRCErrors The number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors ifOutPayloadCRCErrors The number of transmit data frames with payload CRC errors gfpStatsRxFrame Number of received GFP frames gfpStatsTxOctets Number of GFP bytes transmitted ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their transmission A possible reason for discarding such packets could be to create buffer space Note ifOutDiscards is not supported on ML cards 11 6 1 5 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card POS Ports Utilization Window The POS Ports Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the POS ports during consecutive time segments The POS Ports Utilization window provides an Interval drop down list that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute 15 minutes 1 hour and 1 day Line utilization for POS ports is calculated with the following formulas Rx inOctets
191. FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line SendAISOnFacility Loopback TRUE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config line SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config vc4 IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT config vclo IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min BBE 5315 count 0 552600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min EB 5315 count 0 552600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STMA PORT pmthresholds ms farend 15min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day BBE 53150 count 0 53049600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day EB 53150 count 0 53049600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms farend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 5min BBE 5315 count 0 552600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 5min EB 5315 count 0 5526
192. GNE must always have unique IP addresses Figure 8 10 shows an ONS 15310 MA SDH proxy server implementation A GNE is connected to a central office LAN and to ENEs The central office LAN is connected to a NOC LAN which has CTC computers The NOC CTC computer and craft technicians must both be able to access the ENEs However the craft technicians must be prevented from accessing or seeing the NOC or central office LANs Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity Figure 8 10 IP Addressing Scenarios In the example the GNE is assigned an IP address within the central office LAN and is physically connected to the LAN through its LAN port ENEs are assigned IP addresses that are outside the central office LAN and given private network IP addresses If the ENEs are collocated the LAN ports could be connected to a hub However the hub should have no other network connections ONS 15310 MA SDH Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet ONS 15310 MA SDH Local CTC station ENE IP 10 10 10 10 ONS 15310 MA SDH SDH gt IP 192 168 ONS 15310 MA SDH NOC CTC Ej station NOCLAN 97 1 1 x Interface 0 0 97 1 1 1 Interface 0 1 20 0 24 86 1 1 1 Central Office LAN Interface 0 0 Interface 0 1 86 1 1 3 192 168 20 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH GNE 1
193. H with two subtending rings Linear Multiplex Section Protection configurations Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Interoperability MI Figure 9 5 ONS 15310 MA SDH with Two Subtending Linear Multiplex Section Protection Configurations ONS 15310 15310 SDH SDH 271785 eg 15454 Figure 9 6 shows a ring of ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes subtended from a ring of ONS 15454 nodes Figure 9 6 ONS 15310 MA SDH Ring Subtended from an ONS 15454 Ring ts 15454 BLSR ONS 15310 MA SDH oth STM4 or STM ONS 15454 ONS 15454 i ONS 15454 ONS 15310 MA SDH 271786 e C 9 32 Linear Connections Figure 9 7 shows a basic linear or Linear Multiplex Section Protection connection between ONS 15454 nodes Figure 9 7 Linear or Linear Multiplex Section Protection Connection Between ONS 15454 and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes 1 1 Linear Point to Point ONS 15454 ONS 15310 MA SDH bd 271787 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Era Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Path Protected Mesh Networks 9 4 Path Protected Mesh Networks In addition to single Linear Multiplex Section Protection LMSP configurations terminal point to point or linear ADMs you can extend ONS 15310 MA SDH traffic protection by creating path protected mesh networks PPMNs PPMNs incl
194. JC Pgen HP EB RS SES MS SES HP NPJC Pgen HP ES RS UAS MS UAS HP PJCS Pdet HP ESR HP PJCS Pgen HP SES HP PJCDiff HP SESR HP UAS 1 For information about troubleshooting subnetwork connection protection SNCP switch counts refer to the Alarm Troubleshooting chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide For information about creating circuits that perform a switch refer to Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels 2 MS SPRing is not supported on the STM 1 card and STM 1E card therefore the MS PSD W MS PSD S and MS PSD R PM parameters do not increment 3 In CTC the count fields for the HP PPJC and HP NPJC PM parameters appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the Provisioning Line tab See the 11 3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring section m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports MI 4 Far end high order VC4 and VC4 Xc path PM parameters applies only to the STM1 4 card Also MRC 12 and OC192 STM64 XFP based cards support far end path PM parameters All other optical cards do not support far end path PM parameters 5 SDH path PM parameters do not increment unless IPPM is enabled See the 11 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring section S Note For information about troubleshooting Linear Multiplex Section Protection switch counts refer
195. K9 Card 2 2 1 System Cross Connect The 15310E CTX K9 card provides e 2016 VCI2 ports That is 1008 VC 12 Cross connections 1008X1008 e 96 VC3 ports That is 48 VC 3 Cross Connections 48X48 128 VC4 ports That is 64 VC 4 Cross Connections 64X64 2 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Side Switches The 15310E CTX K9 supports errorless side switches less than a 50 ms impact to any traffic when the switch is initiated through software through either a soft reset or a software upgrade where there is no FPGA or firmware upgrade A side switch means switching from a 15310E CTX K9 on one side of the shelf to the redundant 15310E CTX K9 on the other side of the shelf 2 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Optical Interfaces amp There are two PPM SFP slots on the 15310E CTX K9 faceplate to provide optical interfaces PPM is the graphical user interface term for SFP Each slot can contain a one port PPM Cisco qualified PPMs can be single rate STM1 STM4 or STM16 or multirate STM1 STM4 Single rate PPMs are autoprovisioned when they are installed but multirate PPMs must be provisioned This behavior can be controlled by NE defaults Note Q To provision edit or delete PPM ports refer to the Change Port Settings chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide For more information about PPM SFP hardware see the 2 8 SFP Modules section on page 2 19 Note CTX 2500 only supports STM1 E Electrical SFP 2 2 4 15310E
196. LI Reference Guide Remote Refers to a connection made to the ONS 15310 MA SDH using a modem A modem must be connected to the ONS 15310 MA SDH The modem must be provisioned for the ONS 15310 MA SDH To run CTC the modem must be provisioned for Ethernet access 4 5 CTC Login After you have installed CTC you can log in to a node using your browser To log in you must type the node IP address in the URL window The CTC Login window appears The CTC Login window provides the following options to accelerate the login process e The Disable Network Discovery option omits the discovery of nodes with data communications channel DCC connectivity To access all nodes with DCC connectivity make sure that Disable Network Discovery is not checked If you have network discovery disabled CTC will not poll the m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window W network for more recent versions of the software For more information about the automatic download of the latest CTC JAR files see the 4 1 2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation section on page 4 2 The Disable Circuit Management option omits the discovery of circuits To view circuits immediately after logging in make sure that Disable Circuit Management is not checked However if disabled after you have logged in you can click
197. M network view description 4 11 link consolidation 4 13 node status icon colors 4 12 tabs list 4 12 user permissions per tab 5 4 NIOS parameter definition 11 10 nodes displaying associated alarm profiles 10 11 installing multiple ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 5 installing one ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 4 linking 9 8 NE defaults ONS 15310 MA 29 node view description 4 8 card colors 4 8 card status 4 10 popup information 4 10 tabs list 4 10 user permissions per tab 5 2 NPJC PDET parameter 11 3 NPJC PGEN parameter 11 3 NSAP fields 8 25 OC 12 ports line rate and connector type ONS 15310 MA 1 27 performance monitoring 11 27 11 29 timing 6 1 OC 3 ports line rate and connector type ONS 15310 MA 1 27 performance monitoring 11 25 timing 6 1 OC 48 ports line rate and connector type ONS 15310 MA 1 27 open GNE 8 20 Open Shortest Path First See OSPF OPR AVG parameter definition 11 10 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Index OPR MAX parameter definition 11 10 OPR MIN parameter definition 11 10 OPR parameter definition 11 10 OPT AVG parameter definition 11 10 OPT MAX parameter definition 11 10 OPT MIN parameter definition 11 10 OPT parameter definition 11 10 orderwire description 1 24 loop 1 25 pin assignments 1 25 OSI CLNP 8 24 CLNS 8 24 IP over CLNS tunnels See IP over CLNS tunnels IS IS protocol 8 28 LAP D protocol 8 24 NSA
198. MA 1 23 fan speed 1 24 fan tray assembly 1 23 far end block error See FEBE FC PM parameter definition 11 5 FC SM parameter definition 11 5 FEBE 11 4 fiber description ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 10 installing ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 13 fiber optic bus linking nodes 9 8 filler card CTX2500 slot 2 3 description 2 18 illustration 2 18 release compatibility 2 3 specifications A 9 traffic slot 2 3 filtering 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Index alarms 10 4 circuits 7 3 conditions 10 7 finding alarm affected circuits 10 4 firewalls external 8 18 SNMP proxy support 12 13 tunnels 8 20 Force switch See external switching commands front door 1 6 front panel ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 1 G gateway and Proxy 8 2 default 8 3 8 6 on routing table 8 16 Proxy ARP enabled 8 4 returning MAC address 8 4 gateway network element See GNE GNE definition 8 12 open 8 20 settings 8 13 tunnels 8 11 go and return path protection routing 7 10 GRE tunnel 4 16 grounding ONS 15310 MA SDH _ 1 7 to 1 10 ground strap 1 7 hard reset 4 19 high order path background block error 11 5 background block error ratio 11 5 errored block 11 6 errored second 11 6 errored second ratio 11 6 severely errored second ratio 11 6 severely errored seconds 11 6 unavailable seconds 11 6 hop 8 8 HP BBE parameter definition 11 5 HP BBER parameter definition 11 5 HP EB parame
199. Monitoring S Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports MI 4 Far end high order VC4 and VC4 Xc path PM parameters applies only to the STM1 4 card Also MRC 12 and OC192 STM64 XFP based cards support far end path PM parameters All other optical cards do not support far end path PM parameters 5 SDH path PM parameters do not increment unless IPPM is enabled See the 11 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring section Note For information about troubleshooting Linear Multiplex Section Protection switch counts refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide For information about creating circuits that perform a switch refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 11 7 3 STM16 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters for ONS 15310 MA SDH Figure 11 12 shows the signal types that support near end far end PM parameters Figure 11 13 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the STM16 ports Figure 11 12 Monitored Signal Types for the STM16 Ports PTE ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH PTE SD 506 sign EE 57 STM16 sona STM16 STM N STM N STM16 271812 VC Path VC XX P and VT Path PMs Near and Far End Supported Note PM parameters on the protect VC high order path are not supported for MS SPRing The XX in Figure 11 12 represents all PM parameters listed in Figure 11 13 with the given prefix and or suffix 78 19
200. NEN PER SCL Fcc2 Protect Y Control Engine MPC8555E 256MB DDR1 SDRAM 5 6 128MB FLASH 8KB NVRAM m R 3 1 2 3 4 5 sI O Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference ML 100T 8 Card 2 4 1 CE MR 6 Card Level Indicators The CE MR 6 card faceplate has two card level LED indicators described in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 CE MR 6 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the CE MR 6 card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED blinks until the software deems the card operational then it turns off ACT STBY LED The ACT STBY LED provides the operational status of the CE MR 6 When Green the ACT STB Y LED is green it indicates that the CE MR 6 card is active and the software is operational otherwise it is off 2 4 2 CE MR 6 Port Level Indicators The CE MR 6 card has an LED for each of the six ports described in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 CE MR 6 Port Level Indicators Port Level Indicators Description Off No link exists to the Ethernet port Steady amber A link exists to the Ethernet port but traffic flow is inhibited For example a lack of circuit setup an error on the line or a disabled port might inhibit traffic flow Solid green A link exists to the Ethernet port
201. NMP SNMP Management Information Bases Table 12 1 SNMP Message Types Operation Description get request Retrieves a value from a specific variable get next request Retrieves the value following the named variable this operation is often used to retrieve variables from within a table With this operation an SNMP manager does not need to know the exact variable name The SNMP manager searches sequentially to find the needed variable from within the MIB get response Replies to a get request get next request get bulk request or set request sent by an NMS get bulk request Fills the get response with up to the max repetition number of get next interactions similar to a get next request set request Provides remote network monitoring RMON MIB trap Indicates that an event has occurred An unsolicited message is sent by an SNMP agent to an SNMP manager 12 5 SNMP Management Information Bases A managed object sometimes called a MIB object is one of many specific characteristics of a managed device The MIB consists of hierarchically organized object instances variables that are accessed by network management protocols such as SNMP 12 5 1 IETF Standard MIBs for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Table 12 2 lists the IETF standard MIBs implemented in the ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMP agent You must first compile the MIBs inTable 12 2 Compile the MIBS in Table 12 3 next A Caution I
202. NS 15310 MA SDH nodes In a span optical speed upgrade the transmission rate of a span is upgraded from an STM1 to STM4 signal ONS 15310 SDH from an STM4 to STM 16 signal ONS 15310 MA SDH only or from an STM1 to STM 16 signal ONS 15310 MA SDH only but all other span configuration attributes remain unchanged With multiple nodes a span upgrade is a coordinated series of upgrades on all nodes in the ring or protection group The ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes support the span upgrade wizard if you are upgrading two ONS 15310 MAs with 1 1 protection from STMI to STM4 STM4 to STM16 or STM1 to STM 16 To perform a span upgrade the higher rate pluggable port module PPM must replace the lower rate PPM in the same slot If you are using a multi rate PPM you do not need to physically replace the PPM All spans in the network must be upgraded The 1 1 protection configuration of the original lower rate PPM is retained for the higher rate PPM When performing span upgrades Cisco recommends that you upgrade all spans in a network consecutively and in the same maintenance window Until all spans are upgraded mismatched PPM types will be present If you are upgrading two ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes with 1 1 protection from STM1 to STM4 STM4 to STM16 or STM1 to STM16 Cisco recommends using the Span Upgrade Wizard to perform span upgrades Although you can also use the manual span upgrade procedures the manual procedures are Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH
203. ODE general BackupNtpSntpServer 0 0 0 0 IP Address NODE general DefaultsDescription Factory Free form field Defaults NODE general InsertAIS VOnSDP FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE general NtpSntpServer 0 0 0 0 IP Address NODE general RaiseConditionOnEmpty Slot FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE general ReportLoopbackConditionsOnOOS MTPorts FALSE FALSE TRUE NODE general SDPBER 1 00E 06 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 NODE general TimeZone GMT 08 00 For applicable Pacific time zones see Time US amp Table C 4 on Canada page C 21 Tijuana NODE general UseDST TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE network general AlarmMissingBackplaneLAN FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE network general CtcIpDisplaySuppression FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE network general GatewaySettings None None ENE GNE ProxyOnlyNode NODE osi greTunnel OspfCost 110 110 65535 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE osi greTunnel SubnetMask 24 bits 8 9 10 32 NODE osi lapd MTU 512 512 513 514 1500 NODE osi lapd Mode AITS AITS UITS NODE osi lapd Role Network Network User NODE osi lapd T200 200 ms 200 300 400 20000 NODE osi l
204. ORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 387 BPV 0 29700 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend I day CV 3865 BPV 0 2851200 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1 day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day LOSS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Re
205. ORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 4 E1_63_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 00 00 00 15 00 30 hours mins 48 00 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 E 9 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1 5 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SendAISOnFacility Loopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config SendAIS OnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT config State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 P
206. Original leg New leg Node 2 G 83267 In Figure 7 8 you can select any available VC high order path on Node 2 for a new destination Figure 7 8 Single Destination Roll Node 1 Original leg New leg Figure 7 9 shows one circuit rolling onto another circuit at the destination The new circuit has cross connects on Node 1 Node 3 and Node 4 CTC deletes the cross connect on Node 2 after the roll Figure 7 9 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit Destination Changes I Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 1 Node4 Original leg 5 New leg Figure 7 10 shows one circuit rolling onto another circuit at the source 78703 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Bridge and Roll W Figure 7 10 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit Source Changes 5 Node 1 Node 2 e 4 Node3 1 Node 4 Original leg I New leg 134274 Note Create a Roll To Circuit before rolling a circuit with the source Node 3 and the destination on Node 4 A dual roll involves two cross connects It allows you to reroute intermediate segments of a circuit but keep the original source and destination If the new segments require new cross connects use the Bridge
207. P fields 8 25 overview 8 22 point to point protocol 8 23 protocol list 8 23 provisioning in 8 39 routing 8 27 TARP See TARP virtual routers 8 32 OSPF alternative to static routes 8 7 definition 8 9 Out of Group member 7 11 password 5 6 path background block error 11 10 11 12 errored block 11 10 11 12 errored second ratio 11 11 11 12 severely errored second ratio 11 11 11 12 path protection configurations bandwidth 9 2 description 9 1 example 9 2 go and return routing 7 10 interoperability with an ONS 15454 9 5 open ended circuits 7 10 path trace 7 17 PC connection methods 4 5 CTC requirements 4 4 software installation 4 2 PCM 1 24 PDU See TARP performance monitoring bit errors corrected parameter 11 4 DS 1 parameters 11 14 DS3 port 11 17 port 11 16 Ethernet cards 11 19 Ethernet port history 11 22 Ethernet port statistics 11 19 Ethernet port utilization 11 22 IPPM 11 3 OC 12 parameters 11 27 11 29 OC 3 parameters 11 25 POS port history 11 25 POS port statistics 11 22 POS ports utilization 11 24 thresholds 11 1 ping 8 2 pluggable equipment service state transitions 13 pointer justification counts 11 3 point to point See linear ADM popup data 4 10 ports 8 18 port state colors 7 7 power specifications 4 A 13 power supply ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 7 to 1 10 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 PPJC PDET parameter 11
208. PORT config LineLength 0 225 ft 0 225 ft 226 450 ft E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config LineType M13 UNFRAMED M13 C BIT E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 05 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SFBER 1 00E 03 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 4 E1_63_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min CV 382 BIP 0 38700 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min SAS 2 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1 day CV 3820 0 3715200 c
209. RP with Static Routing 8 6 Figure 8 5 Scenario 4 Default Gateway on Computer 8 7 Figure 8 6 Scenario 5 Static Route with One CTC Computer Used as a Destination 8 8 Figure 8 7 Scenario 5 Static Route with Multiple LAN Destinations 8 9 Figure 8 8 Scenario 6 OSPF Enabled 8 10 Figure 8 9 Scenario 6 OSPF Not Enabled 8 11 Figure 8 10 ONS 15310 MA SDH Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet 8 13 Figure 8 11 Scenario 7 Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets 8 14 Figure 8 12 Scenario 7 Proxy Server with ENEs on Multiple Rings 8 15 Figure 8 13 Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations 8 21 Figure 8 14 Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port 8 22 Figure 8 15 ISO DCC NSAP Address 8 26 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Figures MI Figure 8 16 Level 1 and Level 2 OSI Routing 8 28 Figure 8 17 Manual TARP Adjacencies 8 32 Figure 8 18 IP over CLNS Tunnel Flow 8 33 Figure 8 19 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1 ONS NE to Other Vender GNE 8 35 Figure 8 20 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2 ONS Node to Router 8 37 Figure 8 21 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3 ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN 8 38 Figure 8 22 IPV6 IPv4 Interaction 8 40 Figure 9 1 Basic Four Node SNCP Ring 9 2 Figure 9 2 Subnetwork Connection Protection with a Fiber Break 9 3 Figure 9 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Linear ADM Configuration 9 4 Figure 9 4 ONS 15454 S
210. Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels vc 12 Bandwidth Right click a node port or span on the detailed circuit map to initiate certain circuit actions Right click a unidirectional circuit destination node to add a drop to the circuit Right click a port containing a path trace capable card to initiate the path trace Right click a linear multiplex section protection span to change the state of the path selectors in the linear multiplex section protection circuit 1 3 VC 12 Bandwidth The 15310E CTX K9 in the ONS 15310 SDH performs port to port time division multiplexing TDM VC low order path matrix for the 15310E CTX K9 has 96 logical VC high order path ports All VC 12 multiplexing is achieved through these logical VC high order path ports Although the 15310 9 can support up to 2016 VC 12 cross connects and 1344 bidirectional VC low order path circuits the maximum number of VC12s that can be provisioned for Software Release 9 1 and 9 2 is 2016 VC 12 low order path cross connects and 1008 bidirectional VC12 low order path circuits To view VC low order path matrix resource usage use the Maintenance Cross connect Resource Usage subtabs 7 4 VC Low order Path Tunnels and Aggregation Points To maximize VC 12 cross connect resources you can tunnel VC 12 circuits through ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes VC 12 tunnels do not use VC low order path matrix capacity at pass through nod
211. Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter 3 Card Protection ONS 15310 MA SDH Card and Port Protection The configuration of the backplane connectors creates two sets of paired adjacent expansion slots for electrical cards Slots 1 and 2 are a pair and Slots 5 and 6 are a pair When two electrical cards are plugged into either of the card slot pairs the ONS 15310 MA SDH automatically creates a 1 1 protection group for the two cards if possible If a protection group cannot be created see the rules for protection group creation later in this section one of the cards will be marked as UNKNOWN with the state as MISMATCH in CTC because the ONS 15310 MA SDH cannot support two unprotected electrical cards in the 1 2 or 5 6 card slot pairs The 1 1 automatic protection group is created when the second electrical card in a pair is either plugged in or is preprovisioned Unprotected is the default state for the first electrical card plugged into or preprovisioned in either the Slot 1 to 2 or Slot 5 to 6 card slot pairs When the second card is plugged in or preprovisioned the protection group is created if possible When protection groups are created the following rules must be noted 1 The protection group will be automatically created if possible If the node cannot create the protection group automatically then the second card to be plugged in or preprovisioned will be shown as UNKNOWN with the state as MISMATCH in CTC 2 If
212. Row Creation in historyControlTable 12 16 12 10 2 3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 12 16 2 3 2 4 F 2 12 10 2 4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table 12 16 12 10 3 Ethernet History RMON Group 12 16 12 10 3 1 64 Bit etherHistoryHighCapacityTable 12 16 12 10 4 Alarm RMON Group 12 17 12 10 4 1 Alarm Table 12 17 12 10 4 2 Row Creation in alarmTable 12 17 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 mm 78 19417 01 12 10 4 3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 12 18 12 10 4 4 Row Deletion in alarmTable 12 19 12 10 5 Event RMON Group 12 19 12 10 5 1 Event Table 12 19 12 10 5 2 Log Table 12 19 APPENDIX A Specifications A 1 A 2 A 3 4 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Specifications 1 A 1 1 Alarm Interface A 1 1 2 UDC Interface 2 1 3 Cisco Transport Controller LAN Interface A 2 1 4 TL1 Craft Interface 2 1 5 Configurations 2 1 6 LEDs A 3 1 7 Push Buttons 3 1 8 BITS Interface A 3 1 9 System Timing 3 1 10 Power Specifications 4 1 11 Environmental Specifications A 4 1 12 Fan Tray Assembly Specifications 4 1 13 Shelf Dimensions 4 ge qe pe qe qe me qe pe e ge gt Card Specifications A 5 A 2 1 15310E CTX K9 Card 5 A 2 2 Nonvolatile Memory 6 A 2 3 CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 Cards 6 A 2 4 CE MR 6 Card 7 A 2 5 E1 21 053 3andE1 63 053 3Cards 7 A 2 6 Filler Cards 9 SFP Specifications
213. S chapter in the Cisco IOS Apollo Domain Banyon VINES DECnet ISO CLNS and XNS Configuration Guide 8 6 7 2 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1 ONS Node to Other Vendor GNE Figure 8 19 shows an IP over CLNS tunnel created from an ONS node to another vendor GNE The other vendor NE has an IP connection to an IP DCN to which a CTC computer is attached An OSI only LAP D RS DCC and a GRE tunnel are created between the ONS NE 1 to the other vender GNE IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning on the ONS NE 1 Destination 10 10 10 100 CTC 1 e Mask 255 255 255 255 for host route CTC 1 only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet route all CTC computers residing on the 10 10 10 0 subnet e NSAP 39 840 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 00 other vendor GNE Metric 110 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 xs 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking Tunnel Type GRE IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning on the other vender GNE Destination 10 20 30 30 ONS NE 1 e Mask 255 255 255 255 for host route ONS NE I only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet route all ONS nodes residing on the 10 30 30 0 subnet e NSAP 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 ONS NE 1 Metric 110 Tunnel Type GRE Figure 8 19 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1 ONS NE to Other Vender GNE J CTC 1 10 10 10 100 24 0 0 Router 2 Inter
214. S 15310 MA SDH Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway Entry 3 shows the following e Destination 172 20 214 92 is the destination host IP address e Mask 255 255 255 255 is a 32 bit mask meaning only the 172 20 214 92 address is a destination e Gateway 127 0 0 1 is a loopback address The host directs network traffic to itself using this address Interface 100 indicates that the local loopback interface is used to reach the gateway Entry 4 shows the following Destination 172 20 214 93 is the destination host IP address e Mask 255 255 255 255 is a 32 bit mask meaning only the 172 20 214 93 address is a destination e Gateway 0 0 0 0 means the destination host is directly attached to the node Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EX Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity External Firewalls Interface 0 indicates that an SDH RS DCC interface is used to reach the destination host Entry 5 shows a DCC connected node that is accessible through a node that is not directly connected Destination 172 20 214 94 is the destination host IP address e Mask 255 255 255 255 is a 32 bit mask meaning only the 172 20 214 94 address is a destination Gateway 172 20 214 93 indicates that the destination host is accessed through a node with IP address 172 20 214 93 e Interface pdccO indicates that an SDH RS DCC interface is used
215. S 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits 15 1 Traditional DCC Tunnels In traditional DCC tunnels you can use the three available channels of the MS DCC and or the single channel of the RS DCC when not used for ONS 15310 MA SDH DCC terminations to tunnel third party SDH equipment across ONS networks A DCC tunnel endpoint is defined by slot port and DCC channel You can connect any of the four available channels to any other available channel To create a DCC tunnel you connect the tunnel endpoints from one ONS 15310 MA SDH optical port to another Table 7 4 shows the DCC tunnels that you can create Table 7 4 DCC Tunnels DCC SDH Layer SDH Bytes STM1 STM4 DCC1 Section D1 to D3 Yes DCC2 Line D4 to D6 Yes DCC3 Line D7 to D9 Yes DCC4 Line D10 to D12 Yes When you create DCC tunnels keep the following guidelines in mind e An optical port used for a DCC termination cannot be used as a DCC tunnel endpoint and an optical port that is used as a DCC tunnel endpoint cannot be used as a DCC termination e All DCC tunnel connections are bidirectional 7 5 2 IP Encapsulated Tunnels An IP encapsulated tunnel puts an RS DCC in an IP packet at a source node and dynamically routes the packet to a destination node To compare traditional DCC tunnels with IP encapsulated tunnels a traditional D
216. S 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix B Administrative and Service States Administrative States Table B 2 Secondary State ONS 15310 MA SDH Secondary States Definition Automatic In Service Automatic In Service The entity is delayed before transitioning to the unlocked enabled service state The transition to unlocked enabled depends on correction of conditions or on a soak timer Alarm reporting is suppressed but traffic is carried Raised fault conditions whether or not their alarms are reported can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV COND command disabled Disabled The entity was manually removed from service and does not provide its provisioned functions All services are disrupted the entity is unable to carry traffic FLT Fault The entity has a raised alarm or condition loopback Loopback The entity is in loopback mode mismatchofEquip ment Mismatched Equipment An improper card is installed For example an installed card is not compatible with the card preprovisioning or the slot This SST applies only to cards maintenance Maintenance The entity has been manually removed from service for a maintenance activity but still performs its provisioned functions Alarm reporting is suppressed but traffic is carried Raised fault conditions whether or not their alarms are reported can be retrieved on the C
217. SDH PTE STM1 Signal STM1Signal 7 STM1Signal i gt lt CEE Fiber STM1 STM N STM N STM1 E VC Path VC XX P PMs Near and Far End Supported gt 271807 Figure 11 9 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the STM1 port 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports Cross Connect STM N M Figure 11 9 PM Parameter Read Points on the STM1 Port ONS 15310 MA SDH Pointer Processors RS EB RS ES BTC RS SES ASIC 38 MS EB VC CV P VC ES P MS ES VC HN VC SES P Ms uns gt VCUAS P Path E Level PPJC Pdet VO CV FFE VC ES PFE NPJC Pdet PPJC P E EE IBI VC SES PFE 9 VC UAS PFE J PJC DIFF P PJCS PDET P PMs read on BTC ASIC k PJCS PGEN P PMs read on PMC SS 271808 The PM parameters for the STM1 ports are listed in Table 11 11 The listed parameters are defined in Table 11 2 on page 11 4 N Note The parameters listed below are applicable for STM1 optical and Electrical SFPs Table 11 11 STM Port PM Parameters MS NE FE 1 1 VC4 and VC4 Xc HP RS NE MS NE FE LMSP PJC Path NE FE4 RS BBE MS BBE MS PSC 1 1 HP PPJC Pdet HP BBE RS EB MS EB MS PSD HP NPJC Pdet HP BBER RS ES MS ES HP PP
218. SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 P
219. SESR P Receive Path Severely Errored Second Ratio SESR P is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval Rx UAS P Receive Path Unavailable Seconds UAS P is a count of one second intervals when the E 1 path is unavailable on the signal receive end The E 1 path is unavailable when ten consecutive SESs occur The ten SESs are included in unavailable time After the E 1 path becomes unavailable it becomes available when ten consecutive seconds occur with no SESs The ten seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time Rx BBER P Receive Path Background Block Error Ratio BBER P is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs SASCP P SEF AIS Second SASCP P is a count of one second intervals containing one or more near end SEF AIS defects SASP P SEF AIS Seconds Path SASP P is a count of one second intervals containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the path SES Severely Errored Seconds SES is a one second period containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES SESCP P Severely Errored Seconds CP bit Path SESCP P is a count of seconds containing more than 44 CP bit parity errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects SESCP PFE Severely Errored Seconds CP bit Path F
220. SMF 21 km 13 05 miles ONS SE 155 1470 through 1470 nm through 9 micron SMF 120 km 74 56 miles ONS SE 155 1610 CWDM 1610 nm according to the wavelength indicated in the SFP s product ID ONS SE 622 1470 through 1470 nm through 9 micron SMF 100 km 62 14 miles ONS SE 622 1610 CWDM 1610 nm according to the wavelength indicated in the SFP s product ID ONS SI 2G I1 1310 nm 9 micron SMF 15 km 9 3 miles ONS SI 2G L1 1310 nm 9 micron SMF 40 km 25 80 miles ONS SI 2G L2 1550 nm 9 micron SMF 80 km 49 71 miles 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m AppendixA Specifications Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications Table A 4 Single Mode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications continued SFP Product ID Wavelength Fiber Type Cable Distance ONS SI 2G S1 1310 nm 9 micron SMF 2 km 1 2 miles ONS SC 2G 28 7 through 1528 77 nm 9 micron SMF ONS SC 2G 60 6 DWDM through When using ONS SC 2G xx x on 1560 60 nm CTX 2500 the according to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA operating 2 temperature specification is limited SP t 2 to 5 to 55 degrees Celsius 23 to s produet 131 degrees Fahrenheit 1 Typical loss on a 1310 nm wavelength SMF is 0 6 dB km 2 ONS SC 2G 28 7 ONS SC 2G 33 4 ONS SC 2G 41 3 ONS SC 2G 49 3 and ONS SC 2G 57 3 are supported from Release 8 5 and later 3 ONS SC
221. System System identifier ONS 15310 MA SDH system identifier is set to its IEEE 802 3 MAC address SEL Selector The selector field directs the protocol data units PDUs to the correct destination using the CLNP network layer service Selector values supported by the ONS 15310 MA SDH include e 00 Network Entity Title NET Used to exchange PDUs in the ES IS and IS IS routing exchange protocols See the 8 6 4 1 End System to Intermediate System Protocol section on page 8 28 and the 8 6 4 2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol section on page 8 28 e 1D Selector for Transport Class 4 and for FTAM and TL1 applications e AF Selector for the TARP protocol e 2F Selector for the GRE IP over CLNS tunnel ITU RFC standard e CC Selector for the Cisco IP over CLNS tunnels Cisco specific e E0 Selector for the OSI ping application Cisco specific NSELs are only advertised when the node is configured as an ES They are not advertised when a node is configured as an IS Tunnel NSELs are not advertised until a tunnel is created Figure 8 15 shows the default ISO DCC NSAP address delivered with the ONS 15310 MA SDH The System ID is automatically populated with the node s MAC address Figure 8 15 ISO DCC NSAP Address Initial Domain Identifier Authority and DSP Format Format Routing NSAP Identifier Identifier Domain Selector AH IDI DFI ORG Reserved RD Area System ID SEL
222. TC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV COND command outOfGroup Out of Group The virtual concatenated VCAT member cross connect is not used to carry VCAT group traffic This state is used to put a member circuit out of the group and to stop sending traffic locked enabled outOfGroup only applies to the cross connects on an end node where VCAT resides The cross connects on intermediate nodes are in the locked enabled maintenance service state softwareDownload Software Download The card is involved in a software and database download This SST applies only to cards unassigned Unassigned The card is not provisioned in the database This SST applies only to cards notInstalled Unequipped The card is not physically present that is an empty slot This SST applies only to cards B 2 Administrative States Administrative states are used to manage service states Administrative states consist of a Administrative State and an SST Table B 3 lists the administrative states supported by the ONS 15310 MA SDH See Table B 2 on page B 2 for SST definitions Note A change in the administrative state of an entity does not change the service state of supporting or supported entities m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States Table B 3 Administrative State PST SST ONS 15310 MA SDH Administ
223. TM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min EB 15 count 0 13305600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1 5min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day EB 125 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1 day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min PJCS PGEN 100
224. U arrives TARP checks its LDB for the NET address of the PDU originator match If no match is found TARP processes the PDU and assigns a tar por tar seq sequence entry for the PDU to the LDB If the tar seq is zero a timer associated with the LDB entry is started using the provisionable LDB entry timer on the node view OSI TARP Config tab If a match exists the tar seq is compared to the LDB entry If the tar seq is not zero and is less than or equal to the LDB entry the PDU is discarded If the tar seq is greater than the LDB entry the PDU is processed and the tar seq field in the LDB entry is updated with the new value The Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH LDB holds approximately 500 entries The LDB is flushed periodically based on the time set in the LDB Flush timer on the node view OSI TARP Config tabs Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking 8 6 5 3 Manual TARP Adjacencies TARP adjacencies can be manually provisioned in networks where ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes must communicate across routers or non SDH NEs that lack TARP capability In CTC manual TARP adjacencies are provisioned on the node view Provisioning OSI TARP MAT Manual Area Table subtab The manual adjacency causes a TARP request to hop through the general router or non SDH NE as shown in Figure 8 17 Figure 8 17 Manual TARP Adjacencie
225. VC 2 1 n Example VC 2 6 E1 VC low order path Syntax VT1 lt Slot gt lt VC gt VT Group gt lt VT gt Ranges VT1 2 1 n 1 7 1 3 Example VT1 2 6 1 1 DS3 E3 VC high order path Syntax VC lt Slot gt lt Port gt lt VC gt Ranges VC 2 1 3 1 Example 2 1 6 DS3 E3 VC low order path VC low order path not supported 1 The maximum number of VC high order paths depends on the rate and size of the VC 10 2 1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node s Time Zone By default alarms and conditions are displayed with the time stamp of the CTC workstation where you are viewing them But you can set the node to report alarms and conditions using the time zone where the node is located by clicking Edit gt Preferences and clicking the Display Events Using Each Node s Timezone check box 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management viewing Alarms 10 2 2 Controlling Alarm Display You can control the display of the alarms shown in the Alarms window Table 10 4 shows the actions you can perform in the Alarms window Table 10 4 Alarm Display Button Check box Tool Action Filter button Allows you to change the display in the Alarms window to show only alarms that meet a certain severity level occur in a specified time frame and or reflect specific conditions For example you can set th
226. Virtual wire entities You can provision an alarm that is input to a virtual wire to trigger an external control output information about provisioning alarms for external devices refer to the Chapter Manage alarms Section Provision External Alarms and Controls in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 10 14 78 19417 01 amp Performance Monitoring Note amp The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration Performance monitoring PM parameters are used by service providers to gather store threshold and report performance data for early detection of problems In this chapter PM parameters and concepts are defined for electrical cards Ethernet cards and optical cards in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH For information about enabling and viewing PM parameters refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 11 1 Threshold Performance Monitoring
227. a VCAT cross connect Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual 78 19417 01 Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix B Administrative and Service States HZ Service State Transitions Table B 5 Transitions continued Action ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State Current Service State locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT Alarm condition is cleared locked disabled Automatic In Service Put the port or cross connect in the unlocked administrative state locked disabled FLT Put the port or cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled Put the port or cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfGroup administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is cleared locked disabled Automatic In Service or locked enabled maintenance In Group member is unlocked enabled or locked disabled Automatic In Service the member transitions to locked disabled Automatic In Service In Group member is locked enabled maintenanc e the member transitions to locked enabled maintenanc e Put the VCAT cross connect in locked disabled FLT the
228. a count of received packets containing idle ordered sets IPC A count of received packets that contain errored data code groups that have start and end delimiters LBC MIN LBC MIN is the minimum percentage of Laser Bias Current LBC AVG Laser Bias Current Average LBC AVG is the average percentage of laser bias current LBC MAX Laser Bias Current Maximum LBC MA X is the maximum percentage of laser bias current LBC MIN Laser Bias Current Minimum LBC MIN is the minimum percentage of laser bias current LOSS L Line Loss of Signal Seconds LOSS L is a count of one second intervals containing one or more LOS defects LP BBE Low Order Path Background Block Error LP BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES LP BBER Low Order Path Background Block Error Ratio LP BBER is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs LP EB Low Order Path Errored Block LP EB indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block LP ES Low Order Path Errored Second LP ES is a one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect LP ESR Low Order Path Errored Second Ratio LP ESR is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval LP SES Low Order Path Severely Errored Seconds LP SES is a one second period containing greater than or equal to 30 percent
229. able Switch Times in the chapter Circuits and Tunnels e Changed the CTX2500 card name to 15310E CTX K9 through out the document December 2010 e Updated the section CE MR 6 Card in the chapter Card Reference Updated the table ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Node View in the chapter Security January 2011 Updated the sections CE 100T 8 Card and CE MR 6 Card in the chapter Card Reference July 2011 Added a note in the PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements section of Chapter Cisco Transport Controller Operation March 2012 Updated the section 15310E CTX K9 Card in the appendix Specifications August 2012 The full length book PDF was generated Document Objectives The Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual provides hardware and software reference information for Cisco ONS 15310 nodes and networks Use this manual in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the Related Documentation section Audience To use this publication you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware and cabling telecommunications hardware and cabling electronic circuitry and wiring practices and preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician Related Documentation Use the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual in conjunction with the following referenced publications e Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide P
230. able proprietary MIBs Table 12 3 lists the proprietary MIBs for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 12 SNMP SNMP Management Information Bases Table 12 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Proprietary MIBs MIB Number Module Name 1 CERENT GLOBAL REGISTRY mib 2 CERENT TC mib 3 CERENT 454 mib for ONS 15454 only 4 CERENT GENERIC mib for ONS 15327 only 5 CISCO SMI mib 6 CISCO VOA MIB mib 7 CERENT MSDWDM MIB mib 8 CERENT OPTICAL MONITOR MIB mib 9 CERENT HC RMON MIB mib 10 CERENT ENVMON MIB mib 11 CERENT GENERIC PM MIB mib 12 BRIDGE MIB my 13 CERENT 454 MIB mib 14 CERENT ENVMON MIB mib 15 CERENT FC MIB mib 16 CERENT GENERIC MIB mib 17 CERENT GENERIC PM MIB mib 18 CERENT GLOBAL REGISTRY mib 19 CERENT HC RMON MIB mib 20 CERENT IF EXT MIB mib 21 CERENT MSDWDM MIB mib 22 CERENT OPTICAL MONITOR MIB mib 23 CERENT TC mib 24 CISCO IGMP SNOOPING MIB mib 25 CISCO OPTICAL MONITOR MIB mib 26 CISCO OPTICAL PATCH MIB mib 27 CISCO SMI mib 28 CISCO VOA MIB mib 29 CISCO VTP MIB mib 30 INET ADDRESS MIB mib 31 OLD CISCO TCP MIB my 32 OLD CISCO TS MIB my 33 RFC1155 SMI my 34 RFC1213 MIB my 35 RFC1315 MIB my 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter12 SNMP
231. addresses These manual area addresses can be used to e Split up an area Nodes within a given area can accumulate to a point that they are difficult to manage cause excessive traffic or threaten to exceed the usable address space for an area Additional manual area addresses can be assigned so that you can smoothly partition a network into separate areas without disrupting service Merge areas Use transitional area addresses to merge as many as three separate areas into a single area that shares a common area address Change to a different address You might need to change an area address for a particular group of nodes Use multiple manual area addresses to allow incoming traffic intended for an old area address to continue being routed to associated nodes 8 6 7 IP over CLNS Tunnels IP over CLNS tunnels are used to encapsulate IP for transport across OSI NEs The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports two tunnel types e GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation is a tunneling protocol that encapsulates one network layer for transport across another GRE tunnels add both a CLNS header and a GRE header to the tunnel frames GRE tunnels are supported by Cisco routers and some other vendor NEs e Cisco IP The Cisco IP tunnel directly encapsulates the IP packet with no intermediate header Cisco IP is supported by most Cisco routers Figure 8 18 shows the protocol flow when an IP over CLNS tunnel is created through four NEs A B C and D The t
232. agement Information Bases Table 12 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Proprietary MIBs continued MIB Number Module Name 71 CISCO SMI mib 72 CISCO SMI my 73 CISCO SYSLOG MIB my 74 CISCO TC my 75 CISCO TCP MIB my 76 CISCO VLAN IFTABLE RELATIONSHI 77 CISCO VOA MIB mib 78 CISCO VTP MIB mib 79 CISCO VTP MIB my 80 ENTITY MIB my 81 ETHERLIKE MIB my 82 HC PerfHist TC MIB my 83 HC RMON MIB my 84 HCNUM TC my 85 IANA RTPROTO MIB my 86 IANAifType MIB my 87 IEEE 802DOT 17 RPR MIB my 88 IEEE8023 LAG MIB my 89 IF MIB my 90 IGMP MIB my 91 INET ADDRESS MIB my 92 IPMROUTE STD MIB my 93 OSPF MIB my 94 PIM MIB my 95 RMON MIB my 96 RMON2 MIB my 97 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB my 98 SNMP NOTIFICATION MIB my 99 SNMP TARGET MIB my 100 SNMPv2 MIB my 101 SNMPv2 SMI my 102 SNMPv2 TC my 103 TCP MIB my 104 TOKEN RING RMON MIB my 105 UDP MIB my 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter12 SNMP B SNMP Management Information Bases Table 12 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Proprietary MIBs continued MIB Number Module Name 106 BRIDGE MIB rfc 1493 mib 107 DS1 MIB rfc2495 mib 108 DS3 MIB rfc2496 mib 109 ENTITY MIB rfc2737 mib 110 EtherLike MIB rfc2665 mib 111 HC RMON 1fc3273 mib 112 HCNUM TC mib 113 IANAifType MIB mib 114 IF MIB rfc2233 mib 115 INET ADDRESS MIB
233. ailed procedures refer to the Install the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Terminate the chassis ground located on both sides of the rear of the shelf assembly or at the bottom of the shelf assembly to either the office ground or rack ground before you install the power Use the grounding lug to attach the 6 AWG ground cable to the 10 32 mount ground lug on the shelf assembly according to local site practice Ground one cable to ground the shelf assembly Terminate the other end of the rack ground cable to ground according to local site practice Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Power and Ground Description Note For detailed instructions on how to ground the chassis refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge ESD and Grounding Guide Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on the local site practice Figure 1 5 shows the grounding holes on the bottom of the ONS 15310 MA SDH Figure 1 5 Ground Holes on the Bottom of the ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Figure 1 6 show the grounding holes on the sides of the ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Power and Gr
234. aining a proper bend radius prevents damage to the optical cable El cables E1 cables shielded twisted pair connect to the electrical ports at the rear of the shelf assembly using Champ cable connectors E1 cables carry E1 traffic to and from the ONS 15310 MA SDH The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports up to three transmit and three receive Champ 64 connectors on each side of the shelf assembly for a maximum of 63 1 signals per side of the shelf 2842847 A compatible E1 cable is available from Lorom Industrial Co LTD Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Lorom Industrial Co LTD 15th Floor Room 2 Number 78 Sec 2 AN HO Road Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2706 6037 Fax 886 2 2704 6396 POC Monica Huang lorom com The ACS part number and description are T015654 Length Cable assembly with the cable exit at 1 amp 33 This cable solution offers two screw points on the cable head for attachment see Figure 1 7 on page 1 11 and is equivalent in characteristics to the defacto 1161A rated cable Figure 1 7 ACS Cable T015654 1 Front view 32 mer 33 64 64 position male Telco connector 1 8 clear heatshrink covering screw Top view of hood Main label P1 label 25 1 B 32 amp 64 1 amp 33 mmm 2407
235. al Ref 3 Internal ST3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Node 4 Slot 4 Node 2 Timing Line e lot 3 Timing Line Ref 1 Slot 4 lt Ref 1 Slot 3 Ref 2 Slot 3 X Ref 2 Slot 4 Ref 3 Internal ST3 Ref 3 Internal ST3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 3 by Node 3 Timing Line BITS Ref 1 Slot 3 out Ref 2 Slot 4 Ref 3 Internal ST3 Third party g equipment 3 6 3 Synchronization Status Messaging Synchronization status messaging SSM is an SDH protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SDH line layer They enable SDH devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter6 Timing Synchronization Status Messaging If you enable SSM for the ONS 15310 MA SDH consult your timing reference documentation to determine which message set to use Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 show the Generation 1 and Generation 2 message sets Table 6 1 SSM Message Set Message Quality Description G811 1 Primary reference clock STU 2 Sync traceability unknown G812T 3 Transit node clock traceable G812L 4 Local node clock traceable SETS 5 Synchronous equipment DUS 6 Do not use for timing synchronization Table 6 2 SSM Generation 2 Message Set Message Quality Des
236. al Alarms and Controls Alarm type Alarm severity CR MJ MN NA and NR Alarm trigger setting open or closed open means that the normal condition is to have current flowing through the contact and the alarm is generated when the current stops flowing closed means that normally no current flows through the contact and the alarm is generated when current does flow Virtual wire associated with the alarm CTC alarm log description up to 63 characters If you provision an external alarm to raise when a contact is open and you have not attached the alarm cable the alarm will remain raised until the alarm cable is connected Note When you provision an external alarm the alarm object is ENV IN nn The variable nn refers to the external alarm s number regardless of the name you assign 10 6 2 External Control Output You For can provision each alarm output separately Provisionable characteristics of alarm outputs include Control type Trigger type alarm or virtual wire Description for CTC display Closure setting manually or by trigger If you provision the output closure to be triggered the following characteristics can be used as triggers Local NE alarm severity A chosen alarm severity for example Major and any higher severity alarm in this case Critical causes output closure Remote NE alarm severity Similar to local NE alarm severity trigger setting but applies to remote alarms
237. ance locked disabled FLT amp maintenance Reset the card locked disabled softwareDownl oad Alarm condition is cleared unlocked enabled locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment Pull the card locked disabled notInstalled Delete the card locked disabled unassigned if the card is valid locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp unassigned if the card is invalid Change the administrative state to locked maintenance locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp maintenance locked disabled softwareDownl oad Restart completed unlocked enabled Pull the card locked disabled notInstalled locked disabled notInstalled Insert a valid card locked disabled softwareDownl oad Insert an invalid card locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment Delete the card locked disabled unassigned amp notInstalled Change the administrative state to locked maintenance locked disabled maintenance amp notInstalled m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States Table B 4 Current Service State Action Service State Transitions ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Service State Transitions continued Next Service State locked disabled FLT amp maintenance Pull the card locked disabled maintenance amp notInstalled Delete the card locked disabled
238. ance History Based on 15 Minute Intervals 2495 E1 MIB rfc2495 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for the E1 E1 DS2 and E2 Interface Types 2496 DS3 MIB rfc2496 mib Definitions of Managed Object for the DS3 E3 Interface Type 2558 SDH MIB rfc2558 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for the SDH Interface Type 2674 P BRIDGE MIB rfc2674 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Q BRIDGE MIB rfc2674 mib Traffic Classes Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions CISCO DOT3 OAM MIB A Cisco proprietary MIB defined for IEEE 802 3ah ethernet OAM 3413 SNMP NOTIFICATION MIB Defines the MIB objects that provide mechanisms to remotely configure the parameters used by an SNMP entity for generating notifications 3413 SNMP TARGET MIB Defines the MIB objects that provide mechanisms to remotely configure the parameters that are used by an SNMP entity for generating SNMP messages 3413 SNMP PROXY MIB Defines MIB objects that provide mechanisms to remotely configure the parameters used by a proxy forwarding application 3414 SNMP USER BASED SM MIB The management information definitions for the SNMP User Based Security Model 3415 SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB The management information definitions for the View Based Access Control Model for SNMP 1 RFC Request for Comment 12 5 2 Proprietary ONS 15310 MA SDH MIBs Each ONS 15310 MA SDH is shipped with a software CD containing applic
239. and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State unlocked enabled Put the port or cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state locked enabled maintenance Put the port or cross connect in the Automatic In Service administrative state locked disabled Automatic In Service Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfGroup administrative state locked enabled maintenance amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is raised locked disabled FLT locked disabled FLT amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect Cross connect only Put the cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect locked disabled Automatic In Service Put the port or cross connect in the unlocked administrative state unlocked enabled Put the port or cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state locked enabled maintenance Put the port or cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfGroup administrative state locked enabled maintenance and outOfGroup Alarm condition is raised locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT amp out OfGroup for
240. and Roll wizard or create a new circuit and then perform a roll Caution Only single rolls can be performed using TL1 Dual rolls require the network level view that only CTC or CTM provide Dual rolls have several constraints e You must complete or cancel both cross connects rolled in a dual roll You cannot complete one roll and cancel the other roll When a Roll To circuit is involved in the dual roll the first roll must roll onto the source of the Roll To circuit and the second roll must roll onto the destination of the Roll To circuit Figure 7 11 illustrates a dual roll on the same circuit Figure 7 11 Dual Roll to Reroute a Link GJ Node 1 Node2 Original leg g ee New leg Figure 7 12 illustrates a dual roll involving two circuits Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Merged Circuits Figure 7 12 Dual Roll to Reroute to a Different Node 5 Node 1 Node 2 be Node 3 a Node 4 Ld Original leg a New leg 3 Note If anew segment is created on Nodes 3 and 4 using the Bridge and Roll wizard the created circuit has the same name as the original circuit with the suffix _ROLL The circuit source is on Node 3 and the circuit destination is on Node 4 7 9 4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll When using the bridge and roll f
241. and port protection methods for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter3 Card Protection Il ONS 15310 MA SDH Card and Port Protection 3 2 1 1 1 Electrical Card Protection The ONS 15310 MA SDH chassis accommodates two types of electrical cards the E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and 63 DS3 3 and one type of common control card the 15310E CTX K9 Figure 3 1 illustrates one possible chassis configuration with two 15310E CTX K9 cards and two pairs of E1 63 DS3 3 cards The following examples show a few of the several possible ONS 15310 MA SDH chassis configurations No electrical cards at all This is the case if you choose to install Ethernet cards such as the CE 100T 8 or ML 100T 8 instead of electrical cards The Ethernet cards cannot be used to form a protection group e Unprotected electrical cards This is the case if instead of a pair of electrical cards in Slots 1 and 2 or 5 and 6 you install only a single electrical card in Slots 1 2 5 or 6 A filler card or Ethernet card must be installed in a slot where an input output I O card is missing e Asingle 15310E CTX K9 card In this case a filler card must be installed in a slot where a 15310E CTX K9 card is missing A mix of electrical cards An 21 E3 DS3 3 card can protect an adjacent EI 21 DS3 3 card E1 63 DS3 3 card can protect an adjacent 63 DS3 3 card and an E
242. and safety information is provided in the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document that ships with the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 2 Rack Installation The ONS 15310 MA SDH is easily mounted in a 19 inch 482 6 mm or 600x600 mm equipment rack The shelf assembly can be mounted so that it projects five inches from the front of the rack It mounts in both EIA standard and Telcordia standard racks A single shelf assembly is 10 67 inches 27 1 mm wide and occupies 6 RUs 10 5 in 267 6 mm in a rack when installed with a standard cable management bracket If an extended cable management bracket is installed below the shelf assembly an additional RU is occupied for a total of 7 RUs 12 25 in 311 1 mm The ONS 15310 MA SDH measures 10 44 inches 26 51 cm high 10 67 inches 27 10 cm wide and 12 inches 20 48 cm deep Figure 1 1 shows the dimensions of the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Rack Installation Figure 1 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Dimensions 12 inches 20 48 cm deep lt lt 10 67 inches 27 10 cm wide Cisco Systems we sti FEE D 48 CE E x e po Deters numerique
243. and two virtual POS VCG interfaces mapped through the cross connect for transport with other services between network elements NEs The circuit types supported are e VC3 e VC3 Nv VCAT N 1 2 e VC3 Nv LCAS Nz1 2 e VC3 2v SW LCAS Additionally the ML 100T 8 card supports packet processing classification QoS based queuing traffic scheduling and packet multiplexing services for Layer 2 3 2 5 2 ML Series Cisco IOS CLI Console Port The ML Series card has an RJ 11 serial console port on the card faceplate labeled Console It enables communication from the serial port of a PC or workstation running terminal emulation software to the Cisco IOS command line interface CLI on a specific ML Series card Due to space limitations on the ML Series card faceplate the console port is an RJ 11 modular jack instead of the more common RJ 45 modular jack Cisco supplies an RJ 11 to RJ 45 console cable adapter with each ML Series card After connecting the adapter the console port functions like the standard Cisco RJ 45 console port Figure 2 5 shows the RJ 11 to RJ 45 console cable adapter Figure 2 5 Console Cable Adapter 78970 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter2 Card Reference ML 100T 8 Card Figure 2 6 shows the ML 100T 8 card faceplate and block diagram
244. apd T203 10000 ms 4000 4100 4200 120000 NODE osi mainSetup L1LSPBufferSize 512 bytes 512 1500 NODE osi mainSetup NodeRoutingMode End System End System Intermediate System Level 1 NODE osi subnet DISPriority 63 1 2 3 127 NODE osi subnet ESH 10 sec 10 20 30 1000 NODE osi subnet IIH 3 sec 1 2 3 600 NODE osi subnet ISH 10 sec 10 20 30 1000 NODE osi subnet LANISISCost 20 1 2 3 63 NODE osi subnet LDCCISISCost 40 1 2 3 63 NODE osi subnet SDCCISISCost 60 1 2 3 63 NODE osi tarp L1DataCache TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE osi tarp LANStormSuppression TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE osi tarp LDB TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE osi tarp LDBEntry 5 min 1 10 NODE osi tarp LDBFlush 5 min 0 1440 NODE osi tarp PDUsL Propagation TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE osi tarp PDUsOrigination TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE osi tarp T1Timer 15 sec 0 3600 NODE osi tarp T2Timer 25 0 3600 NODE osi tarp T3Timer 40 sec 0 3600 NODE osi tarp T4Timer 20 sec 0 3600 NODE osi tarp Type4PDUDelay 0 0 255 NODE protection Imsp BidirectionalS witching FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE protection Imsp ReversionTime 5 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 minutes 12 0 NODE protection Imsp Revertive FALSE TRUE FALSE Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ca 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Se
245. ar End El YES YES YES YES DS 3 YES YES YES E3 YES YES YES YES Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 11 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring Intermediate path performance monitoring IPPM allows transparent monitoring of a constituent channel of an incoming transmission signal by a node that does not terminate that channel You can program IPPM from the Provisioning gt Optical gt SDH VC high order path tab in card view Many large ONS 15310 MA SDH networks only use line terminating equipment LTE not path terminating equipment PTE ONS 15310 MA SDH allows monitoring of near end PM parameter data on individual VC high order path payloads by enabling IPPM After enabling IPPM provisioning on the line card service providers can monitor large amounts of synchronous transport signal VC high order path traffic through intermediate nodes thus making troubleshooting and maintenance activities more efficient IPPM occurs only on VC high order path paths that have IPPM enabled and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters on the selected IPPM paths The monitored IPPM parameters are VC high order path CV P VC ES P VC SES P VC UAS P Note Far end IPPM is not supported However SDH path PM parameters can be monitored by logging into the far end node directly T
246. ar End SESCP PFE is a count of one second intervals containing one or more 44 M frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to 1 or with one or more far end SEF AIS defects MS SES A count of the seconds containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies BPV EXZ gt 44 and or defects on the line SES P Severely Errored Seconds Path SES P is a one second period containing at least one defect SES P is a subset of ES P SES PFE Far End Path Severely Errored Seconds SES PFE is a one second period containing at least one defect SES PFE is a subset of ES PFE SES PM Path Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds SES PM indicates the severely errored seconds recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval SESP P Severely Errored Seconds Path SESP P is a count of seconds containing more than 44 P bit parity violations one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 Parameter Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Definition SESR P Path Severely Errored Second Ratio SESR P is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval SESR PM Path Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds Ratio SESR PM indicates the severely er
247. arrying GFP or PPP HDLC encapsulated Ethernet frames are then extracted and buffered in the POS mapper external memory This memory is used for providing alignment and differential delay compensation for the received high order VCAT payloads After alignment and delay compensation have been done the Ethernet frames are decapsulated with one of the framing protocols GFP or PPP HDLC Decapsulated Ethernet frames are then passed onto the network processor for QoS queuing traffic scheduling packet switching and multiplexing The network processor switches the frame to one of the corresponding PHY channels and then onto the Ethernet port for transmission to the external clients 25 3 ML 100T 8 Card Level Indicators The ML 100T 8 card faceplate has two card level LED indicators described in Table 2 8 Table 2 8 ML 100T 8 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description SF LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML 100T 8 card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED blinks until the software deems the card operational then it turns off ACT LED Green The ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML 100T 8 When the ACT LED is green it indicates that the ML 100T 8 card is active and the software is operational otherwise it is off 2 5 4 ML 100T 8 Port Level Indicators The ML 100T 8 card has two LEDs embedded into each of the ei
248. at do not contain ordered sets EB Path Errored Block EB indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block ES Path Errored Second ES is a one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect ESCP P Errored Second Path ESCP P is a count of seconds containing one or more CP bit parity errors one or more severely errored framing SEF defects or one or more AIS defects ESCP P is defined for the C bit parity application ESCP PFE Far End Errored Second CP bit Path ESCP PFE is a count of one second intervals containing one or more M frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to 1 or one or more far end SEF AIS defects MS ES Errored Seconds Line ES L is a count of the seconds containing one or more anomalies BPV EXZ and or defects loss of signal on the line ES P Path Errored Second ES P is a one second period with at least one defect ES PM Path Monitoring Errored Seconds ES PM indicates the errored seconds recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval ESP P Errored Second Path ESP P is a count of seconds containing one or more P bit parity errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects ESR Path Errored Second Ratio ESR is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval ESR P Path Errored Second Ratio ESR P is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement
249. ation E1 21 E3 DS3 3 and E1 63 0533 MA SDH The E1 21 DS3 3 and 63 DS3 3 cards provide 21 and 63 ITU Compliant G 703 1 ports respectively as well as three E3 DS3 ports See the 2 6 21 DS3 3 and E1 63 DS3 3 Cards section on page 2 16 Filler Card Traffic Slot MA The FILLER card is used to fill unused traffic card slots in the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelves The Cisco Transport Controller CTC graphical user interface GUI detects the filler card See the 2 7 Filler Cards section on page 2 18 Filler Card 15310E CTX K9 Slot MA The CTX FILLER card is used to fill unused 15310E CTX K9 card slots in the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf CTC detects the filler card See the 2 7 Filler Cards section on page 2 18 SFP Modules MA Small Form factor Pluggables SFPs are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high speed serial links from a port or slot to the network See the 2 8 SFP Modules section on page 2 19 2 1 2 Card Compatibility Table 2 2 lists CTC software release compatibility for each ONS 15310 MA SDH card In the table Yes means that the card is compatible with the listed software release Table 2 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Software Release Compatibility Per Card Card R9 1 and R9 2 15310E CTX K9 Yes CE 100T 8 Card Yes CE MR 6 Card Yes ML 100T 8 Card Yes E1 21 E3 DS3 3 Yes E1 63
250. ation about the alarm 6 cerent454AlarmObjectIndex cerentGenericAlarmObjectIndex Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table This variable is the index of the objects in each table if the alarm is interface related this is the index of the interfaces in the interface table 7 cerent454AlarmSlotNumber cerentGenericAlarmSlotNumber The slot of the object that raised the alarm If a slot is not relevant to the alarm the slot number is Zero 8 cerent454AlarmPortNumber cerentGenericAlarmPortNumber The port of the object that raised the alarm If a port is not relevant to the alarm the port number is Zero 9 cerent454AlarmLineNumber cerentGenericAlarmLineNumber The object line that raised the alarm If a line is not relevant to the alarm the line number is Zero 10 cerent454AlarmObjectName cerentGenericAlarmObjectName The TL 1 style user visible name that uniquely identifies an object in the system 12 7 SNMPv1 v2 Community Names You can provision community names for all SNMP requests from the SNMP Trap Destination dialog box in CTC When community names are assigned to traps the ONS 15310 MA SDH treat the request as valid if the community name matches one provisioned in CTC If the community name does not match the provisioned list SNMP drops the request Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 La 78 19417 01 Chapter 12 SNMPv1 v2 Proxy Su
251. attached to the GNE so the inbound path is CTC to the GNE and the outbound path is from the GNE to CTC The CTC CORBA Standard constant is 683 and the TCC CORBA Default is TCC Fixed 57790 access list 100 remark Inbound ACL CTC gt NE access list 100 remark access list 100 permit tcp host 192 168 10 10 host 10 10 10 100 eq www access list 100 remark allows initial contact with the 15310 MA SDH using http port 80 access list 100 remark access list 100 permit tcp host 192 168 10 10 host 10 10 10 100 eq 57790 access list 100 remark allows CTC communication with the 15310 MA SDH GNE port 57790 KKK access list 100 remark access list 101 remark access list 101 permit tcp host 10 10 10 100 host 192 168 10 10 eq 683 access list 101 remark allows alarms etc from the 15310 MA SDH random port to the CTC workstation port 683 access list 100 remark access list 101 permit tcp host 10 10 10 100 host 192 168 10 10 established access list 101 remark allows ACKs from the 15310 MA SDH GNE to CTC The following ACL examples show a firewall configuration when the proxy server gateway setting is enabled As with the first example the CTC workstation address is 192 168 10 10 and the ONS 15310 MA SDH address is 10 10 10 100 The firewall is attached to the GNE so the inbound path is CTC to the GNE and the outbound path is from the GNE to CTC The CTC CORBA Standard constant is 683 and the TCC CORBA De
252. audit log restoring a database clearing performance monitoring PM parameters and activating and reverting software loads These privileges except the PM clearing privilege can only be granted using CTC network element NE defaults See Appendix C Network Element Defaults for more information To grant the PM clearing privilege using CTC click the Provisioning gt Security gt Access tabs For more information about setting up Superuser privileges refer to the Change Node Settings chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 5 2 2 2 Idle User Timeout Each ONS 15310 MA SDH CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked A lockout prevents unauthorized users from making changes Higher level users have shorter default idle periods and lower level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods as shown in Table 5 3 The user idle period can be modified by a Superuser refer to the Change Node Settings chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for instructions Table 5 3 Default User Idle Times Security Level Idle Time Superuser 15 minutes Provisioning 30 minutes Maintenance 60 minutes Retrieve Unlimited 5 2 2 3 User Password Login and Access Policies Superusers can view real time lists of users who are logged in via CTC or TL1 for each node Superusers can also provision the following password lo
253. available is a mylar tab shown in Figure 2 11 A second type of latch is an actuator button Figure 2 12 and a third type is a bail clasp Figure 2 13 SFP dimensions are 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter2 Card Reference SFP Modules e Height 0 03 in 8 5 mm e Width 0 53 in 13 4 mm Depth 2 22 in 56 5 mm SFP temperature ranges are e COM Commercial operating temperature range 5 to 70 degrees 23 to 158 degrees F EXT Extended operating temperature range 5 to 85 degrees 23 to 185 degrees F e IND Industrial operating temperature range 40 to 85 degrees C 40 to 85 degrees F Figure 2 11 Mylar Tab SFP Figure 2 12 Actuator Button SFP Figure 2 13 Bail Clasp SFP 2 8 3 PPM Provisioning SFPs are known as pluggable port modules PPMs in CTC PPMs provide STM1 STM4 and STM16 line rates for the ONS 15310 SDH See the 2 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Optical Interfaces section on page 2 5 for more information To provision PPMs including provisioning or changing the optical line rate refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EE 78 19417 01 amp CHAPTER Card Protection Note The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do not refer to using Cisco
254. ble router is used 12 5 inches of rack space is required Figure 1 2 shows a single ONS 15310 MA SDH being mounted in a rack using a universal bracket Figure 1 2 Mounting a Single ONS 15310 MA SDH in a Rack lt Q I Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ma 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Electrical Interface Assemblies 1 2 3 Mounting Multiple Nodes Most standard 2200 mm racks can hold numerous up to 6 or 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes and a fuse and alarm panel 1 3 Electrical Interface Assemblies High density EIAs are attached to the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly backplane to provide up to 126 transmit and receive El connections through six Champ connectors per side A and B or six transmit and receive E3 DS3 connections through six BNC connectors per side The EIAs are designed to support E1 E3 DS3 signals The appropriate cable assembly is required depending on the type of signal You can install EIAs on one or both sides of the ONS 15310 MA SDH As you face the rear of the shelf assembly the right side is the A side 15310 EIA HD A and the left side is the B side 15310 EIA HD B Figure 1 3 shows the J connectors on the A and B side high density EIAs installed on the ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 194
255. but no traffic is carried on the port Flashing green A link exists to the Ethernet port and traffic is carried on the port The LED flash rate reflects the traffic rate for that port 25 ML 100T 8 Card This section describes the features and functions of the Layer 2 10 100 Ethernet card the ML 100T 8 The card is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH S Note The ML 100T 8 card with PID 15310 ML 100T 8 is not compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH 15310 P ML 100T 8 is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly If you install a 15310 ML 100T 8 in an ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly you will receive a mismatched equipment alarm mismatchofEquipment You can view the PID under the node view Inventory tab in CTC Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EN 78 19417 01 Chapter 2 Card Reference ML 100T 8 Card 2 5 1 ML 100T 8 Card Description A Caution Do not install CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 cards in OSP The ML 100T 8 card maps eight ports of 10 100 Ethernet encapsulated traffic into SDH VC4 payloads The card is compatible with high order VC3 VCAT and the GFP and PPP HDLC framing protocols It also supports LCAS which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SDH link bandwidth Each 10 100 Ethernet port can be mapped to an SDH channel in increments of VC3 granularity The ML 100T 8 card provides a switched operating mode with eight subscriber interfaces
256. c In Service Soak tabs in card view and click the Retrieve button If the port is in the locked disabled Automatic In Service service state and has a good signal the Time Until unlocked column shows the soak count down status If the port is locked disabled Automatic In Service and has a bad signal the Time Until unlocked column indicates that the signal is bad You must click the Retrieve button to obtain the latest time value Note Although the ML 100T 8 card does not use the Telcordia GR 1093 CORE state model you can also set a soak timer for ML 100T 8 card ports The soak period is the amount of time that the ML 100T 8 port remains in the Down state after an error free signal is continuously received before changing to the Up state To find the remaining port soak time choose the Maintenance gt Ether POS Port Soak tabs in ML 100T 8 card view and click the Retrieve button For more information about port and cross connect service states see Appendix B Administrative and Service States 7 2 3 Circuit Protection Types The Protection column on the Circuit window shows the card line and SDH topology path protection used for the entire circuit path Table 7 2 shows the protection type indicators that you see in this column Table 7 2 Circuit Protection Types Protection Type Description LMSP The circuit is protected by a LMSP protection group N A A circuit with connections on the same node is not protect
257. card with PID 15310 CE 100T 8 is not compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH The 15310 P CE 100T 8 is compatible with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly If you install a 15310 CE 100T 8 in an ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly you will receive a mismatched equipment alarm mismatchofEquipment You can view the PID under the node view Inventory tab in CTC Caution Do not install CE 100T 8 ML 100T 8 cards in OSP The CE 100T 8 card maps 8 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet encapsulated traffic into SDH payloads making use of low order VC12 virtual concatenation VCAT high order VC3 VC4 VCAT generic framing procedure GFP and Point to Point Protocol high level data link control PPP HDLC framing protocols It also supports the link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SDH link bandwidth The CE 100T 8 card provides eight RJ 45 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports on the faceplate of the card An inactive RJ 11 console port is also on the faceplate The circuit types supported are and CCAT e VC3 Nv VCAT N 1 3 e VC3 Nv LCAS N 1 3 e VC3 2v software LCAS SW LCAS compatible with ML Series cards only e VCI2 Nv VCAT N 1 63 e VC12 Nv LCAS N 1 63 Note The SW LCAS is not supported on CE 100T 8 cards for interoperation with the CE MR 6 and ML MR 10 cards Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Cha
258. ccess EnableShellPassword FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security shellAccess TelnetPort 23 23 9999 NODE security snmpAccess AccessState NonSecure Disabled NonSecure NODE security tll Access AccessState NonSecure Disabled NonSecure Secure NODE security userLockout FailedLogins AllowedBeforeLockout 5 times 0 10 NODE security userLockout LockoutDuration 00 30 00 00 00 05 mins secs 00 10 10 00 NODE security userLockout ManualUnlockBySuperuser FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE timing bits 1 AISThreshold DUS G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS NODE timing bits 1 AdminSSMIn STU G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS NODE timing bits 1 CableType 120 ohm 75 ohm 120 ohm NODE timing bits 1 Coding HDB3 HDB3 AMI when FacilityType N A when Facility Type 2MHz NODE timing bits 1 CodingOut HDB3 HDB3 AMI when FacilityTypeOut E1 N A when FacilityTypeOut 2MHz AMI when FacilityTypeOut 6MHz NODE timing bits 1 FacilityType El E1 2MHz NODE timing bits 1 Facility TypeOut El 1 2MHz Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EE 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Default Value Default Domain NODE timing bits 1 Framing FAS CAS CRC FAS CRC FAS CAS FAS CAS CRC FAS Unframed when FacilityType E1 N A when Facili
259. cedures to set up or change SNMP settings 12 3 1 SNMPv3 Support Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Software R9 0 and later supports SNMPv3 in addition to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is an interoperable standards based protocol for network management SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices by a combination of authentication and encryption packets over the network based on the User Based Security Model USM and the View Based Access Control Model VACM e User Based Security Model The User Based Security Model USM uses the HMAC algorithm for generating keys for authentication and privacy SNMPv3 authenticates data based on its origin and ensures that the data is received intact SNMPv1 and v2 authenticate data based on the plain text community string which is less secure when compared to the user based authentication model View Based Access Control Model The view based access control model controls the access to the managed objects RFC 3415 defines the following five elements that VACM comprises Groups A set of users on whose behalf the MIB objects can be accessed Each user belongs to a group The group defines the access policy notifications that users can receive and the security model and security level for the users Security level The access rights of a group depend on the security level of the request Contexts Define a named subset of the object instances in the MIB MIB objects are grouped into collections wit
260. count 0 51753600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend I day EB 125 count 0 172800000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds velo nearend I day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds velo nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds velo nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 C 3 3 2 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 Card Default Settings Table C 3 lists the E1 21 E3 DS3 3 card default settings Table C 3 21 053 3 Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 21 E3 DS3 3 Broadband portAssignment E3 PORT DS3 PORT E3 PORT E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 00 00 00 15 00 30 hours mins 48 00 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config FeInhibitLpbk TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config LineLength 0 225 ft 0 225 ft 226 450 ft E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config LineType M13 UNFRAMED M13 C BIT E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 05 E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 E 9 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SFBER 1 00E 03 1 3 1 4 1E 5 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 15min CV 382 BIP 0 38700 count
261. cpbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day CV 3820 BIP 0 3715200 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 387 BPV 0 38700 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 3865 0 3715200 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day L OSS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min AISS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 BIP 0 38700 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min S 5 2 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath n
262. cription PRC 1 Primary reference source Stratum 1 STU 2 Synchronization traceability unknown ST2 3 Stratum 2 TNC 4 Transit node clock G 813E 5 Stratum G 813 6 PRC SMC 7 SDH minimum clock ST4 8 Stratum 4 DUS 9 Do not use for timing synchronization RES Reserved quality level set by user Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Ha Chapter6 Timing Synchronization Status Messaging Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 lt 78 19417 01 CHAPTER y Circuits and Tunnels amp Note The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This chapter explains Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH synchronous transport signal VC high order path and Virtual Tributary VC low order path circuits and VC low order path and data communications channel DCC tunnels To provision circuits and tunnels refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 7 1
263. cted by default e Create TL1 like Set whether to create only TL1 like circuits that is instruct the node to create only cross connects allowing the resulting circuits to be in an upgradable state Network Map Set the default network map which country s map is displayed in CTC network view Table C 1 CTC Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTC circuits CreateLikeTL 1 FALSE TRUE FALSE CTC circuits RouteAutomatically TRUE TRUE FALSE CTC circuits RouteAutomaticallyDefaultOverridable TRUE TRUE FALSE CTC network Map United States none Germany Japan Netherlands South Korea United Kingdom United States S Note The CTC network LocalDomainCreationAndViewing NE default has been removed You can provision this setting in the CTC Preferences page C 3 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings The tables in this section list the default settings for Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH common control electrical and data cards Cisco provides several types of user configurable defaults for these cards Types of card defaults can be broadly grouped by function as outlined in the following subsections For information about individual card settings refer to the Change Port Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults
264. cuit provisioning 7 5 interface specifications A 2 tunneling traffic to manage multiple ONS nodes 4 16 traffic monitoring 7 17 routing 8 16 tunnels DCC 7 9 firewall 8 20 GRE tunnel 4 16 IP encapsulated 7 9 IP over CLNS See IP over CLNS tunnels TL1 tunnels 4 16 VT 7 8 Tx AISS P parameter definition 11 12 Tx BBE P parameter 11 12 Tx BBER P parameter definition 11 12 Tx EB P parameter definition 11 12 Tx ES P parameter definition 11 12 Tx ESR P parameter definition 11 12 Tx SES P parameter definition 11 12 Tx SESR P parameter definition 11 12 Tx UAS P parameter definition 11 12 U ASCP PFE parameter definition 11 13 ASCP P parameter definition 11 12 U U UAS parameter definition 11 12 UAS PFE parameter definition 11 13 UAS PM parameter definition 11 13 UAS P parameter definition 11 13 UASP P parameter definition 11 13 UAS SM parameter definition 11 13 UDC installing cable ONS 15310 MA 1 20 UNC WORDS parameter definition 11 13 UNIX software installation 4 2 workstation requirements 4 3 upgrading spans automatically 9 9 STM N speed 9 8 user setup 5 1 Index M v VCAT circuits CE 100T 8 card capacity 7 15 circuit states 7 11 common fiber routing 7 12 compatibile cards 7 11 description 7 11 ML 100T 8 card capacity 7 15 non LCAS states 7 14 server trail support 7 24 sizes 17 14 split routing 7 12 viewing alarm affected circuits 10 4 alarm history 10 7 alarms 10 1 DCC connections 4
265. d POS Ports Statistics Parameters 11 22 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Contents 11 6 1 5 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card POS Ports Utilization Window 11 24 11 6 1 6 100 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card POS Ports History Window 11 25 11 7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports 11 25 11 7 1 STM1 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 25 11 7 2 STM4 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 27 11 7 3 STM16 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters for ONS 15310 MA SDH 11 29 cHAPTER 12 SNMP 12 1 12 1 SNMP Overview 12 1 12 2 SNMP Basic Components 12 2 12 3 SNMP Version Support 12 4 12 3 1 SNMPv3 Support 12 4 12 4 SNMP Message Types 12 4 12 5 SNMP Management Information Bases 12 5 12 5 1 IETF Standard MIBs for the ONS 15310 MA SDH 12 5 12 5 2 Proprietary ONS 15310 MA SDH MIBs 12 6 12 6 SNMP Trap Content 12 11 12 6 1 Generic and IETF Traps 12 11 12 6 2 Variable Trap Bindings 12 12 12 7 SNMPv1 v2 Community Names 12 12 12 8 SNMPv1 v2 Proxy Support Over Firewalls 12 13 12 9 SNMPv3 Proxy Configuration 12 13 12 10 SNMP Remote Monitoring 12 14 12 10 1 Ethernet Statistics Group 12 14 12 10 1 1 Row Creation in etherStatsTable 12 14 12 10 1 2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 12 15 12 10 1 3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable 12 15 12 10 1 4 64 Bit etherStatsHighCapacity Table 12 15 12 10 2 History Control Group 12 15 12 10 2 1 History Control Table 12 15 12 10 2 2
266. d Supported l PTE lt gt u VT Path XX V PMs Near and Far End Supported u VC Path VC PMs Near and Far End Supported amp Note The XX in Figure 11 2 represents all PM parameters listed in Figure 11 3 with the given prefix and or suffix Figure 11 3 shows where overhead bytes detected on the application specific integrated circuits ASICs produce PM parameters for the 1 ports m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports Figure 11 3 PM Parameter Read Points on the E1 Ports ONS 15310 MA SDH E1 Card Cross Connect LIU STM N E1 Side SDH Side LP EB LP BBE gt gt LP ES Low amp LP SES Order BTC LP UAS Path Ps Tx P EB LP ESR Level lt LP SESR Tx P ES LP BBER Tx P SES Tx P UAS gt 6245 lt PMs read on Framer Tx P BBER pero CV L ES L SES L Rx P EB Rx P BBE Rx P ES Rx P SES Rx P UAS Rx P ESR Rx P SESR Rx P BBER PMs read on LIU oo 243068 The PM parameters for the 1 ports are listed in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 PM Parameters for
267. d by a Subnetwork Connection Protection circuit is three times the circuit bandwidth at the source and destination nodes only For the ONS 15310 MA SDH the spans can be STM1 STM4 or STM 16 9 1 2 Subnetwork Connection Protection Application Example Figure 9 1 shows a basic Subnetwork Connection Protection configuration If Node ID 0 sends a signal to Node ID 2 the working signal travels on the working traffic path through Node ID 1 The same signal is also sent on the protect traffic path through Node ID 3 Figure 9 1 Basic Four Node SNCP Ring 15810 MASDH Node ID 0 e 15310 MA SDH 15310 MA SDH ER Node ID 3 Node ID 1 Y 15310 MA SDH Node ID 2 Fiber 1 A I T Q I m 243022 If a fiber break occurs Figure 9 2 Node ID 2 switches its active receiver to the protect signal coming through Node ID 3 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Terminal Point to Point and Linear ADM Configurations Figure 9 2 Subnetwork Connection Protection with a Fiber Break Source 15310 MA SDH Node ID 0 o SDH 15310 MA SDH lt gt Node ID 3 Node ID 1 Destination s ea break 15310 MA SDH Node ID 2 243023 lt Fiber 2 9 2 Terminal Point to Point and Linear ADM Configurations You can configure Cisco ONS 15310 MAs in a terminal point to point ne
268. d enabled locked enabled disabled or locked disabled Automatic In Service when testing is complete Gray locked enabled disable Out of Service and Management Disabled The port is d out of service and unable to carry traffic Loopbacks are not allowed in this service state Green unlocked enabled In Service and Normal The port is fully operational and performing as provisioned The port transmits a signal and displays alarms loopbacks are not allowed Violet locked disabled Autom Out of Service and Autonomous Automatic In Service atic In Service The port is out of service but traffic is carried Alarm reporting is suppressed The node monitors the ports for an error free signal After an error free signal is detected the port stays in locked disabled Automatic In Service state for the duration of the soak period After the soak period ends the port service state changes to unlocked enabled Raised fault conditions whether or not their alarms are reported can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV COND command The Automatic In Service port will automatically transition to unlocked enabled when a signal is received for the length of time provisioned in the soak field Figure 4 3 Terminal Loopback Indicator Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EH Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window Figure 4
269. d on the on the front and rear ports of the NE 8 8 4 IPv6 in Secure Mode In secure mode IPv6 is only supported on the rear Ethernet interface The front port only supports IPv4 even if it is disabled on the rear Ethernet interface For more information about provisioning IPv6 addresses in secure mode see the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 8 8 5 IPv6 Limitations IPv6 has the following configuration restrictions e You can provision an NE as IPv6 enabled only if the node is a SOCKS enabled or firewall enabled GNE ENE e IPSec is not supported e OSPF RIP cannot be enabled on the LAN interface if NE is provisioned as an IPv6 node e Static route firewall proxy tunnel provisioning is applicable only to IPv4 addresses even if the IPv6 is enabled secure mode IPv6 is supported only on the rear Ethernet interface IPv6 is not supported on the front port e ONS platforms use NAT PT internally for providing IPv6 native support NAT PT uses the IPv4 address range 128 x x x for packet translation Do not use the 128 x x x address range when you enable IPv6 feature 8 9 FTP Support for ENE Database Backup The Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH provides FTP database backup and restore download to ENEs when proxy firewall is enabled This feature allows you to provision a list of legal FTP hosts in CTC that can be used with TL1 commands to perform database backup restore or software download The FTP hosts can be provisioned to elapse a
270. day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1 day EB 125 count 0 691200000 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1 day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 3 3 3 E1 63 DS3 3 Card Default Settings Table C 4 lists the E1 63 E3 DS3 3 card default settings Table C 4 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 Broadband portAssignment E3 PORT DS3 PORT E3 PORT E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT config FeInhibitLpbk TRUE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3
271. de le clesae A ast ERE f 0 44 inches 26 51 cm high PERFORMANCE STA Faks piu messer E utei cg olera i ay anse B pe 8 CAUTION TS ASSEMBLY COMTANS ELECTROSTATIC DEVICES SENSITIVE e Y 144688 1 2 1 Mounting Brackets A Caution Use only the fastening hardware provided with the ONS 15310 MA SDH to prevent loosening deterioration and electromechanical corrosion of the hardware and joined material A Caution When mounting the ONS 15310 MA SDH in a frame with a nonconductive coating such as paint lacquer or enamel use either the thread forming screws provided with the ONS 15310 MA SDH shipping kit or remove the coating from the threads to ensure electrical continuity The shelf assembly ships without mounting brackets You need to purchase brackets suitable either for use with 19 inch 482 6mm or 600x600mm racks Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Rack Installation 1 2 2 Mounting a Single Node Mounting the ONS 15310 MA SDH in a rack requires a minimum of 10 5 inches of vertical rack space To ensure that the mounting is secure use four 12 24 mounting screws for each side of the shelf assembly If the larger ca
272. diami aon US 51 3 age st Gli Cala y Yl ote Laon p VAZNE SIGURNOSNE NAPOMENE Ovaj simbol upozorenja predstavlja opasnost Nalazite se situaciji koja moze prouzroCiti tjelesne ozljede Prije rada s bilo kojim uredajem morate razumjeti opasnosti vezane uz elektri ne sklopove te biti upoznati sa standardnim na inima izbjegavanja nesre a U prevedenim sigurnosnim upozorenjima prilo enima uz ure aj mo ete prema broju koji se nalazi uz pojedino upozorenje prona i i njegov prijevod SA UVAJTE OVE UPUTE D LE IT BEZPE NOSTN POKYNY Tento upozor uj c symbol ozna uje nebezpe Jste v situaci kter by mohla zp sobit nebezpe razu P ed prac na jak mkoliv vybaven si uv domte nebezpe souvisej c s elektrick mi obvody a seznamte se se standardn mi opat en mi pro p edch zen raz m Podle sla na konci ka d ho upozorn n vyhledejte jeho p eklad v p elo en ch bezpe nostn ch upozorn n ch kter jsou p ilo ena k za zen USCHOVEJTE TYTO POKYNY 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Preface gt gt gt gt gt AUTO TO TIPOEIOOTIOINTIKG Bp okseore Trou urrope va TIPOKAA GEI rpauparicp epyaoteite OE amp oTrAIOU
273. dules Cisco Top Assembly Card Cisco Product ID Number TAN 15310E CTX K9 ONS SC 2G 39 7 10 2165 02 ONS SC 2G 40 5 10 2185 02 ONS SC 2G 42 1 10 2166 02 ONS SC 2G 42 9 10 2167 02 ONS SC 2G 43 7 10 2168 02 ONS SC 2G 44 5 10 2169 02 ONS SC 2G 46 1 10 2170 02 ONS SC 2G 46 9 10 2171 02 ONS SC 2G 47 7 10 2172 02 ONS SC 2G 48 5 10 2173 02 ONS SE Z1 10 1971 02 ONS SC 2G 50 1 10 2186 02 ONS SC 2G 50 9 10 2174 02 ONS SC 2G 51 7 10 2175 02 ONS SC 2G 52 5 10 2176 02 ONS SC 2G 54 1 10 2177 02 ONS SC 2G 54 9 10 2178 02 ONS SC 2G 55 7 10 2179 02 ONS SC 2G 56 5 10 2180 02 ONS SC 2G 58 1 10 2181 02 ONS SC 2G 58 9 10 2182 02 ONS SC 2G 59 7 10 2183 02 ONS SC 2G 60 6 10 2184 02 ONS SI 155 I 1 10 1938 02 ONS SI 155 SR MM 10 2279 01 ONS SI 155 L1 10 1957 02 ONS SI 155 L2 10 1937 02 ONS SC 155 EL 10 2363 01 CE MR 6 ONS SI GE SX 10 2295 01 ONS SI GE LX 10 2300 01 ONS SI GE ZX 10 2296 01 ONS SI 100 FX 10 2350 01 ONS SI 100 LX10 10 2294 01 ONS SE ZE EL 10 2351 01 ONS SE 100 BX10U 10 2352 01 ONS SE 100 BX10D 10 2353 01 2 8 2 SFP Description SFPs are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high speed serial links from a port or slot to the network Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the SFPs There is no correlation between the type of latch to the model type such as SX or LX LH or technology type such as Gigabit Ethernet See the label on the SFP for the technology type and model One type of latch
274. e A The DC power Battery Return BR or positive terminal must be grounded at the source end power feed or DC mains power end The DC power BR input terminal of the ONS 15xxx is not connected to the equipment frame chassis Caution If the system loses power or the 15310E CTX K9 card is reset you must reset the ONS 15310 MA SDH clock unless the node has been previously provisioned to use Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP updates the clock over the LAN 1 7 Shelf Temperature The ONS 15310 MA SDH chassis temperature is displayed in the Shelf view gt Provisioning gt General gt Voltage Temperature pane in CTC The temperature of the shelf in degrees Celsius is displayed in the Temperature area of the Voltage Temperature pane Note For ONS 15310 MA SDH chassis voltage monitoring is not performed 1 8 Cable Description and Installation This section describes fiber optic E3 coaxial El 64 pin Champ UDC and twisted pair cables 1 8 1 Cabling Types The following types of cables are used with the ONS 15310 MA SDH e Optical cables The STM1 4 16 signals operate over fiber spans through SFP optics including intermediate reach IR and long reach LR SFPs Specification references can be found for the interface in ITU G 957 and Telcordia GR 253 See the 1 8 2 Fiber Cable Installation section on page 1 13 for more information Make sure the fiber cables do not bend excessively maint
275. e 11 13 PM Parameter Read Points on the STM16 Ports 11 30 Figure 12 1 Basic Network Managed by SNMP 12 2 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Figures Figure 12 2 SNMP Agent Gathering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager 12 3 Figure 12 3 Example of the Primary SNMP Components 12 3 Figure A 1 Valere rectifier breakers in AC load center 16 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 TABLES Table 1 1 E1 cables for wire wrap connection 1 12 Table 1 2 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA Connectors J8 and J9 Side B EIA Connectors J21 and J22 1 15 Table 1 3 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A Connectors J10 and J11 Side B Connectors J23 and J24 1 16 Table 1 4 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A Connectors J12 and J13 Side B Connectors J25 and J26 1 17 Table 1 5 Default Alarm Pin Assignments lnputs 1 19 Table 1 6 Default Alarm Pin Assignments Outputs 1 19 Table 1 7 BITS Cable Pin Assignments 1 20 Table 1 8 UDC Cable Pin Assignments 1 21 Table 1 9 Orderwire Pin Assignments 1 25 Table 1 10 Port Line Rates Connector Types and Locations 1 27 Table 2 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Cards and Descriptions 2 2 Table 2 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Software Release Compatibility Per Card 2 3 Table 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Card Level Indicators 2 5 Table 2 4 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators 2 8 Tab
276. e 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation BN CTC Software Delivery Methods Figure 4 1 CTC Software Versions in an ONS 15310 MA SDH Node View 310ma 25 Cisco Transport Controller File Edit view Tools Help G6 GE 6 4 96 0 10 89 194 157 8 17 06 1 56 PM 015 Superuser ion 08 00 006H 15 21 8 Factory Defaults lt gt Alarms Conditions History Circuits Provisioning Inventory Maintenance Database Node Type Node Status Working Version Protect Version Download Status Network 310ma 25 15310MA Major Alarm 18 0 0 08 00 006H 15 21 18 0 0 08 00 006H 12 14 OSI Protection Software Cross Connect Overhead XConnect Alarm Extenders Diagnostic Timing Audit Test Access gt sense tn Ce NET 159512 4 1 2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation CTC software Java Archive JAR files are installed on your computer using one of the following methods The JAR files are downloaded from the 15310E CTX K9 card and installed on your computer automatically the first time you connect to an ONS 15310 MA SDH Downloading the CTC software files at login ensures that your computer has the same CTC software version as the ONS 15310 MA SDH you are accessing The CTC JAR files are stored in the temporary directory designated by your computer operating system You can use the Delet
277. e CTC Cache button to remove files If the files are deleted they are downloaded the next time you connect to an ONS node Downloading the CTC JAR files may take 1 2 minutes or 45 50 minutes depending on the bandwidth of the connection between your workstation and the ONS 15310 MA SDH JAR files downloaded from a modem or a data communication channel DCC network link will require more time than JAR files downloaded over a LAN connection e You can install the JAR files on your computer using the CTC setup wizard provided on the CTC software CD If you install the JAR files with the setup wizard you do not need to wait for the files to download the first time you log into the node In addition you can manage ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes that are added to networks with ONS nodes running older software releases After you install the JAR files you can log into an ONS 15454 running an earlier software release and manage the ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes However if you use the Delete CTC Cache function you must reinstall the JAR files from the software CD Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter 4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Installation Overview During network topology discovery CTC polls each node in the network to determine which one contains the most recent version of the CTC software If CTC discovers a node in the network that has a more recent version of CTC than th
278. e SNMPv1 MIB in the CiscoV1 directory does not contain 64 bit performance monitoring counters but supports the lower and higher word values of the corresponding 64 bit counter The other MIB files in the CiscoV I and CiscoV2 directories are identical in content and differ only in format Figure 12 1 illustrates a basic network managed by SNMP Figure 12 1 Basic Network Managed by SNMP 8 52582 12 2 SNMP Basic Components An SNMP managed network consists of three primary components managed devices agents and management systems A managed device is a network node that contains an SNMP agent and resides on an SNMP managed network Managed devices collect and store management information and use SNMP to make this information available to management systems that use SNMP Managed devices include routers access servers switches bridges hubs computer hosts and network elements such as the ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EN 78 19417 01 Chapter 12 SNMP SNMP Basic Components An agent is a software module that resides in a managed device An agent has local knowledge of management information and translates that information into a form compatible with SNMP The SNMP agent gathers data from the MIB which is the repository for device parameter and network data The agent can also send traps which are notifications o
279. e Slot 4 Port 2 1 ES 69 777 Slot 3 Port 2 2t0 PfigaPot22tn Slot 3 Port 2 2 to Slot 4 Port 2 2 Node 2 Slot 4 Port 2 2 Node 3 Working Path Protect Path 271784 9 3 Interoperability The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports up to four SDH SDCCs and two Subnetwork Connection Protection configurations per node You can install ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes into a network comprised entirely of ONS 15310 MA nodes or into a network that has a mix of ONS 15310 MA SDH and ONS 15454 nodes The ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes interoperate with the ONS 15454 nodes in linear or Subnetwork Connection Protection configurations Because connection procedures for these types of nodes are the same for example adding or dropping nodes from a Subnetwork Connection Protection or linear configuration or creating DCCs follow the instructions in the Add and Remove Nodes chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide whenever you make connections between ONS 15310 MA SDH and ONS 15454 nodes 9 3 1 Subtending Rings Subtending rings reduce the number of nodes and cards required and reduce external shelf to shelf cabling Figure 9 4 shows an ONS 15454 SDH with two subtending rings using ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes Figure 9 4 ONS 15454 SDH with Two ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Subtending Linear Multiplex Section Protection Configurations ONS 15310 MA 15310 SDH SDH ONS 15454 271814 Figure 9 5 shows an ONS 15310 MA SD
280. e The DC power Battery Return BR or positive terminal must be grounded at the source end power feed or DC mains power end The DC power BR input terminal of the of the ONS 15xxx is not connected to the equipment frame chassis A 1 11 Environmental Specifications The ONS 15310 MA SDH has the following environmental specifications e Operating temperature 40 to 65 degree Celsius 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent relative humidity A 1 12 Fan Tray Assembly Specifications Environmental Operating temperature 40 to 65 degrees Celsius 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity Power 50 W 4 2 Amps at 12 V 170 BTU hr e Shelf Acoustics NEBS acoustic noise compliant Normal fan speed 58 dBA High fan speed 64 dBA A 1 13 Shelf Dimensions The ONS 15310 MA SDH has the following shelf dimensions e Height 6 Rack Units RUs 10 44 inches 26 51 cm Width 10 67 inches 27 10 cm Depth Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Appendix A Specifications Card Specifications 12 inches 20 5 cm without cables installed 13 7 inches 34 8 cm with cables installed Weight 25 Ibs 11 3 kg maximum line cards fan tray assembly and two electrical interface assemblies
281. e card plugs into the assembly backplane When no card is installed in a card slot a filler card should be installed Use a 15310E CTX K9 filler card in empty 15310 9 slots Slots 3 4 and an expansion filler card in empty traffic card slots Slots 1 2 5 and 6 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Figure 1 15 shows card installation for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Figure 1 15 Installing a Card in an ONS 15310 MA SDH Cards and Slots 144703 Table 1 10 lists the number of ports line rates connector options and connector locations for ONS 15310 MA SDH electrical Ethernet and optical interfaces Table 1 10 Port Line Rates Connector Types and Locations Connector Interface Ports Line Rate per Port Type Connector Location El 21 63 2 048 Mbps Champ Rear of the 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly DS 3 3 44 736 Mbps BNC Rear of the 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly E3 3 34 Mbps BNC Rear of the 15310 MA SDH shelf assembly STM1 STM4 STM16 2 155 52 Mbps VC4 15310E CTX K9 card 622 08 Mbps faceplate VC4 4c Ethernet CE 100T 8 card 8 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 CE 100T 8 card faceplate 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cards and
282. e filter so that only Critical alarms are displayed in the window If you enable the Filter feature by clicking the Filter tool in one CTC view such as node view it is enabled in the others as well card view and network view Synchronize button Updates the alarm display Although CTC displays alarms in real time the Synchronize button allows you to verify the alarm display This is particularly useful during provisioning or troubleshooting Delete Cleared Alarms Deletes from the view alarms that have been cleared button AutoDelete Cleared If checked CTC automatically deletes cleared alarms Alarms check box Filter tool Enables or disables alarm filtering in the card node or network view When enabled or disabled this state applies to other views for that node and for all other nodes in the network For example if the Filter tool is enabled in the node default login view Alarms window the network view Alarms window and card view Alarms window also show the tool enabled All other nodes in the network also show the tool enabled 10 2 3 Filtering Alarms The alarm display can be filtered to prevent display of alarms with certain severities or alarms that occurred between certain dates and times You can set the filtering parameters by clicking the Filter button at the bottom left of the Alarms window You can turn the filter on or off by clicking the Filter tool at the bottom right of the window CTC retains yo
283. e orderwire pin assignments Table 1 9 Orderwire Pin Assignments RJ 11 Pin Number Description Four wire receive ring Four wire transmit tip Two wire ring Two wire tip Four wire transmit ring ny Four wire receive tip When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist Loops cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel Figure 1 14 shows the standard RJ 11 connectors used for orderwire ports Use a shielded RJ 11 cable 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cards and Slots Figure 1 14 RJ 11 Cable Connector RJ 11 3 61077 1 11 Cards and Slots A Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15310 MA SDH For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge ESD and Grounding Guide The ONS 15310 MA SDH has six card slots Slots 3 and 4 are dedicated to the common control 15310E CTX K9 cards Slots 1 2 5 and 6 can accommodate the following traffic cards e Ethernet CE 100T 8 card ML 100T 8 CE MR 6 card Electrical E1 21 DS3 3 card E1 63 DS3 3 card These cards have plugs at the rear of the card When the ejectors are fully closed th
284. e settings refer to the Maintain the Node chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Cards that are not listed in this appendix are not supported by user configurable NE defaults settings To change card settings individually that is without directly changing the NE defaults refer to the Change Port Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide To change node settings refer to the Change Node Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide This appendix includes the following sections e Network Element Defaults Description page C 1 e C2 CTC Default Settings page C 2 e Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings page 2 e C 4 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings page C 29 C 1 Network Element Defaults Description The NE defaults are preinstalled on each Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH common control card Cisco also ships a file named 15310MA defaults txt for the ONS 15310 MA SDH on the CTC software CD if you want to import the defaults onto existing common control cards The NE defaults include card level CTC level and node level defaults Changes to card provisioning that are made manually using procedures in the Change Card Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide override default settings If you use the CTC Defaults editor on the node view Provisioning gt Defaults tab or import a new defaults file any changes to card or port settin
285. e version you are currently running CTC generates a message stating that a later version of CTC has been found in the network and offers to install the CTC software upgrade JAR files If you have network discovery disabled CTC will not seek more recent versions of the software Unreachable nodes are not included in the upgrade discovery Note Upgrading the CTC software will overwrite your existing software You must restart CTC after the upgrade is complete 4 2 CTC Installation Overview To connect to an ONS 15310 MA SDH using CTC enter the ONS 15310 MA SDH IP address in the URL field of Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer After connecting to an ONS 15310 MA SDH the following events occur automatically 1 The CTC launcher applet downloads from the 15310E CTX K9 card to your computer 2 The launcher determines whether your computer has a CTC release matching the release on the 15310E CTX K9 card 3 Ifthe computer does not have CTC installed or if the installed release is older than the 15310E CTX K9 card version the launcher downloads the CTC program files from the card 4 The launcher starts CTC The CTC session is separate from the web browser session so the web browser is no longer needed 5 You should always log into nodes having the latest software release unless you run the CTC setup wizard and install the ONS 15310 MA SDH JAR client software files on your computer If the JAR files are installed on your compu
286. earend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix Network Element Defaults Table C 3 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day AISS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day CV 3820 BIP 0 3715200 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day SAS 8 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min CV 15 Gl 0 2160000 count E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day CV
287. eature to reroute traffic using two circuits the following constraints apply e DCC must be enabled on the circuits involved in a roll before roll creation A maximum of two rolls can exist between any two circuits If two rolls are involved between two circuits both rolls must be on the original circuit The second circuit should not carry live traffic The two rolls loop from the second circuit back to the original circuit The roll mode of the two rolls must be identical either automatic or manual single roll exists on a circuit you must roll the connection onto the source or the destination of the second circuit and not an intermediate node in the circuit 19 5 Protected Circuits CTC allows you to roll the working or protect path regardless of which path is active You can upgrade an unprotected circuit to a fully protected circuit or downgrade a fully protected circuit to an unprotected circuit with the exception of a Linear Multiplex Section Protection circuit When using bridge and roll on Linear Multiplex Section Protection circuits you can roll the source or destination or both path selectors in a dual roll However you cannot roll a single path selector 7 10 Merged Circuits A circuit merge combines a single selected circuit with one or more circuits You can merge VC low order path tunnels LAP circuits orderwire and user data channel UDC overhead circuits CTC created traffic circuits and TL1 created traff
288. ecifications continued Transmitter Output Receiver Input Power SFP Product ID Interface Power Min Max dBm Min Max dBm ONS SI 100 FX FE ONS SI 100 LX10 FE ONS SE ZE EL E FE or GE ONS SE 100 BX10U FE 14 to 8 28 2 to 7 ONS SE 100 BX10D FE 14 to 8 28 2 to 7 1 Due to mechanical constraints related to the dimensions of the pluggable device two ONS SE ZE EL copper SFPs cannot be inserted in the same SFP double cage receptacle They can only be inserted into slots 1 or 2 3 or 4 and 5 or 6 Upto three ONS SE ZE EL copper SFPs can be inserted in one CE MR 6 card Table A 4 provides cabling specifications for the single mode fiber SMF SFPs that can be used with the ONS 15310 MA CTX 2500 The ports of the listed SFPs have LC type connectors Table A 5 provides cabling specifications for multimode fiber MMF SFPs that can only be used with the ONS 15310 MA CTX 2500 card Table A 4 Single Mode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications SFP Product ID Wavelength Fiber Type Cable Distance ONS SI 155 L1 Long Reach 1310 nm 9 micro SMF 50 km 31 07 miles ONS SI 155 L2 Long Reach 1550 nm 9 micro SMF 100 km 62 15 miles ONS SI 155 I 1 Intermediate Reach 1310 nm 9 micro SMF 21 km 13 05 miles ONS SI 622 L1 Long Reach 1310 nm 9 micron SMF 42 km 26 10 miles ONS SI 622 L2 Long Reach 1550 nm 9 micron SMF 85 km 52 82 miles ONS SI 622 I1 Intermediate Reach 1310 nm 9 micron
289. econd intervals containing one or more HP PPJC PGen or HP NPJC PGen HP PPJC Pdet High Order Positive Pointer Justification Count Path Detected HP PPJC Pdet is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal HP PPJC Pgen High Order Positive Pointer Justification Count Path Generated HP PPJC Pgen is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path HP SES High Order Path Severely Errored Seconds HP SES is a one second period containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES HP SESR High Order Path Severely Errored Second Ratio HP SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval HP UAS High Order Path Unavailable Seconds HP UAS is a count of the seconds when the VC path was unavailable A high order path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as HP SESs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as HP SESs Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Parameter Definition IOS Idle Ordered Sets IOS is
290. econds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds ms nearend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min EB 15 count 0 13305600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day EB 125 count 0 691200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1 day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path farend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1 5min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 CTX 2500 STM4 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1
291. ection routing option allows you to route the Subnetwork Connection Protection working path on one fiber pair and the protect path on a separate fiber pair Figure 7 2 The working path will always be the shortest path If a fault occurs neither the working or protection fibers are affected This feature only applies to bidirectional Subnetwork Connection Protection circuits The go and return option appears on the Circuit Attributes page of the Circuit Creation wizard Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EXAM 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Virtual Concatenated Circuits Figure 7 2 Subnetwork Connection Protection Go and Return Routing Node A i xX Node B Go and Return working connection SPR Go and Return protecting connection 96953 7 7 Virtual Concatenated Circuits Virtual concatenated VCAT circuits also called VCAT groups VCGs transport traffic using noncontiguous TDM time slots avoiding the bandwidth fragmentation problem that exists with contiguous concatenated CCAT circuits The ONS 15310 MA SDH cards that support VCAT circuits are the CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 cards In a VCAT circuit circuit bandwidth is divided into smaller circuits called VCAT members The individual members act as independent TDM circuits All VCAT members should be the same size and must originate terminate at the same end points To enable end to end connec
292. ects FALSE FALSE TRUE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SendDoNotUse FALSE TRUE FALSE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config State unlocked unlocked locked automaticInSer disabled locked vice maintenance unlocked automaticInService E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config SyncMsgIn FALSE FALSE TRUE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT config TreatLOFAsDefect FALSE FALSE TRUE E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 9 BPV 0 1388700 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 90 BPV 0 133315200 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1 day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min AISS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min BBE 9 count 0 287100 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min EB 9 count 0 450000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E1
293. ed Protected The circuit is protected by diverse SDH topologies for example a Linear Multiplex Section Protection and 1 1 Unknown A circuit has a source and destination on different nodes and communication is down between the nodes This protection type appears if not all circuit components are known Unprot black A circuit with a source and destination on different nodes is not protected 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Circuit Properties Table 7 2 Circuit Protection Types Protection Type Description Unprot red A circuit created as a fully protected circuit is no longer protected due to a system change such as removal of a 1 1 protection group SNCP 1 2 4 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuits Window You can edit a selected circuit using the Edit button on the Circuits window The tabs that appear depend on the circuit chosen General Displays general circuit information and allows you to edit the circuit name Monitors Displays possible monitor sources and allows you to create a monitor circuit Subnetwork Connection Protection Allows you to change linear multiplex section protection selectors For more information see the 7 6 Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits section on page 7 9 Subnetwork Connection Protection Switch Counts Allows you to change linear multiplex section
294. ed see the A 3 SFP Specifications section on page A 9 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Nm AppendixA Specifications Card Specifications Minimum transmitter output power Depends on the SFP used see the A 3 SFP Specifications section on page A 9 Center wavelength See wavelength plan Center wavelength accuracy 1 nm to 4 nm depending on the SFP used Transmitter DFB laser e Optical ports Receiver Maximum receiver level Depends on the SFP used see the A 3 SFP Specifications section on page A 9 Minimum receiver level Depends on the SFP used see the A 3 SFP Specifications section on page A 9 Receiver PIN PD Receiver input wavelength range Depends on the SFP used Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius I Temp 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity Power consumption 9 28 W 0 19 A 31 68 BTU hr e Dimensions Height 6 94 in 167 28 mm Width 1 45 in 36 83 mm Depth 8 35 in 212 09 mm Weight not including clam shell 1 6 Ib 0 73 kg LAN Port e Supports a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet interface for Cisco Transport Controller Transaction Language One CTC TL 1 provisioning CRAFT P
295. egories of alarms These include CR severity alarms severity alarms MN severity alarms the combined group of cleared Not Alarmed severity and Not Reported severity alarms Each category can store between 4 and 640 alarm chunks or entries In each category when the upper limit is reached the oldest entry in the category is deleted The capacity is not user provisionable CTC also has a log buffer separate from the alarm history log that pertains to the total number of entries displayed in the Alarms Conditions and History windows The total capacity is provisionable up to 5 000 entries When the upper limit is reached the oldest entries are deleted 10 3 Alarm Severities A condition may be Alarmed at a severity of Critical CR Major MJ or Minor MN with a severity of Not Alarmed NA or Not Reported NR These severities are reported in the CTC software Alarms Conditions and History windows at all levels network node and card ONS equipment provides a standard profile named Default that lists all alarms and conditions with severity settings but users can create their own profiles with different settings for some or all conditions and apply these wherever needed See the 10 4 Alarm Profiles section on page 10 9 for more information For example in a custom alarm profile the default severity of a carrier loss CARLOSS alarm on an Ethernet port can be changed from Major to Critical Critical and Major s
296. elease 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation ONS 15310 MA SDH Connection Table 4 1 CTC Computer Requirements continued Area Requirements Notes Web browser PC Internet Explorer 6 x 7x 8 x for For the PC use JRE 5 0 JRE 1 6 for Release 9 2 Release 9 2 with any supported web UNIX Workstation Mozilla 1 7 DIOE Netscape 4 76 Netscape 7 x The supported browser can be MacOS X PC Safari for Release 9 2 downloaded from the Web Cable User supplied CAT 5 straight through cable with RJ 45 connectors on each end to connect the computer to the ONS 15310 MA SDH directly or though a LAN Note To avoid network performance issues Cisco recommends managing a maximum of 50 nodes concurrently with CTC The 50 nodes can be on a single DCC or split across multiple DCCs Cisco does not recommend running multiple CTC sessions when managing two or more large networks To manage more than 50 nodes Cisco recommends using Cisco Transport Manager CTM If you do use CTC to manage more than 50 nodes you can improve performance by adjusting the heap size see the General Troubleshooting chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide You can also create login node groups see the Connect the PC and Log Into the GUI chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 4 4 ONS 15310 MA SDH Connection Table 4 2 lists the connection options and requi
297. elease 9 2 gru 78 19417 01 faceplate 2 16 LEDs 2 17 overview 2 3 release compatibility 2 3 resetting 4 19 specifications A 7 E 1 cable installing ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 15 E 1 ports line rate and connector type ONS 15310 MA 1 27 performance monitoring 11 14 E 3 ports line rate and connector type ONS 15310 MA 1 27 EB parameter definition 11 5 Edit Circuits window 7 6 editing alarm profiles 10 11 circuits 7 6 EIAs 1 5 electrical cards See also E1_21_E3_DS3_3 E1 63 DS3 3 card 1 1 protection 3 2 electrical codes 1 2 enabling a gateway using proxy 8 4 End System 8 28 enterprise LAN See corporate LAN ESCP PFE parameter definition 11 5 ESCP P parameter definition 11 5 ES L parameter definition 11 5 ES parameter definition 11 5 ES PM parameter definition 11 5 ES P parameter definition 11 5 ESP P parameter definition 11 5 ESR parameter definition 11 5 ESR PM parameter definition 11 5 ESR P parameter definition 11 5 ESR SM parameter definition 11 5 ES SM parameter definition 11 5 Ethernet cards default settings C 28 See also CE MR 6 card exporting circuit data 7 3 7 6 CTC data 4 15 external alarms and controls installing cable ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 18 provisioning 10 13 provisioning alarm input 10 13 provisioning control output 10 14 external firewalls 8 18 external switching commands 3 5 external timing 6 1 Index M F fan failure 1 24 fan power requirements 1 24 fans ONS 15310
298. en situation som kan leda till personskada Innan du utf r arbete p n gon utrustning m ste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och k nna till vanliga f rfaranden f r att f rebygga olyckor Anv nd det nummer som finns i slutet av varje varning f r att hitta dess vers ttning i de versatta s kerhetsvarningar som medf ljer denna anordning SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EH Preface FONTOS BIZTONS GI ELO R SOK Ez a figyelmezeto jel vesz lyre utal S r l svesz lyt rejto helyzetben van Mielott b rmely berendez sen munk t v gezte legyen figyelemmel az elektromos ramk r k okozta kock zatokra s ismerkedjen meg a szok sos balesetv delmi elj r sokkal A kiadv nyban szereplo figyelmeztet sek ford t sa a k sz l khez mell kelt biztons gi figyelmeztet sek k z tt tal lhat a ford t s az egyes figyelmeztet sek v g n l that sz m alapj n keresheto meg ORIZZE MEG EZEKET AZ UTAS T SOKAT
299. ences are typically one BITS level sources or two line level sources optically connected to a node with a BITS source The third reference is usually assigned to the internal clock provided on every ONS 15310 MA SDH CTX card However if you assign all three references to other timing sources the internal clock is always available as a backup timing reference The internal clock is a SETS G 813 in ONS 15310 MA SDH If a node becomes isolated timing is maintained at the SETS level The CTC Maintenance gt Timing gt Report tabs show current timing information for an ONS 15310 MA SDH including the timing mode clock state and status switch type and reference data 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter6 Timing Network Timing A Caution Mixed timing allows you to select both external and line timing sources However Cisco does not recommend its use because it can create timing loops Use mixed timing mode with caution 6 2 Network Timing Figure 6 1 shows an example of an ONS 15310 MA SDH network timing setup Node l is set to external timing One reference is set to BITS the two references are set to internal The BITS output pins on the CTX cards of Node 3 provide timing to outside equipment such as a digital access line multiplexer Figure 6 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Timing Example BITS source Node 1 Timing External Ref 1 BITS Ref 2 Intern
300. eriod If 0 is entered as the threshold value the PM parameter is disabled Change the threshold if the default value does not satisfy your error monitoring needs For example customers with a critical E1 installed for 911 calls must guarantee the best quality of service on the line therefore they lower all thresholds so that the slightest error raises a TCA When TCAs occur CTC displays them in the Alarms tab For example in Figure 11 1 T UASP P is shown under the Cond column The T indicates a threshold crossing alert For the El and E3 DS3 electrical ports on the 15310 MA SDH E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and E1 63 E3 DS3 3 cards RX or TX is appended to the TCA description see the red circles in Figure 11 1 RX indicates that the TCA is associated with the receive direction and TX indicates the TCA is associated with the transmit direction Figure 11 1 TCAs Displayed in CTC Fe cowboys6 Cisco Transport Controller RA l a gje 8 eje Te se zl wj cowboys6 slot 16 E1 42 0 CR Port 4fl unincked disahled automa nService fa Synchronize Filter Delete Cleared Alarms C AutoDelete Cleared Alarms For electrical ports only the receive direction is detected and appended to TCA descriptions The 1 and E3 DS3 ports for which RX is appended to TCA descriptions are shown in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Electrical Ports that Report RX Direction for TCAs Port Line Path Near End Far End Near End F
301. ers 7 14 Table 7 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH VCAT Card Capabilities 7 15 Table 7 8 Protection options for Open Ended VCAT Circuits 7 16 Table 7 9 ONS 15310 MA SDH Cards Ports Capable of J1 J2 Path Trace 7 17 Table 7 10 Roll Statuses 7 19 Table 8 1 General P Troubleshooting Checklist 8 2 Table 8 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH GNE and ENE Settings 8 13 Table 8 3 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules 8 15 Table 8 4 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When the Packet is Addressed to the ONS 15310 MA SDH 8 16 Table 8 5 Sample Routing Table Entries 8 17 Table 8 6 Ports Used by the 15310E CTX K9 8 18 Table 8 7 TCP IP and OSI Protocols 8 23 Table 8 8 NSAP Fields 8 25 Table 8 9 TARP PDU Fields 8 29 Table 8 10 TARP PDU Types 8 30 Table 8 11 TARP Timers 8 31 Table 8 12 TARP Processing Flow 8 31 Table 8 13 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Cisco IOS Commands 8 34 Table 8 14 OSI Actions from the CTC Node View Provisioning Tab 8 39 Table 8 15 OSI Actions from the CTC Maintenance Tab 8 39 Table 8 16 Differences Between an IPv6 Node and an IPv4 Node 8 41 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ec 78 19417 01 Table 10 1 Alarms Column Descriptions 10 2 Table 10 2 Color Codes for Alarm and Condition Severities 10 2 Table 10 3 VC high order path and Alarm Object Identification 10 3 Table 10 4 Alarm Display 10 4 Table 10 5 Conditions Display 10 6 Table 10 6 Conditions Column Description 10 6 Table 10 7 History Column Descripti
302. es thereby freeing the cross connect resources for other VC 12 circuits VC low order path aggregation points VAPs allow you to provision circuits from multiple VC 12 sources to a single VC high order path destination Like circuits a LAP has a source and a destination The source is the VC high order path grooming end the node where the VC 12 circuits are aggregated into a single VC high order path The LAP VC high order path must be an STMn port VC low order path matrix resources are not used on the LAP source node which is the key advantage of VAPs The LAP destination is the node where the VC 12 circuits originate Circuits can originate on any ONS 15310 MA SDH card or port 7 5 DCC Tunnels Each SDH frame provides four DCCs for network element NE Operations Administration Maintenance and Provisioning OAM amp P one on the SDH Section layer DCC1 and three on the SDH Line layer DCC2 DCC3 DCC4 The ONS 15310 MA SDH use the Section DCC RS DCC or Line DCC MS DCC for management and provisioning When multiple DCC channels exist between two neighboring nodes the ONS 15310 MA SDH balances traffic over the existing DCC channels using a load balancing algorithm This algorithm chooses a DCC for packet transport by considering packet size and DCC utilization You can tunnel third party SDH equipment across ONS 15310 MA SDH networks using one of two tunneling methods a traditional DCC tunnel or an IP encapsulated tunnel Cisco ON
303. ese circuits can be deleted if a topology upgrade fails For more information about in service topology upgrades see Chapter 9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades DROP PENDING A circuit is set to this status when a new circuit drop is being added 7 2 2 Circuit States The circuit service state is an aggregate of the cross connect states within the circuit e If all cross connects in a circuit are in the unlocked enabled service state the circuit service state is In Service unlocked Tf all cross connects in a circuit are in an Out of Service locked service state such as locked enabled maintenance Out of Service and Autonomous Automatic In Service locked disabled Automatic In Service or Out of Service and Management Disabled locked enabled disabled the circuit service state 1s locked PARTIAL is appended to the locked circuit service state when circuit cross connect states are mixed and not all states are unlocked enabled The locked PARTIAL state can occur during automatic or manual transitions between states locked PARTIAL can appear during a manual transition caused by an abnormal event such as a CTC crash or communication error or if one of the cross connects could not be changed Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide for troubleshooting procedures You can assign a state to circuit cross connects at two points During circuit creation you can set the state on the Create Circuit wizard
304. ess creates a new cross connect to receive the new signal When the roll completes the original cross connects are released You can use the bridge and roll feature for maintenance functions such as card or facility replacement or for load balancing You can perform a bridge and roll on the following ONS platforms ONS 15600 ONS 15600 SDH ONS 15454 ONS 15454 SDH and ONS 15310 MA SDH 19 1 Rolls Window The Rolls window lists information about a rolled circuit before the roll process is complete You can access the Rolls window by clicking the Circuits gt Rolls tabs in either network or node view Figure 7 6 shows the Rolls window Figure 7 6 Rolls Window Alarms Conditions History Circuits Provisioning Inventory Maintenance Circuits Roll From Circuit Roll To Circuit Roll State Roll Valid Signal Roll Mode Roll Path Roll From Path Roll To Path Rolls Rol Circuit Roll Circuit ROLL PENDING false Auto TECHDOC TECHDOC TECHDOC mm a Scope Node The Rolls window information includes Roll From Circuit The circuit with connections that will no longer be used when the roll process is complete Roll To Circuit The circuit that will carry the traffic when the roll process is complete The Roll To Circuit is the same as the Roll From Circuit if a single circuit is involved in a roll Roll State The roll status see the 7 9 2 Roll Status sect
305. et The PHY sends the Ethernet frame to the packet processor by means of the SMII interfaces for queuing in the respective packet buffer memory The packet processor performs packet processing packet switching and classification The Ethernet frames are then passed on to the POS mappers through the SMII interfaces The POS mappers terminate the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet traffic The Ethernet frames are extracted and buffered in POS mapper external memory Ethernet frames are encapsulated using one of the framing protocols PPP HDLC or GFP selected on a per port basis The encapsulated Ethernet frames are mapped into a configurable number of VC3 or VCAT low order payloads VC3 1v or VC3 2v The SPE from each POS mapper up to carrying encapsulated Ethernet frames are next passed onto the mux demux where the VC4 frames from both POS mappers are multiplexed to form an VC4 4c frame for transport over the SDH network by means of the BTC 48 ASIC Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EM 78 19417 01 Chapter 2 Card Reference ML 100T 8 Card Note Although the VC4 frames are multiplexed into an VC4 4c frame the frame carries at most an VC4 2c payload leaving half of the VC4 4c bandwidth free In the egress direction SDH to Ethernet the mux demux extracts the first and second VC4 SPEs from the VC4 4 frame it receives from the BTC 48 before sending it to the POS mapper The VC4 SDH SPEs c
306. everities are only used for service affecting alarms If a condition is set as Critical or Major by profile it will raise as a Minor alarm in the following situations na protection group if the alarm is on a standby entity side not carrying traffic e Ifthe alarmed entity has no traffic provisioned on it so no service is lost Because the alarm might be raised at two different levels the alarm profile pane shows Critical as CR MN and Major as MJ MN 10 4 Alarm Profiles The alarm profiles feature allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15310 MA SDH ports cards or nodes A created alarm profile can be applied to any node on the network Alarm profiles can be saved to a file and imported elsewhere in the network but the profile must be stored locally on a node before it can be applied to the node cards or ports 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Alarm Profiles CTC can store up to ten active alarm profiles at any time to apply to the node Custom profiles can take eight of these active profile positions Two other profiles Default profile and Inherited profile are reserved by the NE and cannot be edited The reserved Inherited profile allows port alarm severities to be governed by the card level severities or card alarm severities to be determined by the
307. f certain events such as changes to the manager Figure 12 2 illustrates these SNMP operations Figure 12 2 SNMP Agent Gathering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager NMS Network device et get next get bulk g v lt get response traps SNMP Manager MIB SNMP Agent 32632 A management system such as HP OpenView executes applications that monitor and control managed devices Management systems provide the bulk of the processing and memory resources required for network management One or more management systems must exist on any managed network Figure 12 3 illustrates the relationship between the three key SNMP components Figure 12 3 Example of the Primary SNMP Components Management Entity Agent 1 i 1 1 Management Management Management Database Database Database 33930 Managed Devices 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter12 SNMP BEN SNMP Version Support 12 3 SNMP Version Support The ONS 15310 MA SDH support SNMP v1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 traps and get requests The SNMP MIBs in the ONS 15310 MA SDH systems define alarms traps and status Through SNMP NMS applications can use a supported MIB to query a management agent The functional entities include Ethernet switches and SDH multiplexers Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for pro
308. f you do not compile MIBs the correct order one or more might not compile correctly Table 12 2 IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMP Agent Number Module Name Title Comments IANAifType MIB mib Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA ifType 1213 RFCI1213 MIB rfc1213 mib Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP based internets MIB II 1907 SNMPV2 MIB rfc1907 mib Management Information Base for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 1253 RFC1253 MIB rfc1253 mib OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 1493 BRIDGE MIB rfc1493 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges This defines MIB objects for managing MAC bridges based on the IEEE 802 1D 1990 standard between Local Area Network LAN segments 2819 RMON MIB rfc2819 mib Remote Network Monitoring MIB 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter12 SNMP B SNMP Management Information Bases Table 12 2 IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMP Agent Number Module Name Title Comments 2737 ENTITY MIB rfc2737 mib Entity MIB Version 2 2233 IF MIB rfc2233 mib Interfaces Group MIB using SMIv2 2358 EtherLike MIB rfc2358 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet like Interface Types 2493 PerfHist TC MIB rfc2493 mib Textual Conventions for MIB Modules Using Perform
309. face 0 0 10 10 10 10 24 IP Interface 0 1 10 10 20 10 24 DCN 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 aaaaaaaaaaaa 00 Router 1 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 20 24 Interface 0 1 10 10 30 10 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 bbbbbbbbbbbb 00 IP OSI di Vendor GNE 10 10 30 20 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 00 GRE tunnel 3 p OSI Nost only DCC LAPD lt Other vendor Es w ONS NE 1 10 10 30 30 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 134355 8 6 7 3 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2 ONS Node to Router Figure 8 20 shows an IP over CLNS tunnel from an ONS node to a router The other vendor NE has an OSI connection to a router on an IP DCN to which a CTC computer is attached An OSI only LAP D RS DCC is created between the ONS NE and the other vender GNE The OSI over IP tunnel can be either the Cisco IP tunnel or a GRE tunnel depending on the tunnel types supported by the router Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EX Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning on ONS NE 1 Destination 10 10 30 10 Router 1 Interface 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 255 for host route Router 1 only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet route all routers on the same subnet NSAP 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 bbbbbbbbbbbb 00 Router 1 Metric 110 Tunnel Type Cisco IP CTunnel
310. fault is TCC Fixed 57790 access list 100 remark Inbound ACL CTC gt NE access list 100 remark access list 100 permit tcp host 192 168 10 10 host 10 10 10 100 eq www access list 100 remark allows initial contact with the 15310 MA SDH using http port 80 access list 100 remark access list 100 permit tcp host 192 168 10 10 host 10 10 10 100 eq 1080 access list 100 remark allows CTC communication with the 15310 MA SDH GNE proxy server port 1080 access list 100 remark access list 100 permit tcp host 192 168 10 10 host 10 10 10 100 established access list 100 remark allows ACKs from CTC to the 15310 MA SDH GNE access list 101 remark Outbound ACL NE gt CTC access list 101 remark access list 101 permit tcp host 10 10 10 100 eq 1080 host 192 168 10 10 access list 101 remark allows alarms and other communications from the 15310 MA SDH proxy server port 683 access list 100 remark access list 101 permit tcp host 10 10 10 100 host 192 168 10 10 established access list 101 remark allows ACKs from the 15310 MA SDH GNE to CTC to the CTC workstation 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity Open GNE 8 5 Open GNE The ONS 15310 MA SDH can communicate with non ONS nodes that do not support point to point protocol PPP vendor extensions or OSPF type 10 opaque li
311. feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application The RSS feeds are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2 0 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Preface Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Eva 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware This chapter provides a description of Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf hardware Instructions for installing equipment are provided in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include e 1 1 Installation Overview page 1 1 e 1 2 Rack Installation page 1 2 e 1 3 Electrical Interface Assemblies page 1 5 1 6 Power and Ground Description page 1 7 e 1 7 Shelf Temperature page 1 10 e 1 8 Cable Description and Installation page 1 10 e 1 10 Fan Tray Assembly page 1 23 e 1 11 Cards and Slots page 1 26 1 1 Installation Overview You can mount the ONS 15310 MA SDH in a 19 inch 482 6 mm or 600x600 mm ETSI rack The ONS 15310 MA SDH is powered using 48 VDC power DC power connections are accessed from the rear of the shelf assembly ONS 15310 MA SDH Ethernet and optical ports are accessible at the front of the shelf assembly and electrical connections E1 E3 DS3 are accessible at the rear of the shelf assembly through electrical interface assemblies EIAs When installed in an equipment rack the ONS 15310
312. ference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults Table C 4 63 DS3 3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1 day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day EB 125 count 0 691200000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day ES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min BBE 25 count 0 2159100 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 7200000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1 day BBE 250 count 0 207273600 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1day EB 125 count 0 691200000 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 E3 PORT pmthresholds vc4 nearend 1 day ES 100 0 8
313. for the same circuit In Figure 9 11 the circuits on the STM4 path are unprotected The DS3 E3 drop traffic is protected on the drop nodes by provisioning a primary and secondary destination making it a path protected circuit 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Overlay Ring Circuits Figure 9 11 Overlay Ring Circuit DS3 PASS THRU N EN No ep gt Node E AN S STM4 e STM1 Pan M X Path Protection DS3 DROP NYHL SSVd ESA Core Subtended 7 Subtended s EUR Path Ring Ring ur Protection gt I I I I _ Um Fo GROG ____ 093 CIRCUIT I I ss ne oor STM1 OVERLAY RING DS3 DROP Overlay ring supports circuit sizes VC 3 VC4 VC4 2c VC4 3c VC4 4c VC4 8c VC4 12c VC4 16c and VC4 64c Both unidirectional and bidirectional circuits are supported Overlay ring circuits are contiguous concatenated CCAT and not virtual concatenated VCAT circuits 271891 Manual routing is mandatory while provisioning the overlay ring circuit Overlay ring circuits created using Transaction Language 1 TL1 are discovered by CTC and the status DISCOVERED is displayed If the overlay ring circuit is deleted the cross connects on the core ring and subtended rings get deleted Cross connects on a subtended ring can be deleted through TL1 but would reflect as a partial over
314. formation bases MIBs to convey node level inventory fault and performance management information for E1 DS3 SDH and Ethernet read only management SNMP allows limited management of the ONS 15310 MA SDH by a generic SNMP manager for example HP OpenView Network Node Manager NNM or Open Systems Interconnection OSI NetExpert The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports SNMP Version 1 SNMPv1 SNMP Version 2c SNMPv2c and SNMP Version 3 SNMPv3 As compared to SNMPv1 SNMPv2c includes additional protocol operations SNMPv3 provides authentication encryption and message integrity and is more secure This chapter describes the SNMP versions and explains how to configure SNMP on the ONS 15310 MA SDH 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter12 SNMP SNMP Basic Components Note It is recommended that the SNMP Manager timeout value be set to 60 seconds Under certain conditions if this value is lower than the recommended time the TCC card can reset However the response time depends on various parameters such as object being queried complexity and number of hops in the node etc In Release 9 1 and 9 2 you can retrieve automatic in service state and soak time through the SNMP and Transaction Language One TL 1 interfaces The CERENT MSDWDM MIB mib and CERENT FC MIB mib in the CiscoV2 directory support 64 bit performance monitoring counters However th
315. fter a specified time interval with the enable FTP relay function Once FTP host are provisioned and FTP Relay is enabled TL1 users can then use the COPY RFILE command to perform database backup restore or software download to and from this list of legal FTP hosts that are provisioned to ENEs Also TL1 supports TID to IP address translation for the GNE TID that is specified in the FTP URL of COPY RFILE and COPY IOSCFG commands Using the FTP Host provisioning feature CTC and TL1 you can configure up to 12 valid FTP hosts ENEs are allowed access through the firewall according to the time configured in the FTP Relay Timer in CTC or TL1 The time interval is 1 to 60 minutes and once the timer elapses all FTP access to the FTP host is blocked again A time of 0 disallows ENE access to FTP commands through the firewall When the firewall is not enabled Proxy only all FTP operations to the ENE will be allowed software download database backup restore and IOS config file backup restore All FTP operations to the ENEs will be blocked when firewall is enabled Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EN 78 19417 01 amp CHAPTER SDH Topologies and Upgrades Note The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms
316. fter the DS3 path becomes unavailable it becomes available when ten consecutive seconds with no SESP Ps occur The ten seconds with no SESP Ps are excluded from unavailable time UAS SM Section Monitoring Unavailable Seconds UAS SM indicates the unavailable seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval UNC WORDS The number of uncorrectable words detected in the DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval VPC A count of received packets that contain non errored data code groups that have start and end delimiters 1 4 fiber MS SPRing is not supported on the STM 4 and STM4 SH 1310 4 cards therefore the MS PSC S and MS PSC R PM parameters do not increment Note PPJC PGEN P NPJC PGEN P and PJCS PGEN P are not supported Cisco ONS 15310 SDH R9 1 and 9 2 11 5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports The following sections define PM parameters for the E1 and DS3 electrical ports 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports 11 5 1 E1 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 11 2 shows the signal types that support near end and far end PM parameters Figure 11 2 Monitored Signal Types for the E1 Ports PTE ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH Er E1 Signal E1 STM N Fiber STM N Eras E1 XX PMs Near and Far En
317. fy that RADIUS messages with the exception of the Access Request message are sent by a RADIUS enabled device that is configured with the same shared secret Verify that the RADIUS message has not been modified in transit message integrity Encrypt some RADIUS attributes such as User Password and Tunnel Password When creating and using a shared secret Use the same case sensitive shared secret on both RADIUS devices e Use a different shared secret for each RADIUS server RADIUS client pair e Generate a random sequence at least 22 characters long to ensure a random shared secret Use any standard alphanumeric and special characters Use a shared secret of up to 128 characters in length To protect your server and your RADIUS clients from brute force attacks use long shared secrets more than 22 characters Make the shared secret a random sequence from each of the following three categories letters upper or lower case numbers and punctuation Change the shared secret often to protect your server and your RADIUS clients from dictionary attacks An example of a strong shared secret is 8d gt 9fq4bV H7 a3 zE13sW hla32M m lt PqAa72 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 arm Chapter5 Security B RADIUS Security Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EXAM 78 19417 01 CHAPTER This chapter provides information about C
318. g Optical Networking Information This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products For information that pertains to all of Cisco refer to the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section Where to Find Safety and Warning Information For safety and warning information refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document that accompanied the product This publication describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15310 system It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15310 system documentation Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM Optical networking related documentation including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation is available in a CD ROM package that ships with your product The Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For information on obtaining documentation submitting a service request and gathering additional information see the monthly What s New in Cisco Product Documentation which also lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation at http www cisco com en US docs general whatsnew whatsnew html Subscribe to the What s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication RSS
319. g a valid Ethernet signal carrier from the attached Ethernet device up means present and down means not present iflnOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing octets txTotalPkts The total number of transmit packets ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol iflnErrors Number of inbound packets discarded because they contain errors ifOutOctets The total number of transmitted octets including framing packets rxTotalPkts The total number of receive packets ifOutOversizePkts Number of packets larger than 1518 bytes sent out into SDH Packets larger than 1600 bytes do not get transmitted mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC A count of the received Fibre Channel frames with errored CRCs hdlcRxAborts Number of received packets aborted before input ifInPayloadCRCErrors The number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors ifOutPayloadCRCErrors The number of transmit data frames with payload CRC errors ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their transmission A possible reason for discarding such packets could be to create buffer space amp Note ifOutDiscards is not supported on ML cards Table 11 10 defines the CE 10
320. g power specifications e AC input power Minimum 15 A e AC input voltage 230Vac 50Hz 16 A single phase Line Neutral Ground A 4 2 Environmental Specifications The Purcell FLX25GT cabinet and accessories has the following environmental specifications AC power Europe other countries w same AC power Minimum required rate maximum operating temperature for ONS 15310 MA SDH 0 93 m3 min 33 CFM Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 AppendixA Specifications Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications Minimum required rate maximum operating temperature for ONS 15310 MA SDH cabinet NA e Maximum allowable rate for ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 02 m3 min 36 CFM e Maximum allowable rate for ONS 15310 MA SDH cabinet NA Volumetric flow rate for ONS 15310 MA 0 93 to 1 02 m3 min e Volumetric flow rate for ONS 15310 MA SDH cabinet NA e Pressure drop through equipment for minimum required and maximum allowable flow rates for 15310 MA SDH 0 44 inch e Pressure drop through equipment for minimum required and maximum allowable flow rates for 15310 MA SDH cabinet 1 36 wg Heat dissipation for maximum load and minimum load on ONS 15310 MA SDH stand alone full chassis 234 W Heat dissipation for maximum load and minimum load on cabinet AC power with fully populated 15310 MA 390 W e Heat dissipation for maximum load and minimum load on ONS 15310 MA SDH stand al
321. ge 8 40 e 8 9 FTP Support for ENE Database Backup page 8 42 Note This chapter does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts and procedures nor does it provide IP addressing examples to meet all networked scenarios For networking setup instructions refer to the Turn Up a Node chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Note To connect ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes to an IP network you must work with a LAN administrator or other individual at your site who has IP networking training and experience 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity HIP Networking Overview 8 1 IP Networking Overview ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes can be connected in many different ways within an IP environment They can be connected to LANs through direct connections or a router IP subnetting can create ONS 15310 MA SDH login node groups which allow you to provision non data communications channel DCC connected nodes in a network Different IP functions and protocols can be used to achieve specific network goals For example Proxy Address Resolution Protocol ARP enables one LAN connected ONS 15310 MA SDH to serve as a gateway for ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes that are not connected to the LAN You can create static routes to enable connections among multiple Cisco Transport Controller CTC sessions with ONS 15310 MA SDH
322. gement Network Connectivity IPv6 Native Support MI You can manage MSTP multishelf nodes over IPv6 DCN RADIUS FTP SNTP and other network applications support IPv6 DCN To enable IPv6 addresses you need to make the necessary configuration changes from the CTC or TL1 management interface After you enable IPv6 you can start a CTC or TL1 session using the provisioned IPv6 address The ports used for all IPv6 connections to the node are the same as the ports used for IPv4 An NE can either be in IPv6 mode or IPv4 mode In IPv4 mode the LAN interface does not have an IPv6 address assigned to it An NE whether it is IPv4 or IPv6 has an IPv4 address and subnet mask TCC2 TCC2P cards do not reboot automatically when you provision an IPv6 address but a change in IPv4 address initiates a TCC2 TCC2P card reset Table 8 16 describes the differences between an IPv4 node and an IPv6 node Table 8 16 Differences Between an IPv6 Node and an IPv4 Node IPv6 Node IPv4 Node Has both IPv6 address and IPv4 address assigned Does not have an IPv6 address assigned to its craft to its craft Ethernet interface Ethernet interface The default router has an IPv6 address for IPv6 The default router has an IPv4 address connectivity and an IPv4 address for IPv4 connectivity Cannot enable OSPF on LAN Cannot change Can enable OSPF on the LAN IPv4 NE to IPv6 NE if OSPF is enabled on the LAN Cannot enable RIP on the LAN Cannot change Can enable
323. generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This section explains the objectives intended audience and organization of this publication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information This section provides the following information e Revision History Document Objectives e Audience Related Documentation Document Conventions e Obtaining Optical Networking Information e Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request Revision History Date Notes December 2009 Updated Figure1 7 ACS Cable T015654 in Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware February 2010 Added section 1 5 Rear Cover to Chapter Cisco ONs 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware April 2010 Added a note in section SNMP Overview in the chapter SNMP July 2010 e Updated the section SFP Specifications in the appendix Specifications e Updated the section CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 Cards in the appendix Specifications 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Preface Date Notes November 2010 e Added the section Open Ended VCAT in the chapter Circuits and Tunnels e Updated the t
324. gh Cisco Transport Controller CTC Cisco Transport Manager CTM Transaction Language 1 TL1 and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EXE 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference CE MR 6 Card Figure 2 4 shows the CE MR 6 card faceplate and block diagram Figure 2 4 CE MR 6 Faceplate and Block Diagram CE MR 6 FAIL ACT STBY VCAT 100FX O s s Memory SGMII Packet Processing Engine 16Mx36 SERDES RLDRAM2 2 SFP lt gt BcM5482s ROMII sn Main 2 5 Gbps gt Dual PHY Ivds SFP SPHA2 gt lt gt i Protect 2 5 Gbps B 2 Ivds 5 lt gt FP x 1 2 SFP lt 28 FOM 2 FCC1 Super SFP lt gt Dual PHY Carrera SCL IXF1012 MP3 ASIC lt gt a 10G MAC FPGA i Intercard Main 54828 RGMII E BCM5325M T 1 ntercar grep lt gt Dual PHY lt lt gt lt gt RLDRAM FE SW 3 4 hts ME NEN
325. ght Ethernet port RJ 45 connectors The LEDs are described in Table 2 9 Table 2 9 ML 100T 8 Port Level Indicators Port Level Indicators Description ACT LED Amber A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected but there is an issue inhibiting traffic A blinking amber LED means traffic is flowing LINK LED Green A steady green LED indicates that a link is detected but there is no traffic A blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port Both ACT and LINK LED Unlit LEDs indicate no traffic OFF 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter2 Card Reference Fi 21 053 3and E1 63 053 3 Cards 26 E1 21 053 E1 63 053 3 Cards N Note For hardware specifications see the 2 5 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and E1 63 E3 DS3 3 Cards section on page A 7 The ONS 15310 MA SDH E1_21_E3_DS3_3 and E1_63_E3_DS3_3 cards provide 21 and 63 ITU Compliant G 703 E1 ports respectively as well as three E3 DS3 ports Each E1 port operates at 2 048 Mbps Each E3 DS3 port operates at 34 368 Mbps 44 736 Mbps over a single 75 ohm 728 A or equivalent coaxial span These cards can operate as a working or protect card in 1 1 protection schemes In addition the E1_21_E3_DS3_3 card provides retiming so that any outgoing E1 signal can be retimed to eliminate accumulated jitter and
326. gin and node access policies e Password length expiration and reuse Superusers can configure the password length using NE defaults The password length by default is set to a minimum of six and a maximum of 20 characters You can configure the default values in CTC node view using the Provisioning NE Defaults Node security password Complexity tabs The minimum length can be set to eight ten or twelve characters and the maximum length to 80 characters The password must be a combination of alphanumeric a z A Z 0 9 and special characters where at least two characters are nonalphabetic and at least one character is a special character Superusers can specify when users must change their passwords and how frequently passwords can be reused Login attempts and locking out users Superusers can specify the maximum number of times that a user can unsuccessfully attempt to log in before being locked out of CTC Superusers can also provision the length of time before the lockout is removed e Disabling users Superusers can provision the length of time before inactive user IDs are disabled e Node access and user sessions Superusers can limit the number of CTC sessions one user can have and they can prohibit access to the ONS 15310 MA SDH using the LAN connection Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter5 Security Audit Trail MI e Secure shell S
327. graphical representations of shelves cards or tabs This option does not apply to all windows refer to the print task in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for specifics The Table Contents option prints all the data contained in a table with the same column headings For example if you print the History window Table Contents view you print all data included in the table whether or not items appear in the window 4 7 Using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes The CTC Launcher application is an executable file StartCTC exe that is provided on Software Release 9 1 and 9 2 CDs for Cisco ONS products You can use CTC Launcher to log into multiple ONS nodes that are running CTC Software Release 3 3 or higher without using a web browser CTC Launcher provides two connection options The first option is used to connect to ONS network elements NEs that have an IP connection to the CTC computer The second option is used to connect to ONS NEs that reside behind third party OSI based gateway network elements GNEs For this option CTC Launcher creates a TL1 tunnel to transport the TCP traffic through the OSI based GNE The TL1 tunnel transports the TCP traffic to and from ONS end network elements ENEs through the OSI based GNE TL 1 tunnels are similar to the existing static IP over CLNS tunnels GRE and Cisco IP that can be created at ONS NEs using CTC Refer to the Cisco ONS product documentation for informat
328. gs only affect cards that are installed or preprovisioned after the defaults have changed 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix Network Element Defaults CTC Default Settings Changes that are made manually to most node level default settings override the current settings whether default or provisioned If you change node level default settings either by using the Defaults editor or by importing a new defaults file the new defaults reprovision the node immediately for all settings except those relating to protection 1 1 bidirectional switching 1 1 reversion time and 1 1 revertive Settings relating to protection apply to subsequent provisioning Note Changing some node level provisioning through NE defaults can cause CTC disconnection or a reboot of the node in order for the provisioning to take effect Before you change a default check in the Side Effects column of the Defaults editor right click a column header and select Show Column gt Side Effects and be prepared for the occurrence of any side effects listed for that default C 2 CTC Default Settings Table C 1 lists the CTC level default settings for the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH CTC level settings affect CTC sessions for the entire network Cisco provides the following types of user configurable defaults for CTC e Automatic Routing Set circuit creation with the Route Automatically check box sele
329. gurations The ONS 15310 MA SDH supports the following configurations e Two fiber path protection e 1 1 protection Extended SNCP Add drop multiplexer ADM e Point to point PPP terminal mode Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix A Specifications Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Specifications A 1 6 LEDs Table A 1 describes the system level LEDs located on the on the ONS 15310 MA SDH fan tray and the possible LED colors and their significance Table A 1 LED Description LED Color and Meaning FAIL Red indicates system failure or during initialization CR Red indicates a critical alarm is present on the shelf assembly MJ Red indicates a major alarm is present on the shelf assembly MN Amber indicates a minor alarm is present on the shelf assembly REM Red indicates a remote alarm is present on the shelf assembly PWRA Green indicates that a DC power source present and within normal operating PWRB range Red indicates that DC power source is not present or is present and not within normal operating range A 1 7 Push Buttons The ONS 15310 MA SDH has the following push buttons Lamp test When momentarily pushed lights all LEDs on the ONS 15310 MA SDH front panel If an LED has more than one color all the colors will be cycled when the lamp test button is pushed S Note Another use for the lamp test button is to
330. h different access policies based on the MIB contexts MIB views Define a set of managed objects as subtrees and families A view is a collection or family of subtrees Each subtree is included or excluded from the view Access policy Access is determined by the identity of the user security level security model context and the type of access read write The access policy defines what SNMP objects can be accessed for reading writing and creating Access to information can be restricted based on these elements Each view is created with different access control details An operation is permitted or denied based on the access control details You can configure SNMPv3 on a node to allow SNMP get and set access to management information and configure a node to send SNMPv3 traps to trap destinations in a secure way SNMPv3 can be configured in secure mode non secure mode or disabled mode SNMP when configured in secure mode only allows SNMPv3 messages that have the authPriv security level SNMP messages without authentication or privacy enabled are not allowed When SNMP is configured in non secure mode it allows SNMPv1 SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 message types 12 4 SNMP Message Types The ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMP agents communicate with an SNMP management application using SNMP messages Table 12 1 describes these messages Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EM 78 19417 01 Chapter 12 S
331. h the DCC However the DCC connected machines cannot communicate with the LAN connected machines and the LAN connected machines cannot communicate with the DCC connected machines A CTC client using the LAN to connect to the firewall enabled node can use the proxy capability to manage the DCC connected nodes that would otherwise be unreachable A CTC client connected to a DCC connected node can only manage other DCC connected nodes and the firewall itself Gateway Network Element GNE If set as a GNE the CTC computer is visible to other DCC connected nodes and firewall is enabled Proxy only If Proxy only is selected CTC cannot communicate with any other DCC connected ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes and firewall is not enabled Note If you launch CTC against a node through a NAT Network Address Translation or PAT Port Address Translation router and that node does not have proxy enabled your CTC session starts and initially appears to be fine However CTC never receives alarm updates and disconnects and reconnects every two minutes If the proxy is accidentally disabled it is still possible to enable the proxy during a reconnect cycle and recover your ability to manage the node even through a NAT PAT firewall Note ENEs that belong to different private subnetworks do not need to have unique IP addresses Two ENEs that are connected to different GNEs can have the same IP address However ENEs that connect to the same
332. he ONS 15310 MA SDH do not support a real time clock with battery backup Therefore when you reset 15310E CTX K9 card the audit log is reset to 1970 until you set the date and time again 5 3 1 Audit Trail Log Entries Audit trail records capture various types of activities Individual audit entries contain some or all of the following information e User Name of the user performing the action e Host Host from where the activity is logged Device ID IP address of the device involved in the activity e Application Name of the application involved in the activity Task Name of the task involved in the activity view a dialog box apply configuration and so on Connection Mode The service used to connect to the node for example Telnet console or Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e Category Type of change Hardware Software or Configuration e Status Status of the user action Read Initial Successful Timeout or Failed Time Time of change Message Type Denotes whether the event succeeded or failed Message Details A description of the change Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter5 Security B RADIUS Security 5 3 2 Audit Trail Capacities The ONS 15310 MA SDH is able to store 640 log entries When this limit is reached the oldest entries are overwritten with new events When the log server is 80 percent full a
333. he ONS 15310 MA SDH perform IPPM by examining the overhead in the monitored path and by reading all of the near end path PM parameters in the incoming direction of transmission The IPPM process allows the path signal to pass bidirectionally through the node completely unaltered For detailed information about specific PM parameters locate the card name in the following sections and review the appropriate definition 11 3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations Pointer justification counts indicate timing errors on SDH networks When a network is out of sync jitter and wander occurs on the transported signal Excessive wander can cause terminating equipment to slip It also causes slips at the synchronous digital hierarchy SDH and plesiochronous digital hierarchy PDH boundaries Slips cause different effects in service Voice service has intermittent audible clicks Compressed voice technology has short transmission errors or dropped calls Fax machines lose scanned lines or experience dropped calls Digital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames Encryption service loses the encryption key causing data to be transmitted again Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in VC high order path and VC low order path payloads The VC high order path payload pointer is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead Clocking differences
334. he severities listed in the table CTC alarm profiles list inherited I and unset U severities Table 10 2 Color Codes for Alarm and Condition Severities Color Description Red Raised Critical CR alarm Orange Raised Major MJ alarm Yellow Raised Minor MN alarm m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Viewing Alarms Table 10 2 Color Codes for Alarm and Condition Severities continued Color Description Magenta Raised Not Alarmed NA condition Blue Raised Not Reported NR condition White Cleared C alarm or condition In network view CTC identifies VC high order path and VC low order path alarm objects using a TL1 type AID as shown in Table 10 3 Table 10 3 VC high order path and Alarm Object Identification VC high order path and VC low order path Alarm Numbering MON Object Optical Syntax and Examples STM1 STM4 VC high order path Syntax VC lt Slot gt lt Ppm gt lt Port gt lt VC gt Ranges VC 2 1 2 1 1 n Example VC 2 1 1 6 STM1 STM4 VC low order path Syntax VT1 lt Slot gt lt Ppm gt lt Port gt lt VC gt lt VT Group gt lt VT gt Ranges VT1 2 1 2 1 1 n 1 7 1 4 Example VT1 2 1 1 6 1 1 TERM Object Electrical Syntax and Examples E1 VC high order path Syntax VC lt Slot gt lt VC gt Ranges
335. her a password change is required on first login to a new account set password aging enforcement and user level specific aging and warning periods set how many consecutive identical characters are allowed in a password maximum password length minimum password length minimum number and combination of nonalphabetical characters required and whether or not to allow a password that is a reversal of the login ID associated with the password e BITS Timing settings Set the AIS threshold coding framing State and State Out settings for BITS 1 and BITS 2 timing e General Timing settings Set the mode External Line or Mixed quality of reserved RES timing the rule that defines the order of clock quality from lowest to highest revertive reversion time and synchronization status messaging SSM message set for node timing Note Any node level defaults changed using the Provisioning Defaults tab changes existing node level provisioning Although this is service affecting it depends on the type of defaults changed for example general and all timing and security attributes The Changing default values for some node level attributes overrides the current provisioning message is displayed The Side Effects column of the Defaults editor right click a column header and select Show Column Side Effects explains the effect of changing the default values However when the card level defaults are changed using the Provisioning
336. hernet Cards 11 6 1 2 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card Ether Ports Utilization Window The Ether Ports Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the Ethernet ports during consecutive time segments The Ether Ports Utilization window provides an Interval drop down list that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute 15 minutes 1 hour and 1 day Line utilization for Ethernet ports is calculated with the following formulas Rx inOctets inPkts 20 8 100 interval maxBaseRate Tx outOctets outPkts 20 8 100 interval maxBaseRate The interval is defined in seconds The maxBaseRate is defined by raw bits per second in one direction for the Ethernet port that is 1 Gbps The maxBaseRate for CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Ethernet cards is shown in Table 11 7 Table 11 7 maxBaseRate for VC high order path Circuits VC high order path maxBaseRate VC3 51840000 VC4 155000000 VC4 2c 311000000 VC4 4c 622000000 Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity 11 6 1 3 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card Ether Ports History Window The Ether Ports History window lists past Ethernet statistics for the previous time intervals Depending on the selected time interval the Ether Ports History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown i
337. hierarchical routing protocol that floods the network with link state information to build a complete consistent picture of a network topology IS IS distinguishes between Level 1 and Level 2 ISs Level 1 ISs communicate with other Level 1 ISs in the same area Level 2 ISs route between Level 1 areas and form an intradomain routing backbone Level 1 ISs need to know only how to get to the nearest Level 2 IS The backbone routing protocol can change without impacting the intra area routing protocol OSI routing begins when the ESs discover the nearest IS by listening to ISH packets When an ES wants to send a packet to another ES it sends the packet to one of the ISs on its directly attached network The router then looks up the destination address and forwards the packet along the best route If the destination ES is on the same subnetwork the local IS knows this from listening to ESHs and forwards Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity 8 6 5 TARP TCP IP and OSI Networking the packet appropriately The IS also might provide a redirect RD message back to the source to tell it that a more direct route is available If the destination address is an ES on another subnetwork in the same area the IS knows the correct route and forwards the packet appropriately If the destination address is an ES in another area the Level 1 IS sends the packe
338. hin the subnet The existing proxy server replies to ARP requests for these additional hosts with the node MAC address The existence of the host route in the routing table ensures that the IP packets addressed to the additional hosts are routed properly Other than establishing a static route between a node and an additional host no provisioning is necessary The following restrictions apply Only one node acts as the proxy ARP server for any given additional host A node cannot be the proxy ARP server for a host connected to its Ethernet port In Figure 8 4 Node 1 announces to Node 2 and 3 that it can reach the CTC host Similarly Node 3 announces that it can reach the ONS 152xx The ONS 152xx is shown as an example any network element can be set up as an additional host 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 4 Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing CTC Workstation IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway LANA ONS 15310 1 IP Address 192 168 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A lt Routes Destination 192 168 1 100 Mask 255 255 255 0 Next Hop 192 168 1 10 SDH ONS 152xx IP Address 192 168 1 31 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 ONS 15310 2 ONS 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 1 2
339. ic circuits To merge circuits you choose a master circuit on the CTC Circuits tab Then you choose the circuits that you want to merge with the master circuit on the Merge tab in the Edit Circuits window The Merge tab shows only the circuits that are available for merging with the master circuit Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels Reconfigured Circuits e Circuit cross connects must create a single contiguous path e Circuits types must be a compatible For example you can combine a VC high order path circuit with a LAP circuit to create a longer LAP circuit but you cannot combine a VC low order path circuit with a VC high order path circuit e Circuit directions must be compatible You can merge a one way and a two way circuit but not two one way circuits in opposing directions e Circuit sizes must be identical Circuit endpoints must send or receive the same framing format The merged circuits must become a DISCOVERED circuit If all connections from the master circuit and all connections from the merged circuits align to form one complete circuit the merge is successful If all connections from the master circuit and some but not all connections from the other circuits align to form a single complete circuit CTC notifies you and gives you the chance to cancel the merge process If you choose to continue the aligned connecti
340. ication of a TID or Protocol occurs locally for example a TID or Address change at the NE that originates the NSAP change It might also be sent notification The PDU is sent to all adjacencies inside when an NE initializes and outside the NE s routing area 5 Sent when a device needs a TID that When a Type 5 PDU is sent the CLNP destination corresponds to a specific NSAP address is known so the PDU is sent to only that address Type 5 PDUs do not use the TARP propagation procedures 8 6 5 1 TARP Processing A TARP data cache TDC is created at each NE to facilitate TARP processing In CTC the TDC is displayed and managed on the node view Maintenance gt OSI gt TDC subtab The TDC subtab contains the following TARP PDU fields TID TID of the originating NE tar tor e NSAP NSAP of the originating NE Type Indicates whether the TARP PDU was created through the TARP propagation process dynamic or manually created static Provisionable timers shown in Table 8 11 control TARP processing Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking Table 8 11 TARP Timers Default Range Timer Description seconds seconds El Waiting for response to TARP Type 1 Request PDU 15 0 3600 T2 Waiting for response to TARP Type 2 Request PDU 25 0 3600 DS3 E3 Waiting for response to
341. ice states static routes 8 7 STMI ports span upgrade 9 8 STMA ports span upgrade 9 8 string 7 17 STS CV P parameter 11 3 STS ES P parameter 11 3 STS SES P parameter 11 3 STS UAS P parameter 11 3 subnet CTC and nodes on different subnets 8 3 CTC and nodes on same subnet 8 3 multiple subnets on the network 8 6 using static routes 8 7 with Proxy 8 5 subnet mask access to nodes 8 8 destination host or network 8 16 subtending rings 9 4 Superuser description 5 1 granting Superuser privileges to Provisioning users 5 6 idle user timeout 5 6 network level actions 5 4 node level actions 5 2 special privileges 5 6 suppressing alarms 10 12 10 13 SW LCAS 7 14 synchronization status messaging See SSM synchronizing alarms 10 4 synchronous payload envelope clocking differences 11 3 T tabs overview 4 7 card view 4 14 network view 4 12 node view 4 10 TARP LDP 8 31 manual adjacencies 8 32 manual TID to NSAP provisioning 8 32 MAT 8 32 overview 8 29 PDU fields 8 29 PDU types 8 30 processing 8 30 processing flow 8 31 TDC 8 30 timers 8 31 TCA displayed in 11 2 IPPM paths 11 3 TCP IP 8 22 TDC See TARP TDC Temperature Shelf 1 10 terminal point to point network 9 3 third party equipment 7 8 time zones default settings 0 39 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ua 78 19417 01 timing description 6 1 report 6 1 specifications 3 TL1 AID in CTC 10 8 cir
342. iew the Alarm Profiles window displays two check boxes at the bottom of the window Hide reference values Highlights alarms with non default severities by clearing alarm cells with default severities This check box is normally greyed out It becomes active only when more than one profile is listed in the Alarm Profile Editor window The check box text changes to Hide Values matching profile Default in this case Hide identical rows Hides rows of alarms that contain the same severity for each profile 10 4 6 Applying Alarm Profiles In CTC node view the Alarm Behavior window displays alarm profiles for the node In card view the Alarm Behavior window displays the alarm profiles for the selected card Alarm profiles form a hierarchy A node alarm profile applies to all cards in the node except cards that have their own profiles A card alarm profile applies to all ports on the card except ports that have their own profiles At the node level you can apply profile changes on a card by card basis or set a profile for the entire node At the card view you can apply profile changes on a port by port basis or set alarm profiles for all ports on that card Figure 10 2 shows an ONS 15310 MA SDH 15310E CTX K9 card alarm profile Figure 10 2 Alarm Profile for a 15310 MA SDH 15310E CTX K9 Card File Edit View Tools Help alel al sit cl elle s e 2 Addr 10255255255 Booted 5 3 06 6 25 PM User 015 Authority Super
343. ifferent node name the circuits will map to the new node name Cisco recommends keeping a record of the old and new node names 4 11 Software Revert When you click the Activate button after a software upgrade the 15310E CTX K9 copies the current working database and saves it in a reserved location in the 15310E CTX K9 flash memory If you later need to revert to the original working software load from the protect software load the saved database installs automatically You do not need to restore the database manually or recreate circuits The revert feature is useful if a maintenance window closes while you are upgrading CTC software You can revert to the standby software load without losing traffic When the next maintenance window opens complete the upgrade and activate the new software load Circuits that were created and provisioning that was performed after a software load is activated upgraded to a higher release do not reinstate with a revert The database configuration at the time of activation is reinstated after a revert This does not apply to maintenance reverts for example 8 0 1 to 8 0 0 because maintenance releases use the same database Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 CHAPTER 5 Security This chapter provides information about Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH user security To provision security refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide
344. in locked enabled disabled locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect loopback Put the port or cross connect ina locked enabled loopback amp maintenance the locked outOfGroup administrative state Put the VCAT cross connect in locked enabled maintenance amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is raised locked disabled FLT amp maintenance locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect outOfGroup MA maintenance amp Alarm condition is raised outOfGroup locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup B 3 3 Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions The service state transitions for pluggable equipment are the same as for other equipment with the exceptions listed in Table B 6 Note Pluggable equipment pluggable interface modules PIMs and pluggable port modules PPMs will transition out of the unassigned state when inserted if the software can read the EEPROM and identify information on the pluggable equipment If the software cannot read the pluggable equipment the equipment is considered invalid and will not transition out of the unassigned state Table B 6 Current Service State Action ONS 15310 MA SDH Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions Next Service State unlocked enabled Reset the pluggable equipment unlocked enabled Provision an unsupported service rate
345. inear Multiplex Section Protection circuit defaults General settings Set general node management defaults including whether to use DST whether to insert AIS LO in each VC low order path when the carrying VC high order path crosses the SD path BER threshold the IP address of the NTP SNTP server to be used the time zone where the node is located the SD path BER value the defaults description whether to raise a condition on an empty card slot whether automatic autonomous TL1 reporting of PM data is enabled for cross connect paths on the node whether or not to allow ports to be disabled when they are providing services when the default is set to FALSE users must remove or disable the services first then put the ports out of service and whether to report loopback conditions on ports with an locked maintenance service state Network settings Set whether to prevent the display of node IP addresses in CTC applicable for all users except Superusers default gateway node type and whether to raise an alarm when the backplane LAN cable is disconnected OSI settings Set the OSI main setup GRE tunnel LAP D the router subnet and the TARP settings 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Appendix Network Element Defaults Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings 1 1 and Optimized 1 1 protection settings Set whether or not protected circuits have bidirectional
346. inor or event and service effect service affecting or non service affecting Date and time stamp when the alarm occurred 12 6 1 Generic and IETF Traps The ONS 15310 MA SDH support the generic and IETF traps listed in Table 12 4 Table 12 4 Supported IETF Traps for the ONS 15310 MA SDH From RFC No Trap MIB Description coldStart RFC1907 MIB Agent up cold start warmStart RFC1907 MIB Agent up warm start authenticationFailure RFC1907 MIB Community string does not match newRoot RFC1493 Sending agent is the new root of the spanning tree BRIDGE MIB topologyChange RFC1493 A port in a bridge has changed from Learning to BRIDGE MIB Forwarding or Forwarding to Blocking entConfigChange RFC2737 The entLastChangeTime value has changed ENTITY MIB dsx1LineStatusChange RFC2495 A dsx1LineStatusChange trap is sent when the value of E1 MIB an instance of dsx1LineStatus changes The trap can be used by an NMS to trigger polls When the line status change results from a higher level line status change for example DS3 no traps for the are sent dsx3LineStatusChange RFC2496 A dsx3LineStatusLastChange trap is sent when the value DS3 MIB of an instance of dsx3LineStatus changes This trap can be used by an NMS to trigger polls When the line status change results in a lower level line status change for example a E1 no traps for the lower level are sent risingAlarm RFC2819 The SNMP trap tha
347. interval ESR PM Path Monitoring Errored Seconds Ratio ESR PM indicates the errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval ESR SM Section Monitoring Errored Seconds Ratio ESR SM indicates the errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval ES SM Section Monitoring Errored Seconds ES SM indicates the errored seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval FC PM Path Monitoring Failure Counts FC PM indicates the failure counts recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval FC SM Section Monitoring Failure Counts FC SM indicates the failure counts recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval HP BBE High Order Path Background Block Error HP BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES HP BBER High Order Path Background Block Error Ratio HP BBER is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Parameter Definition HP EB High Order Path Errored Block HP EB indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block HP ES High Order Path Errored Second HP ES is a one seco
348. ion 11 10 RS ES parameter definition 11 10 RS ESR parameter definition 11 10 RS SES parameter definition 11 10 RS SESR parameter definition 11 10 RS UAS parameter definition 11 10 Rx AISS P parameter definition 11 10 Rx BBE P parameter definition 11 10 Rx BBER P parameter definition 11 11 Rx EB P parameter definition 11 10 Rx ES P parameter definition 11 11 Rx ESR P parameter definition 11 11 Rx SES P parameter definition 11 11 Rx SESR P parameter definition 11 11 Rx UAS P parameter definition 11 11 S safety instructions i xxiv SASCP P parameter definition 11 11 SASP P parameter definition 11 11 saving alarm profiles 10 10 SDH configurations list 2 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 data communications channel See DCC synchronization status messaging 6 2 topologies 9 1 9 9 secure shell 5 7 security See also RADIUS See also SSH audit trail 5 7 concurrent logins 5 1 idle user timeout 5 6 permissions per tab network view 5 4 permissions per tab node view 5 2 policies 5 5 requirements 5 2 user level descriptions 5 1 viewing 4 8 server trail description 7 23 icon 4 13 service states card state transitions 3 cross connect state transitions B 6 description 1 PARTIAL circuit service state 7 4 ports 4 8 port state transitions 6 SESCP PFE parameter definition 11 11 SESCP P parameter definition 11 11 SES L parameter definiti
349. ion about static IP over CLNS tunnels However unlike the static IP over CLNS tunnels TL1 tunnels require no provisioning at the ONS ENE the third party GNE or DCN routers All provisioning occurs at the CTC computer when the CTC Launcher is started Figure 4 7 shows examples of two static IP over CLNS tunnels A static Cisco IP tunnel is created from ENE 1 through other vendor GNE 1 to a DCN router and a static GRE tunnel is created from ONS ENE 2 to the other vender GNE 2 For both static tunnels provisioning is required on the ONS ENEs In addition a Cisco IP tunnel must be provisioned on the DCN router and a GRE tunnel provisioned on GNE 2 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes Chapter 4 Figure 4 7 Tunnel provisioning IP OSI Cisco Transport Controller Operation Static IP Over CLNS Tunnels Central office Other vendor GNE 1 IP over CLNS tunnel GNE 2 Other vendor e mee B 8 c ONS ENE aS 2 OSI DCC IP DCC Tunnel provisioning OSI DCC IP DCC Tunnel IP over CLNS Tunnel R provisioning tunnel provisioning 3 Figure 4 8 shows the same network using TL1 tunnels Tunnel provisioning occurs at the CTC computer when the tunnel is created with the CTC Launcher No provisioning is needed at ONS NEs GNEs or routers Ci
350. ion group on each card for a total of two protection groups In this case working and protection ports are provisioned on Slot 3 and working and protection ports are provisioned on Slot 4 the same card can have both working and protect ports on it 3 2 3 15310E CTX K9 Card Equipment Protection The ONS 15310MA supports a single and dual 15310E CTX K9 card configurations In the dual configuration with a 15310E CTX K9 card inserted in Slot 3 and Slot 4 the 15310E CTX K9 card is also protected One of the cards becomes the active card and the other becomes the standby card Soft resets executed in the dual 15310E CTX K9 card configuration as well as in the single 15310E CTX K9 card configuration are errorless Software upgrades in the single and dual configurations are also errorless In the dual configuration there is a switchover from the active 15310 9 card to standby 15310 9 card during the soft reset of the active 15310E CTX K9 card After the soft reset or software upgrade the old standby 15310E CTX K9 card becomes the new active 15310E CTX K9 card The old active 15310E CTX K9 card becomes the standby 15310E CTX K9 card The 15310E CTX K9 card is equipment protected in a dual 15310 9 card configuration Any reset occurring on the active 15310 9 card that is triggered due to failure causes a switchover of the 15310 9 card causing the old standby card to become the active card No
351. ion on page 7 19 for information Roll Valid Signal If the Roll Valid Signal status is true a valid signal was found on the new port If the Roll Valid Signal status is false a valid signal was not found It is not possible to get a true Roll Valid Signal status for a one way destination roll Roll Mode The mode indicates whether the roll is automatic or manual CTC implements a roll mode at the circuit level TL1 implements a roll mode at the cross connect level If a single roll is performed CTC and TL1 behave the same If a dual roll is performed the roll mode specified in CTC might be different than the roll mode retrieved in TL1 For example if you select Automatic CTC coordinates the two rolls to minimize possible traffic hits by using the Manual mode behind the scenes When both rolls have a good signal CTC signals the nodes to complete the roll Automatic When a valid signal is received on the new path CTC completes the roll on the node automatically One way source rolls are always automatic Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels Bridge and Roll liii Manual You must complete a manual roll after a valid signal is received One way destination rolls are always manual Roll Path The fixed point of the roll object Roll From Path The old path that is being rerouted Roll To Path The new path where the Roll Fr
352. isco ONS 15310 MA SDH timing To provision timing refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 6 1 Timing Parameters page 6 1 6 2 Network Timing page 6 2 e 6 3 Synchronization Status Messaging page 6 2 6 1 Timing Parameters Node Timing parameters must be set for each ONS 15310 MA SDH Each ONS 15310 MA SDH independently accepts its timing reference from one of three sources The building integrated timing supply BITS port on the ONS 15310 MA SDH e An STM N EI port on the ONS 15310 MA SDH The port is connected to a node that receives timing through a BITS source e The internal G 813 SMC clock on the CTX card You can set ONS 15310 MA SDH timing to one of three modes external line or mixed If timing is coming from the BITS port set ONS 15310 MA SDH timing to external If the timing comes from an STM N and 1 port set the timing to line Typical ONS 15310 MA SDH networks have the following timing configurations One node is set to external The external node derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the CTX port The BITS source derives its timing from a primary reference source PRS such as a Stratum 1 clock or global positioning satellite GPS signal The other nodes are set to line The line nodes derive timing from the externally timed node through the E1 port and STMN trunk span port You can set three timing references for each ONS 15310 MA SDH The first two refer
353. istoryControlStatus value of 4 invalid A deleted row can be recreated 12 10 3 Ethernet History RMON Group The ONS 15310 MA SDH implement the etherHistoryTable as defined in RFC 2819 The group is created within the bounds of the historyControlTable and does not deviate from the RFC in its design 12 10 3 1 64 Bit etherHistoryHighCapacityTable 64 bit Ethernet history for the HC RMON MIB is implemented in the etherHistoryHighCapacityTable which is an extension of the etherHistoryTable The etherHistoryHighCapacityTable adds four columns for 64 bit performance monitoring data These two tables have a one to one relationship Adding or deleting a row in one table will effect the same change in the other Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter12 SNMP SNMP Remote Monitoring 12 10 4 Alarm RMON Group The Alarm group consists of the alarmTable which periodically compares sampled values with configured thresholds and raises an event if a threshold is crossed This group requires the implementation of the event group which follows this section 12 10 4 1 Alarm Table The NMS uses the alarmTable to determine and provision network performance alarmable thresholds 12 10 4 2 Row Creation in alarmTable To create a row in the alarmTable all OIDs in the SetRequest PDU should be type OID 0 The table has a maximum number of 256 rows To create a SetRequest PDU for the
354. it waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico s en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd wilt raadplegen BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES Varoitus TARKEITA TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA Tama varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja Ennen kuin k sittelet laitteistoa huomioi s hk piirien k sittelemiseen liittyvat riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehk isytapoihin Turvallisuusvaroitusten k nn kset l ytyv t laitteen mukana toimitettujen k nnettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa n kyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla SAILYTA NAMA OHJEET Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SECURITE Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entrainer des blessures ou des dommages corporels Avant de travailler sur un quipement soyez conscient des dangers li s aux circuits lectriques et familiarisez vous avec les proc dures couramment utilis es pour viter les accidents Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des avertissements figurant dans les consignes de s curit traduites q
355. its and Tunnels Circuit Properties is completed This allows you to provision a circuit using TL1 verify its path continuity and prepare the port to go into service when it receives an error free signal for the time specified in the port soak timer Two common examples of state changes you see when provisioning circuits using CTC are e When assigning the Automatic In Service administrative state to cross connects in VC 12 circuits and VC low order path tunnels the source and destination ports on the VC 12 circuits remain in the locked disabled Automatic In Service service state until an alarm free signal is received for the duration of the soak timer When the soak timer expires and an alarm free signal is found the VC 12 source port and destination port service states change to unlocked enabled and the circuit service state becomes unlocked When assigning the Automatic In Service administrative state to cross connects in VC high order path circuits the circuit source and destination ports transition to the locked disabled Automatic In Service service state When an alarm free signal is received the source and destination ports remain locked disabled Automatic In Service for the duration of the soak timer After the port soak timer expires VC high order path source and destination ports change to unlocked enabled and the circuit service state to unlocked To find the remaining port soak time choose the Maintenance gt Automati
356. jack pdcc0 An RS DCC interface that is an STMN trunk port identified as the RS DCC termination 100 loopback interface Table 8 5 shows sample routing entries for an ONS 15310 MA SDH Table 8 5 Sample Routing Table Entries Entry Destination Mask Gateway Interface 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 172 20 214 1 cpm0 2 172 20 214 0 255 255 255 0 172 20 214 92 cpm0 3 172 20 214 92 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 100 4 172 20 214 93 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 pdcc0 5 172 20 214 94 255 255 255 255 172 20 214 93 pdcc0 Entry 1 shows the following e Destination 0 0 0 0 is the default route entry All undefined destination network or host entries on this routing table is mapped to the default route entry e Mask 0 0 0 0 is always 0 for the default route Gateway 172 20 214 1 is the default gateway address All outbound traffic that cannot be found in this routing table or is not on the node s local subnet is sent to this gateway Interface cpm0 indicates that the ONS 15310 MA SDH Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway Entry 2 shows the following e Destination 172 20 214 0 is the destination network IP address e Mask 255 255 255 0 is a 24 bit mask meaning all addresses within the 172 20 214 0 subnet can be a destination e Gateway 172 20 214 92 is the gateway address All outbound traffic belonging to this network is sent to this gateway Interface cpm0 indicates that the ON
357. ka GMT 08 00 GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana GMT 07 00 GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada GMT 07 00 GMT 07 00 Phoenix Arizona GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Mexico City GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Costa Rica Managua San Salvador GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Saskatchewan GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Bogota Lima Quito GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Havana GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Indiana US GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Asuncion GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Caracas La Paz San Juan GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada Halifax Saint John Charlottetown GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Santiago GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Thule Qaanaaq GMT 03 30 GMT 03 30 St John s Newfoundland GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Brasilia Rio de Janeiro Sao Paulo GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Buenos Aires Georgetown GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Godthab Nuuk Greenland GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Azores Scoresbysund GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Praia Cape Verde GMT 00 00 GMT 00 00 Casablanca Reykjavik Monrovia GMT GMT Greenwich Mean Time GMT 00 00 GMT 00 00 Dublin Edinburgh London Lisbon GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Rome Stockholm Paris GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Belgrade Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults
358. king 8 1 to 8 16 requirements 8 2 subnetting 8 2 unique IP address requirement 8 12 IP addressing scenarios CTC and nodes connected to router 8 3 CTC and nodes on same subnet 8 3 default gateway on CTC workstation 8 6 provisioning the proxy server 8 11 Proxy ARP and gateway 8 4 static routes connecting to LANs 8 7 IPC parameter definition 11 7 IP encapsulated tunnel 7 9 Index M IP over CLNS tunnels 4 18 Cisco IOS commands 8 34 connecting ONS node to a router 8 35 connecting ONS node to a router across an OSI DCN 8 37 connecting ONS node to other vendor GNE 8 34 provisioning 8 34 similarity to TL1 tunnels 4 16 tunnelflow 8 33 IPPM 11 3 IPv6 network compatibility 8 40 IS IS protocol 8 28 J JO J1 J2 path trace 7 17 11 12 bytes 7 17 JAR files 4 2 JRE 4 3 L LAN cable ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 13 LBC AVG parameter definition 11 7 LBC MAX parameter definition 11 7 LBC MIN parameter definition 11 7 LBC parameter definition 11 7 LCAS 7 13 8 31 LEDs CE 100T 8 card level 2 8 CE 100T 8 port level 2 8 CE MR 6 card level 2 12 CE MR 6 port level 2 12 CTX2500 2 5 1 21 DS3 63 DS3 3 2 17 ML 100T 8 card level 2 15 ML 100T 8 port level 2 15 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Index linear ADM description 9 3 interoperability with an ONS 15454 9 5 linetiming 6 1 link capacity adjustment scheme 7 13 link consolida
359. l or a GRE tunnel depending on the tunnel types supported by the router IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning on ONS NE 1 e Destination Router 2 IP address e Mask 255 255 255 255 for host route CTC 1 only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet route all CTC computers on the same subnet e NSAP Other vender GNE NSAP address e Metric 110 Tunnel Type Cisco IP IP over OSI tunnel provisioning on Router 2 sample Cisco IOS provisioning Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Management Network Connectivity Chapter 8 TCP IP and OSI Networking ip routing clns routing interface ctunnel 102 ip address 10 10 30 30 255 255 255 0 ctunnel destination 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 interface Ethernet0 1 clns router isis router isis net 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 aaaaaaaaaaaa 00 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3 ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN Figure 8 21 CTC 1 10 10 10 100 24 Router 2 Interface 0 0 10 10 10 10 24 Interface 0 1 10 10 20 10 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 aaaaaaaaaaaa 00 Router 1 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 20 24 Interface 0 1 10 10 30 10 24 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 bbbbbbbbbbbb 00 1 GRE Or 1 j Cisco IP tunnel ostonly 051 DCC LAPD a Other vendor ONS NE 1 39 840F 80 111111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 OSI Other vendor GNE OSI 134357 10 10
360. lay ring circuit in CTC i e core ring will continue having cross connects Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EXE 78 19417 01 Alarm Monitoring and Management This chapter describes Cisco Transport Controller CTC alarm management To troubleshoot specific alarms refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide Chapter topics include e 10 1 Overview page 10 1 e 10 2 Viewing Alarms page 10 1 e 10 3 Alarm Severities page 10 9 e 10 4 Alarm Profiles page 10 9 e 10 5 Alarm Suppression page 10 12 e 10 6 External Alarms and Controls page 10 13 10 1 Overview amp Cisco Transport Controller CTC detects and reports SDH alarms generated by the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH and the larger SDH network You can use CTC to monitor and manage alarms at the card node or network level You can set alarm severities in customized alarm profiles or suppress CTC alarm reporting For a detailed description of the standard Telcordia categories employed by Optical Networking System ONS nodes refer the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Note ONS 15310 MA SDH alarms can also be monitored and managed through Transaction Language One TL1 or a network management system NMS 10 2 Viewing Alarms You can use the Alarms tab to view card node or network level alarms This means that if a network problem causes two alarms such as loss of frame LOF and loss of signal LOS CTC
361. lding integrated timing supply BITS ports require DB 9 connectors or a DB9BIT BB9 to wire wrap adapter 1 8 2 Fiber Cable Installation To install fiber optic cables on the ONS 15310 MA SDH a fiber cable with an LC connector must be connected to an SFP SFPs are installed in the SFP port on the ONS 15310 MA SDH Each LC connector contains the transmit Tx and receive Rx signal for that port Cisco recommends that you label the transmit and receive ports and the working and protection fibers at each end of the fiber span to avoid confusion with cables that are similar in appearance You can route fiber cables through the optional fiber guide installed at the bottom of the shelf assembly Figure 1 10 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Figure 1 10 Shelf Assembly with Fiber Guide Installed 144704 A Caution You must provide some type of strain relief for the cables using either a tie bar or other site specific solution Note Clean all fiber connectors thoroughly Dust particles can degrade performance Put caps on any fiber connectors that you do not use 1 8 3 Coaxial Cable Installation For E3 DS3 traffic the ONS 15310 MA SDH uses coaxial cables and connectors Cisco recommends connecting a 735A coaxial cab
362. le LCAS and SW LCAS member cross connects can be in different service states all In Group non LCAS members must have cross connects in the same service state A non LCAS circuit can mix Out of Group and In Group members if the In Group members are in the same service state Non LCAS members do not support the locked enabled outOfGroup service state to put a non LCAS member in the Out of Group VCAT state use locked enabled disabled Note Protection switching for LCAS and non LCAS VCAT circuits might exceed 60 ms Traffic loss for VC low order path VCAT circuits is approximately two times more than traffic loss for a VC high order path VCAT circuit You can minimize traffic loss by reducing path differential delay 1 1 4 VCAT Circuit Size Table 7 6 lists supported VCAT circuit rates and the number of members for each card Table 7 6 ONS 15310 MA SDH Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members Cad ICireuitRate Number of Members CE 100T 8 VC12 1 63 VC3 1 3 ML 100T 8 VC3 1 2 CE MR 6 VCI2 1 63 VC3 1 21 VC4 1 7 1 A VCAT circuit with an ONS 15310 MA SDH CE 100T 8 or ML 100T 8 card as a source or destination and an ONS 15454 ML Series card as a source or destination can have only two members Use the Members tab in the Edit Circuit window to add or delete members from a VCAT circuit The capability to add or delete members depends on whether the VCAT circuit is LCAS SW LCAS or non LCAS For VCATLC
363. le 2 5 CE 100T 8 Port Level Indicators 2 9 Table 2 6 CE MR 6 Card Level Indicators 2 12 Table 2 7 CE MR 6 Port Level Indicators 2 12 Table 2 8 100 8 Card Level Indicators 2 15 Table 2 9 ML 100T 8 Port Level Indicators 2 15 Table 2 10 E1 21 DS3 E1 63 053 3 Card Level Indicators 2 18 Table 2 11 SFP Card Compatibility 2 20 Table 4 1 CTC Computer Requirements 4 4 Table 4 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Connection Methods 4 6 Table 4 3 Node View Card and Slot Colors 4 8 Table 4 4 Node View Card Port Colors and Service States 4 9 Table 4 5 Node View Card Statuses 4 10 Table 4 6 Node View Tabs and Subtabs 4 10 Table 4 7 Node Colors Indicating Status in Network View 4 12 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 BE Tables Table 4 8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs 4 12 Table 4 9 Link Icons 4 13 Table 4 10 Card View Tabs and Subtabs 4 14 Table 4 11 TL1 and Static IP Over CLNS Tunnels Comparison 4 18 Table 5 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Node View 5 2 Table 5 2 ONS 15310 MA SDH Security Levels Network View 5 4 Table 5 3 Default User Idle Times 5 6 Table 5 1 SSM Message Set 6 3 Table 6 2 SSM Generation 2 Message Set 6 3 Table 7 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Circuit Status 7 3 Table 7 2 Circuit Protection Types 7 5 Table 7 3 Port State Color Indicators 7 7 Table 7 4 DCC Tunnels 7 9 Table 7 5 Switch Times 7 13 Table 7 6 ONS 15310 MA SDH Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Memb
364. le an ONS 15310 MA SDH Gateway 8 4 8 2 4 Scenario 4 Default Gateway on CTC Computer 8 6 8 2 5 Scenario 5 Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs 8 7 8 2 6 Scenario 6 Using OSPF 8 9 8 2 7 Scenario 7 Provisioning the ONS 15310 MA SDH Proxy Server 8 11 Routing Table 8 16 External Firewalls 8 18 Open GNE 8 20 8 6 TCP IP OSI Networking 8 22 8 6 1 Point to Point Protocol 8 23 8 6 2 Link Access Protocol on the D Channel 8 24 8 6 3 OSI Connectionless Network Service 8 24 8 6 4 OSI Routing 8 27 8 6 4 1 End System to Intermediate System Protocol 8 28 8 6 4 2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol 8 28 8 6 5 8 29 8 6 5 1 TARP Processing 8 30 8 6 5 2 TARP Loop Detection Buffer 8 31 8 6 5 3 Manual TARP Adjacencies 8 32 8 6 5 4 Manual TID to NSAP Provisioning 8 32 8 6 6 OSI Virtual Routers 8 32 78 19417 01 Contents MI Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Contents 8 6 7 IP over CLNS Tunnels 8 33 8 6 7 1 Provisioning IP over CLNS Tunnels 8 34 8 6 7 2 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1 ONS Node to Other Vendor GNE 8 34 8 6 7 3 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2 ONS Node to Router 8 35 8 6 7 4 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3 ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN 8 37 8 6 8 Provisioning OSI in CTC 8 39 8 7 IPv6 Network Compatibility 8 40 8 8 IPv6 Native Support 8 40 8 8 1 IPv6 Enabled Mode 8 41 8 8 2 IPv6 Disabled Mode 8 41 8 8 3 IPv6 in Non secure Mode 8 42 8 8 4
365. le to a patch panel Use a compatible male BNC connector to connect the cable to the E3 DS3 ports The E3 DS3 cables should be terminated with BNC connectors on the ONS 15310 MA SDH side and BNC connectors on the client side Due to the minimal space between BNC connectors and 1 connectors you might require a special tool for inserting and removing BNC EIAs Figure 1 11 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EM 78 19417 01 Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Figure 1 11 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool Cable Description and Installation This tool can be obtained with P N 227 T1000 from Amphenol USA www amphenol com One Kennedy Drive Danbury CT 06810 Phone 203 743 9272 Fax 203 796 2032 This tool can be obtained with P N RT 1L from Trompeter Electronics Inc www trompeter com 31186 La Baya Drive Westlake Village CA 91362 4047 Phone 800 982 2629 Fax 818 706 1040 1 8 4 E1 Cable Installation The ONS 15310 MA SDH uses 64 pin Champ connector cabling for E1 connections 44552 Table 1 2 lists the Champ connector pin assignments and the corresponding EIA connector mapping for connectors J8 and J9 on the EIA installed on the A side and connectors J21 and 722 on the EIA installed on the B side Table 1 2 Champ Connector Pin Assignments Side A EIA
366. leshooting chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide For information about creating circuits that perform a switch refer to Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels 2 MS SPRing is not supported on the STM 1 card and STM 1E card therefore the MS PSD W MS PSD S and MS PSD R PM parameters do not increment 3 In CTC the count fields for the HP PPJC and HP NPJC PM parameters appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the Provisioning Line tab See the 11 3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring section m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports 4 Far end high order VC4 and VC4 Xc path PM parameters applies only to the STMI 4 card Also MRC 12 and OC192 STM64 XFP based cards support far end path PM parameters All other optical cards do not support far end path PM parameters 5 SDH path PM parameters do not increment unless IPPM is enabled See the 11 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring section S Note For information about troubleshooting Linear Multiplex Section Protection switch counts refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide For information about creating circuits that perform a switch refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 0
367. llation The BITS clock cable terminated with a DB 9 connector or with a DBOBIT BBO to wire wrap adapter attaches to the BITS port on the ONS 15310 MA SDH The other end of the cable plugs into the BITS clock terminate this end of the cable according to local site practice In case the DBOBIT BBO to wire wrap adapter is used on the ONS 15310 MA the cable shield must be wire wrapped to the GND pin of the wire wrap adapter The 15310 MA SDH has one BITS input and one BITS output The BITS inputs and outputs have corresponding pins on the DB 9 BITS ports When connecting BITS cable to the ONS 15310 MA SDH see Table 1 7 for the BITS cable pin assignments Table 1 7 BITS Cable Pin Assignments DB 9 Pin Number Function 1 BITS Output 2 BITS Output 3 Hm 4 5 M 6 BITS Input 7 BITS Input 8 E 9 Note Refer to Telcordia SR NWT 002224 for rules about how to provision timing references 1 8 7 UDC Cable Installation The 64K EIA TIA 232 user data channel UDC interface provides F1 and F2 byte input and output When connecting the UDC cable to the ONS 15310 MA SDH see Table 1 8 for the UDC cable pin assignments Unshielded twisted pair 22 or 24 AWG wire is required for the UDC ports Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Routing and Management
368. locked disabled Automatic In Service the member transitions to unlocked enabled If an In Group member is locked enabled maintenanc e the member transitions to locked enabled maintenanc Put the cross connect in the Automatic In Service administrative state locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked maintenance administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp out OfGroup locked disabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance Release the loopback locked disabled FLT amp maintenance Alarm condition is cleared locked enabled loopback amp maintenance Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix B Administrative and Service States HZ Service State Transitions Table B 5 Transitions continued Current Service State Action ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State locked disabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance amp outOfGroup Release the loopback locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is cleared locked maintenance maintenance amp outOfGroup locked disabled FLT amp maintenance Alarm condition is cleared l
369. ly a custom profile that downgrades an alarm on one particular card Or you might choose to downgrade an STMN unequipped path alarm UNEQ P from Critical CR to Not Alarmed NA on an optical card because this alarm is raised and then clears every time you create a circuit UNEQ P alarms for the card with the custom profile would not display on the Alarms tab but they would still be recorded on the Conditions and History tabs When you modify severities in an alarm profile e All Critical CR or Major MJ default or user defined severity settings are demoted Default severities are used for all alarms and conditions until you create a new profile and apply it 10 4 2 Alarm Profile Buttons The Alarm Profiles window displays six buttons at the bottom Table 10 8 lists and describes each of the alarm profile buttons and their functions Table 10 8 Alarm Profile Buttons Button Description New Adds a new alarm profile Load Loads a profile from a node or a file Store Saves profiles on a node or nodes or in a file Delete Deletes profiles from a node Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EE 78 19417 01 Chapter 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Alarm Profiles Table 10 8 Alarm Profile Buttons continued Button Description Compare Displays differences between alarm profiles for example individual alarms that are not configured equivalently between
370. mation regarding PM parameter threshold defaults as defined by Telcordia specifications refer to Telcordia GR 820 CORE and GR 253 CORE C 3 3 Defaults by Card In the tables that follow card defaults are defined by the default name its factory configured value and the domain of allowable values that you can assign to it Note Some default values such as certain thresholds are interdependent Before changing a value review the domain for that default and any other related defaults for potential dependencies Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Pca g 78 19417 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults C 3 3 1 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings Table C 2 lists the 15310 9 card default settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings Default Name Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 PPM portAssignment UNASSIGNED UNASSIGNED STMI PORT STM4 PORT STM16 PORT CTX 2500 PPM slotAssignment UNASSIGNED UNASSIGNED PPM 1 Port CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line AdminSSMIn STU G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line PJ VC4Mon 0 0 1 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT config line SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6
371. n 3 4 external firewall ports 8 18 faceplate 2 4 faceplate LEDs 2 5 2 6 overview 2 2 release compatibility 2 3 resetting 4 19 side switch 2 5 software location 4 1 system cross connect 2 5 CVCP PFE parameter definition 11 4 CVCP P parameter definition 11 4 CV L parameter definition 11 4 CVP P parameter definition 11 5 D database description 4 20 reverting 4 20 data communications channel See DCC datagrams 8 4 DCC link icon 4 13 load balancing 7 8 tunnels 7 8 viewing connections 4 13 DCG parameter definition 11 5 deleting alarm profiles 10 10 alarms 10 4 destination host 8 4 routing table 8 16 DHCP 4 6 8 3 displaying alarm and condition history 10 8 alarm profiles by node 10 11 conditions 10 6 documentation audience conventions in this book i xxiii objectives i xxii related to this book i xxii door ground strap 1 7 DS3i N 12 card performance monitoring 11 17 DS 3 ports line rate and connector type ONS 15310 MA 1 27 dual configuration 3 4 dual rolls 7 20 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP 1 21 DS3 3 card block diagram 2 16 card level LEDs 2 17 default settings 15 description 2 16 E 1 thresholds 11 16 faceplate 2 16 LEDs 2 17 overview 2 3 release compatibility 2 3 resetting 4 19 specifications A 7 E1_63_E3_DS3_3 card block diagram 2 16 default settings C 21 description 2 16 E 1 thresholds 11 16 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and R
372. n AUD LOG LOW condition is raised and logged When the log server reaches the maximum capacity of 640 entries and begins overwriting records that were not archived an AUD LOG LOSS condition is raised and logged This event indicates that audit trail records have been lost Until you off load the file this event will not occur a second time regardless of the amount of entries that are overwritten by incoming data To export the audit trail log refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 5 4 RADIUS Security Users with Superuser security privileges can configure nodes to use Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS authentication Cisco Systems uses a strategy known as authentication authorization and accounting AAA for enabling verifying and tracking the actions of remote users RADIUS server supports IPv6 addresses and can process authentication requests from a GNE or an ENE that uses IPv6 addresses 5 4 1 RADIUS Authentication RADIUS is a system of distributed security that secures remote access to networks and network services against unauthorized access RADIUS contains three components protocol with a frame format that utilizes User Datagram Protocol UDP IP A server Aclient The server runs on a central computer typically at a customer site while the clients reside in the dial up access servers and can be distributed throughout the network ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes operate as clients of the RA
373. n CTC use the Provisioning gt Network gt Proxy and Firewalls subtabs The availability of proxy and or firewall tunnels depends on the network access settings of the node e If the node is configured with the proxy server enabled in GNE or ENE mode you must set up a proxy tunnel and or a firewall tunnel e Ifthe node is configured with the proxy server enabled in proxy only mode you can set up proxy tunnels Firewall tunnels are not allowed Ifthe node is configured with the proxy server disabled neither proxy tunnels or firewall tunnels are allowed Figure 8 13 shows an example of a foreign node connected to the DCC network Proxy and firewall tunnels are useful in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC and the foreign node Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 x 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity OpenGNE MI Figure 8 13 Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations Remote CTC m peu 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 0 24 ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH Gateway NE Ss External NE 10 10 10 100 24 10 10 10 150 24 ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH External NE External NE 10 10 10 250 24 10 10 10 200 24 Non ONS node Foreign NE 130 94 122 199 28 Ethernet Local Craft CTC 192 168 20
374. n Table 11 8 The parameters are defined in Table 11 6 on page 11 20 Table 11 8 Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval Time Interval Number of Intervals Displayed 1 minute 60 previous time intervals 15 minutes 32 previous time intervals 1 hour 24 previous time intervals 1 day 24 hours 7 previous time intervals 11 6 1 4 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card POS Ports Statistics Parameters In the CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 POS Ports window the parameters that appear depend on the framing mode employed by the cards The two framing modes for the packet over SDH POS port on the CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 cards are high level data link control HDLC and frame mapped generic framing procedure GFP F For more information on provisioning a framing mode refer to Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide The POS Ports statistics window lists POS parameters at the line level Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EIN 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards Table 11 9 defines the CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 card POS ports parameters for HDLC mode Table 11 9 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode Parameter Definition Time Last Cleared A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset Link Status Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receivin
375. n Table 8 2 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Peis 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 12 Scenario 7 Proxy Server with ENEs on Multiple Rings NOC CTC SE E 97 1 1 x Interface 0 0 97 1 1 1 Interface 0 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH 86 1 1 1 ENE Central Office LAN 86 x x x Switch EE ONS 15310 MA SDH e IP 192 168 0 0 24 15310 ENE ONS 15310 MA SDH ENE D GNE ONS 15310 MA SDH ENE ONS 15310 MA SDH E ENE IP 192 0 0 0 24 CES ONS 15310 MA SDH Imm ONS 15310 MA SDH ae ENE Local CTC station IP 10 10 10 10 2 GNE 271798 D Table 8 3 shows the rules the ONS 15310 MA SDH follows to filter packets when Enable Firewall is enabled Table 8 3 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules Packets arriving at accepted if the IP destination address is 15310E CTX K9 The ONS 15310 MA SDH shelf itself Ethernet interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH s subnet broadcast address e Within the 224 0 0 0 8 network reserved network used for standard multicast messages Subnet mask 255 255 255 255 DCC interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH itself e Any destination that is connected through another DCC interface e Within the 224 0 0 0 8 network Table 8 4 shows additional rules that apply if the packet addressed to the ONS
376. nd ML 100T 8 cards support the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme LCAS which is a signaling protocol that allows dynamic bandwidth adjustment of VCAT circuits When a member fails LCAS temporarily removes the failed member from the VCAT circuit for the duration of the failure leaving the remaining members to carry the traffic When the failure clears the member circuit is automatically added back into the VCAT circuit You can select LCAS during VCAT circuit creation 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Virtual Concatenated Circuits Note Although LCAS operations errorless an SDH error can affect one or more VCAT members If this occurs the VCAT Group Degraded VCG DEG alarm is raised For information about clearing this alarm refer to the Alarm Troubleshooting chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide SW LCAS is a limited form of LCAS that allows the VCAT circuit to adapt to member failures and keep traffic flowing at a reduced bandwidth SW LCAS is necessary when interoperating with the ONS 15454 ML Series cards SW LCAS uses legacy SDH failure indicators like path alarm indication signal AIS P and path remote defect indication RDI P to detect member failure You can select SW LCAS during VCAT circuit creation In addition you can create non LCAS VCAT circuits which do not use LCAS or SW LCAS Whi
377. nd period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect HP ESR High Order Path Errored Second Ratio HP ESR is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval HP NPJC Pdet High Order Negative Pointer Justification Count Path Detected HP NPJC Pdet is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal HP NPJC Pdet High Order Path Negative Pointer Justification Count Path Detected HP NPJC Pdet is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal HP NPJC Pgen High Order Negative Pointer Justification Count Path Generated HP NPJC Pgen is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path HP PJCDiff High Order Path Pointer Justification Count Difference HP PJCDiff is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts That is HP PJCDiff is equal to HP PPJC PGen HP NPJC PGen HP PPJC PDet HP NPJC PDet HP PJCS Pdet High Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds HP PJCS PDet is a count of the one second intervals containing one or more HP PPJC PDet or HP NPJC PDet HP PJCS Pgen High Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds HP PJCS PGen is a count of the one s
378. nd the IPv4 DCC networks 8 8 IPv6 Native Support Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Software R9 0 and later supports native IPv6 ONS 15310 MA SDH can be managed over IPv6 DCN networks by enabling the IPv6 feature After you enable IPv6 in addition to IPv4 you can use CTC TL1 and SNMP over an IPv6 DCN to manage ONS 15310 MA SDH Each NE can be assigned an IPv6 address in addition to the IPv4 address You can access the NE by entering the IPv4 address an IPv6 address or the DNS name of the device The IPv6 address is assigned only on the LAN interface of the NE DCC GCC interfaces use the IPv4 address By default when IPv6 is enabled the node processes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets on the LAN interface If you want to process only IPv6 packets you need to disable IPv4 on the node Before you disable IPv4 ensure that IPv6 is enabled and the node is not in multishelf mode Figure 8 22 shows how an IPv6 DCN interacts with and IPv4 DCC Figure 8 22 IPv6 IPv4 Interaction NMS IPv6 Address 3ffe b00 ffff 1 2 ENE B GNE A IPv6 Address Z Pv6 Address 3ffe bO0O ffff 1 3 X 3ffe b00 ffff 1 5 IPv4 Address IPv4 Address 10 10 20 40 DCC IPv4 Network C IPv6 Address IPv6 Address DO gt 3ffe bOO ffff 1 4 Sffe b00 ffff 1 6 IPv4 Address 4 Address 10 10 10 20 10 10 20 30 5 270827 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Chapter 8 Mana
379. ndary Protection Module PCI 050 631 01 DS3 primary protection modules Turn off or on AC power in Purcell FLX25GT OSP cabinet Step 1 Step 2 Complete the following steps to turn off or on AC power in Purcell FLX25GT OSP cabinet Turn off the main breaker in the AC load center Turn off the two Valere rectifier breakers in the AC load center Figure A 1 shows Valere rectifier breakers in the AC load center 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H AppendixA Specifications Purcell FLX25GT Cabinet Specifications Figure A 1 Valere rectifier breakers in AC load center Valere rectifiers Main breaker breakers o gt lt 274028 Step3 Unplug the cabinet s AC power cord Note The ONS 15310 MA SDH inside the OSP cabinet does not turn off and runs on batteries if the batteries are charged The batteries in the OSP cabinet run on the DC power from the Valere rectifiers and the battery charge lasts for approximately eight hours Step4 turn on AC power plug the cord Stepb Turn on the two Valere rectifier breakers in the AC load center Step6 Turn on the main breaker in the AC load center Stop Y
380. nds in available time during a fixed measurement interval MS NPJC Pgen Multiplex Section Negative Pointer Justification Count Path Generated MS NPJC Pgen is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path MS PPJC Pgen Multiplex Section Positive Pointer Justification Count Path Generated MS PPJC Pgen is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path MS PSC 1 1 protection In a 1 1 protection scheme for a working card Multiplex Section Protection Switching Count MS PSC is a count of the number of times service switches from a working card to a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the working card For a protection card MS PSC is a count of the number of times service switches to a working card from a protection card plus the number of times service switches back to the protection card MS PSC MS SPRing For a protect line in a two fiber multiplex section shared protection ring MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Count MS PSC refers to the number of times a protection switch has occurred either to a particular span s line protection or away from a particular span s line protection Therefore if a protection switch occurs on a two fiber MS SPRing the MS PSC of the protection span to which the traffic is switched will increment and when the switched traffic returns to its original working span from
381. ng Alarm and Condition History You can retrieve and view the history of alarms and conditions as well as transients passing notifications of processes as they occur in the CTC history window The information in this window is specific to the view where it is shown that is network history in the network view node history in the node view and card history in the card view The node and card history views are each divided into two tabs In node view when you click the Retrieve button you can see the history of alarms conditions and transients that have occurred on the node in the History Shelf window and the history of alarms conditions and transients that have occurred on the node during your login session in the History gt Session window In the card view history window after you retrieve the card history you can see the history of alarms conditions and transients m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Alarm Severities on the card in the History Card window or a history of alarms conditions and transients that have occurred during your login session in the History gt Session window You can also filter the severities and occurrence period in these history windows 10 2 8 Alarm History and Log Buffer Capacities The ONS 15310 MA SDH alarm history log stored in the 15310E CTX K9 RSA memory contains four cat
382. nk state advertisements LSA both of which are necessary for automatic node and link discovery An open GNE configuration allows the DCC based network to function as an IP network for non ONS nodes To configure an open GNE network you can provision RS DCC and MS DCC terminations to include a far end non ONS node using either the default IP address of 0 0 0 0 or a specified IP address You provision a far end non ONS node by checking the Far End is Foreign check box during RS DCC and MS DCC creation The default 0 0 0 0 IP address allows the far end non ONS node to provide the IP address if you set an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 a link is established only if the far end node identifies itself with that IP address providing an extra level of security By default the proxy server only allows connections to discovered ONS peers and the firewall blocks all IP traffic between the DCC network and LAN You can however provision proxy tunnels to allow up to 12 additional destinations for SOCKS version 5 connections to non ONS nodes You can also provision firewall tunnels to allow up to 12 additional destinations for direct IP connectivity between the DCC network and LAN Proxy and firewall tunnels include both a source and destination subnet The connection must originate within the source subnet and terminate within the destination subnet before either the SOCKS connection or IP packet flow is allowed To set up proxy and firewall subnets i
383. nodes that reside on the same subnet with multiple CTC sessions If ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes are connected to Open Shortest Path First OSPF networks ONS 15310 MA SDH network information is automatically communicated across multiple LANs and WANS The ONS 15310 MA SDH proxy server controls the visibility and accessibility between CTC computers and ONS 15310 MA SDH element nodes 8 2 IP Addressing Scenarios ONS 15310 MA SDH IP addressing generally has seven common scenarios or configurations Use the scenarios as building blocks for more complex network configurations Table 8 1 provides a general list of items to check when setting up ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes in IP networks Table 8 1 General P Troubleshooting Checklist Item What to Check Link integrity Verify that link integrity exists between e CTC computer and network hub switch e ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes RJ 45 ports labeled LAN and network hub switch e Router ports and hub switch ports Node hub switch Verify connectivity If connectivity problems occur set the hub or switch port ports that is connected to the ONS 15310 MA SDH to 10 Mbps half duplex Ping Ping the node to test connections between computers and ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes IP addresses subnet _ Verify that ONS 15310 MA SDH IP addresses and subnet masks are set up masks correctly Optical connectivity Verify that ONS 15310 MA SDH optical trunk ports are in service and that a DCC is enabled on each
384. nonrevertive For the ONS 15310 MA SDH CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 ONS 15310 MA SDH only or ML 100T 8 cards you can provision circuits either before or after the cards are installed if the slots are provisioned For the 15310 MA SDH 15310E CTX K9 card you must preprovision the small form factor pluggables SFPs called pluggable port modules PPMs in CTC before you can create an optical circuit However circuits do not carry traffic until the cards and SFPs are installed and the ports are In Service and Normal unlocked enabled Out of Service and Autonomous Automatic In Service OO AU Automatic In Service or Out of Service and Management Maintenance locked enabled maintenance 7 2 Circuit Properties You can view information about circuits in the ONS 15310 MA SDH Circuits window which appears in network node and card view The Circuits window shows the following information Name The name of the circuit The circuit name can be manually assigned or automatically generated Type The circuit types are VC high order path VC high order path circuit VC low order path VC low order path circuit LOP Tunnel VC low order path tunnel LAP VC low order path aggregation point HOP V VC virtual concatenated VCAT circuit or VC low order path V VC low order path VCAT circuit Size The circuit size VC low order path circuits are VC12 and VC3 ONS 15310 MA SDH VC high order path circuits are VC4 VC4 2c VC4 3c or VC4 4c VC4
385. nsert valid pluggable equipment unlocked enabled Insert pluggable equipment with the incorrect rate Pluggable equipment does not work with the board configuration locked disabled mismatchofEq uipment locked enabled maintena nce Reset the pluggable equipment locked enabled maintenance Provision an unsupported service rate Pluggable equipment does not work with the board configuration locked disabled mismatchofEq uipment amp maintenance m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 amp APPENDIX Network Element Defaults Note The terms Unidirectional Path Switched Ring and UPSR may appear in Cisco literature These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration Rather these terms as well as Path Protected Mesh Network and PPMN refer generally to Cisco s path protection feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This appendix describes the factory configured default network element NE settings for the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH It includes descriptions of card default settings node default settings and Cisco Transport Controller CTC default settings For procedures for importing exporting and editing th
386. ntains 64 bit statistics in the etherStatsHighCapacityTable which provides 64 bit RMON support for the HC RMON MIB The etherStatsHighCapacityTable is an extension of the etherStatsTable that adds 16 new columns for performance monitoring data in 64 bit format There is a one to one relationship between the etherStatsTable and etherStatsHighCapacityTable when rows are created or deleted in either table 12 10 2 History Control Group The History Control group defines sampling functions for one or more monitor interfaces in the historyControlTable The values in this table as specified in RFC 2819 are derived from the historyControlTable and etherHistoryTable 12 10 2 1 History Control Table The historyControlTable maximum row size is determined by multiplying the number of ports on a card by the number of sampling periods Table 12 6 RMON History Control Periods and History Categories Sampling Periods Total Values or Buckets historyControlValue Variable historyControl Variable 15 minutes 32 24 hours 7 1 minute 60 60 minutes 24 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EEE Chapter12 SNMP B SNMP Remote Monitoring 12 10 2 2 Row Creation in historyControlTable To activate a historyControlTable row the SetRequest PDU must contain all needed values and have a status variable value of 2 createRequest All OIDs in the SetRequest PDU should be type OID 0 for
387. nts on the failed working line and PSD increments on the active protect line MS SES Multiplex Section Severely Errored Second MS SES is a one second period which contains 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES For more information refer to ITU T G 829 Section 5 1 3 MS SESR Multiplex Section Severely Errored Second ratio MS SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval MS UAS Multiplex Section Unavailable Seconds MS UAS is a count of the seconds when the section was unavailable A section becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as MS SESs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as MS SESs When the condition is entered MS SESs decrement and then count toward MS UAS 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Parameter Definition NIOS Non Idle Ordered Sets NIOS is a count of received packets containing non idle ordered sets OPR Optical Power Received OPR is the measure of average optical power received as a percentage of the nominal OPT OPR AVG Average Receive Optical Power dBm
388. nual routing are available for VCAT members on CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 cards common fiber routing and split fiber routing In common fiber routing all VCAT members travel on the same fibers which eliminates delay between members Three protection options are available for common fiber routing Fully Protected PCA and Unprotected Split fiber routing allows the individual members to be routed on different fibers or each member to have different routing constraints This mode offers the greatest bandwidth efficiency and also the possibility of differential delay which is handled by the buffers on the terminating cards or ports Three protection options are available for split fiber routing Fully Protected Unprotected and DRI In both common fiber and split fiber routing each member can use a different protection scheme however for common fiber routing CTC checks the combination to make sure that a valid route exists If it does not the user must modify the protection type In both common fiber and split fiber routing intermediate nodes treat the VCAT members as normal circuits that are independently routed and protected by the SDH network At the terminating nodes these member circuits are multiplexed into a contiguous stream of data Figure 7 3 shows an example of common fiber routing Figure 7 3 VCAT Common Fiber Routing VCAT Member 1 C 8 Member 2 CE 100T 8 Intermediate CE 100T 8 NE Member 1 V
389. ocked enabled maintenance Put the port or cross connect in the unlocked administrative state locked disabled FLT Put the port or cross connect in the Automatic In Service administrative state locked disabled Automatic In Service amp FLT Put the port or cross connect in the locked disabled administrative state locked enabled disabled locked enabled disabled amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect Put the port or cross connect in a loopback locked disabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance Put the VCAT cross connect in the locked outOfGroup administrative state locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States Table B 5 Transitions continued Current Service State Action Service State Transitions ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State locked disabled FLT amp maintenance amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is cleared locked enabled maintenance amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the unlocked administrative state Note VCAT In Group members are in the locked disabled FLT or unlocked enabled service state locked disabled FLT amp outOfGroup Put the VCAT cross connect in the Automatic In Service administrative state Note VCAT In Group
390. ode view Shelf For DWDM configurations the shelf where the alarmed object is located Visible in network view Slot Slot where the alarm occurred appears only in network and node view Port Port where the alarm is raised For VCTRM LP and VTTerm the port refers to the upstream card it is partnered with Path Width Indicates how many VCs are contained in the alarmed path This information compliments the alarm object notation which is explained in Table 10 3 on page 10 3 Sev Severity level CR Critical MJ Major MN Minor NA Not Alarmed NR Not Reported ST Status R raised C clear SA When checked indicates a service affecting alarm Cond The error message alarm name These names are alphabetically defined in the Alarm Troubleshooting chapter of the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide Description Description of the alarm Num Num number is the quantity of alarm messages received and is increments automatically as alarms occur to display the current total of received error messages The column is hidden by default to view it right click a column and choose Show Column Num Ref Ref reference is a unique identification number assigned to each alarm to reference a specific alarm message that is displayed The column is hidden by default to view it right click a column and choose Show Column Ref Table 10 2 lists the color codes for alarm and condition severities In addition to t
391. odes in icon form instead of detailed form meaning the nodes appear as rectangles with ports on the sides Refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide for more information about consolidated links 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation CTC Window 4 6 3 Card View Card view provides information about individual ONS 15310 MA SDH cards Use this view to perform card specific maintenance and provisioning Figure 4 6 A graphic showing the ports on the card appears in the graphic area The status area provides the node name slot number of alarms card type equipment type and either the card status active or standby card service state if the card is present or port service state Table 4 4 on page 4 9 The information that appears and the actions you can perform depend on the card Figure 4 6 CTC Card View of an E1 21 E3 DS3 3 Card Card identification and status 310ma 25 Cisco Transport Controller Ele Edit View Tools Help St e gt G 5 310ma 25 Slot 1 061 28 053 DS1 28 053 3 Wideband DS1 Broadband DS3 EC1 Eqpt DS1_28_D33_EC1_3 104 44 46 13 01 Status Active 02 24 46 2 3 Service State IS NR zeal HESSA E 117583 Port 1 DS1 00S AU AINS 164 78 43 Port 2 D 1 00S AU AINS 05 54 19 63 Port 3 D 1 00 AU AINS 667263 20716 Port 4 D 1 0
392. ol mechanisms Mode LAP D is set to either Network or User mode This parameter sets the LAP D frame command response C R value which indicates whether the frame is a command or a response e Maximum transmission unit MTU The LAP D N201 parameter sets the maximum number of octets in a LAP D information frame The range is 512 to 1500 octets Note The MTU must be the same size for all NEs on the network e Transmission Timers The following LAP D timers can be provisioned The T200 timer sets the timeout period for initiating retries or declaring failures The T203 timer provisions the maximum time between frame exchanges that is the trigger for transmission of the LAP D keep alive Receive Ready RR frames Fixed values are assigned to the following LAP D parameters Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI A fixed value of 0 is assigned e Service Access Point Identifier SAPI A fixed value of 62 is assigned e N200 supervisory frame retransmissions A fixed value of 3 is assigned 8 6 3 OSI Connectionless Network Service OSI connectionless network service is implemented by using the Connectionless Network Protocol CLNP and Connectionless Network Service CLNS CLNP and CLNS are described in the ISO 8473 standard CLNS provides network layer services to the transport layer through CLNP CLNS does not perform connection setup or termination because paths are determined independently for each packe
393. om Path is rerouted Complete Completes a manual roll after a valid signal is received You can complete a manual roll if it is in a ROLL_PENDING status and you have not yet completed the roll or have not cancelled its sibling roll Force Valid Signal Forces a roll onto the Roll To Circuit destination without a valid signal If you choose Force Valid Signal traffic on the circuit that is involved in the roll will be dropped when the roll is completed Finish Completes the circuit processing of both manual and automatic rolls and changes the circuit status from ROLL_PENDING to DISCOVERED After a roll the Finish button also removes any cross connects that are no longer used from the Roll From Circuit field Cancel Cancels the roll process When the roll mode is Manual cancel roll is only allowed before you click the Complete button When the roll mode is Auto cancel roll is only allowed before a good signal is detected by the node or before you click the Force Valid Signal button 7 9 2 Roll Status Table 7 10 lists the roll statuses You can only reroute circuits that have a DISCOVERED status See Table 7 1 on page 7 3 for a list of circuit statuses You cannot reroute circuits that are in the ROLL_PENDING status Table 7 10 Roll Statuses State Description ROLL_PENDING The roll is awaiting completion or cancellation ROLL_COMPLETED The roll is complete Click the Finish button ROLL_CANCELLED The
394. om a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to the working line MS PSC W increments on the failed line and MS PSC R or MS PSC S increments on the active protect line MS PSD Multiplex Section Protection Switching Duration MS PSD applies to the length of time in seconds that service is carried on the protection line For a working line MS PSD is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line For the protection line MS PSD is a count of the seconds that the line was used to carry service The MS PSD PM is only applicable if revertive line level protection switching is used MS PSD increments on the active protect line and MS PSD W increments on the failed working line MS PSD R In a four fiber MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Duration Ring MS PSD R is a count of the seconds that the protection line was used to carry service A count is only incremented if ring switching is used MS PSD S In a four fiber MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Duration Span MS PSD S is a count of the seconds that the protection line was used to carry service A count is only incremented if span switching is used MS PSD W For a working line in a two fiber MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Duration Working MS PSD W is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the protection line MS PSD W increme
395. on 10 8 Table 10 8 Alarm Profile Buttons 10 10 Table 10 9 Alarm Profile Editing Options 10 11 Table 11 1 Electrical Ports that Report RX Direction for TCAs 11 2 Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 4 Table 11 3 PM Parameters for E1 Ports 11 15 Table 11 4 PM Parameters for the Ports 11 17 Table 11 5 DS3 Port PMs 11 19 Table 11 6 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Ether Ports Statistics Parameters 11 20 Table 11 7 maxBaseRate for VC high order path Circuits 11 22 Table 11 8 Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval 11 22 Table 11 9 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 ML 100T 8 POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode 11 23 Table 11 10 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 POS Ports Parameters for GFP F Mode 11 23 Table 11 11 STM1 Port PM Parameters 11 26 Table 11 12 STM4 Port PM Parameters 11 28 Table 11 13 STM16 Port PM Parameters 11 30 Table 12 1 SNMP Message Types 12 5 Table 12 2 IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMP Agent 12 5 Table 12 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Proprietary MIBs 12 7 Table 12 4 Supported IETF Traps for the ONS 15310 MA SDH 12 11 Table 12 5 Supported ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings 12 12 Table 12 6 RMON History Control Periods and History Categories 12 15 Table 12 7 0105 Supported in the AlarmTable 12 17 Table A 1 LED Description A 3 Table A 2 SFP Specifications 10 Table A 3 CE MR 6 SFP Specifications 10 Table A 4 Single Mode Fiber SFP Port Cabling Specifications 11
396. on 11 11 SES parameter definition 11 11 SES PFE parameter definition 11 11 SES PM parameter definition 11 11 SES P parameter definition 11 11 SESP P parameter definition 11 11 SESR PM parameter definition 11 12 SESR P parameter definition 11 12 SES SM parameter definition 11 12 SFP See also PPMs Index M actuator button illustration 2 22 bail clasp illustration 2 22 card compatibility 2 20 to 2 21 description 2 21 mylar tab illustration 2 22 overview 2 3 specifications 9 shared secret 5 8 shared secrets 5 8 Shelf Temperature 1 10 shelf assembly ONS 15310 MA fans 1 23 LEDs 1 24 specifications 1 shelf assembly ONS 15310 MA SDH cabling 1 10 front door 1 6 mounting 1 4 overview 1 1 rack installation 1 2 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP single rolls 7 20 SNMP basic components 12 2 community names 12 12 message types 12 4 MIBs 12 5 overview 12 1 proxy support over firewalls 12 13 RMON 12 14 traps 12 11 version support 12 4 soak time 7 5 SOCKS 8 20 soft reset 4 19 software See also CTC autodiscovery of newer software releases 4 3 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Index delivery methods 4 1 installation 4 1 reverting to protect load 4 20 span upgrades automatic 9 9 manual 9 9 SPE See synchronous payload envelope split routing 7 12 SSH 5 7 SSM 6 2 SST B 1 states See administrative states See circuits states See serv
397. ond RS UAS is a count of the seconds when the regenerator section was unavailable A section becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as RS UASs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as RS UASs Rx AISS P Receive Path Alarm Indication Signal Seconds AISS P means that an alarm indication signal occurred on the receive end of the path This parameter is a count of seconds containing one or more AIS defects Rx BBE P Receive Path Background Block Error BBE P is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES Rx EB P Receive Path Errored Block EB P indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Table 11 2 Parameter Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Definition Rx ES P Receive Path Errored Second ES P is a one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect Rx ESR P Receive Path Errored Second Ratio ESR P is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval Rx SES P Receive Path Severely Errored Seconds SES P is a one second period containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES Rx
398. one empty chassis fan tray 48 15 W Heat dissipation for maximum load and minimum load on cabinet AC power with empty 15310 MA 181 W e Power drop Power in minus Power out cabinet ONS 15310 MA SDH power abs 390 W Power drop Power in minus Power out ONS 15310 MA SDH stand alone power abs 234 W Intake and exhaust temperature Delta on cabinet 2 9 Intake and exhaust temperature Delta on ONS 15310 MA SDH 7 9 EC Class of Equipment for Cooling configuration Class 1 for ONS 15310 MA SDH cabinet EC Class of Equipment for Cooling configuration Class 2 for ONS 15310 MA SDH stand alone A 4 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP Statements The ONS 15310 MA SDH can be installed in OSP with a sealed weatherproof and GR 487 CORE Issue 2 complaint OSP cabinet The ONS 15310 MA SDH OSP was tested and qualified for sealed weather protected locations environmental requirements of GR 487 CORE Issue 2 The ONS 15310E MA SDH OSP was tested and qualified to the non weather protected locations environmental requirements of EN300 019 1 4 and 2 4 Class T 4 2H and 4M5 The ONS 15310E MA SDH OSP was tested and qualified for the weather protected locations environmental requirements of EN 300 019 1 3 and EN 300 019 1 3 Class 3 3 and for WW EMC requirements NEBS compliance covers FCC and other WW EMC requirements based on CISPR22 and IEC 61000 4 2 to12 standards Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ex 78 194
399. only shows the LOS alarm in this window because it supersedes LOF The LOF alarm can still be retrieved in the Conditions window The Path Width column in the Alarms and Conditions tabs expands upon alarmed object information contained in the access identifier AID string such as VC 4 1 3 by giving the number of synchronous transport signals VCs contained in the alarmed path For example the Path Width will tell you whether a Critical alarm applies to an VC3 or an VC4 16c The column reports the width as a 1 3 6 12 48 etc as appropriate understood to be VC N 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management viewing Alarms Table 10 1 lists the Alarms tab column headings and the information recorded in each column Table 10 1 Alarms Column Descriptions Column Information Recorded New Indicates a new alarm To change this status click either the Synchronize button or the Delete Cleared Alarms button Date Date and time of the alarm Node Shows the name of the node where the condition or alarm occurred Visible in network view Object TL1 AID for the alarmed object For an VCMON LP or VTmon this is the monitored VC high order path or VC low order path object which is explained in Table 10 3 on page 10 3 Eqpt Type type in this slot appears only in network and n
400. ons merge successfully into the master circuit and the unaligned connections remain in the original circuits All connections in the completed master circuit use the original master circuit name All connections from the master circuit and at least one connection from the other selected circuits must be used in the resulting circuit for the merge to succeed If a merge fails the master circuit and all other circuits remain unchanged When the circuit merge completes successfully the resulting circuit retains the name of the master circuit 7 11 Reconfigured Circuits You can reconfigure multiple circuits which is typically necessary when a large number of circuits are in the PARTIAL status When reconfiguring multiple circuits the selected circuits can be any combination of DISCOVERED PARTIAL DISCOVERED_TL1 or PARTIAL circuits You can reconfigure tunnels LAP circuits CTC created circuits and TL1 created circuits The Reconfigure command maintains the names of the original cross connects Use the CTC Tools gt Circuits gt Reconfigure Circuits command to reconfigure selected circuits During reconfiguration CTC reassembles all connections of the selected circuits into circuits based on path size direction and alignment Some circuits might merge and others might split into multiple circuits If the resulting circuit is a valid circuit it appears as a DISCOVERED circuit Otherwise the circuit appears as a PARTIAL or PARTI
401. ormat as specified in ISO 8348 The NSAP address is divided into an initial domain part IDP and a domain specific part DSP NSAP fields are shown in Table 8 8 NSAP field values are in hexadecimal format All NSAPs are editable and shorter NSAPs can be used however NSAPs for all NEs residing within the same OSI network area usually have the same NSAP format Table 8 8 NSAP Fields Field Definition Description IDP AFI Authority and Specifies the NSAP address format The initial value is 39 for the format identifier ISO DCC address format IDI Initial domain Specifies the country code The initial value is 840F the United States identifier country code padded with an F DSP DFI DSP format Specifies the DSP format The initial value is 80 indicating the DSP identifier format follows American National Standards Institute ANSI standards ORG Organization Organization identifier The initial value is 000000 Reserved Reserved Reserved NSAP field The Reserved field is normally all zeros 0000 RD Routing domain Defines the routing domain The initial value is 0000 AREA Area Identifies the OSI routing area to which the node belongs The initial value is 0000 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity BN TCP IP and OSI Networking Table 8 8 NSAP Fields continued Field Definition Description
402. ort An EIA TIA 232 craft interface is provided and is used for TL1 provisioning The craft interface is set to 9600 baud no parity and 1 stop bit by default A 2 2 Nonvolatile Memory The ONS 15310 MA SDH nonvolatile memory has a 128 MB Compact Flash card A 2 3 CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 Cards The CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 cards have the following specifications Environmental Operating temperature Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 ga 78 19417 01 Appendix A Specifications Card Specifications C Temp 0 to 55 degrees Celsius 32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity Power consumption 1 10 53 W Dimensions Height 176 mm 6 93 in Width 34 29 mm 1 35 in Depth 238 25 mm 9 38 in Weight not including clam shell 0 499 kg 1 1 Ib A Caution Do not install CE 100T 8 and ML 100T 8 cards in OSP A 2 4 CE MR 6 Card The CE MR 6 card has the following specifications Environmental Operating temperature I Temp 40 to 65 degrees Celsius 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit Operating humidity 5 to 85 percent noncondensing Operation is guaranteed for 96 hours at 95 percent relative humidity Power consumption 63 00 W 1 32 A at 48 V 214 96 BTU hr Dimensions Height 176 28 mm 6 94 in Width 34 29
403. orts statistics parameters 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards Table 11 6 Parameter CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Ether Ports Statistics Parameters Definition Time Last Cleared A time stamp indicating the last time statistics were reset Link Status Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receiving a valid Ethernet signal carrier from the attached Ethernet device up means link integrity is present and down means link integrity is not present iflnOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing octets rx TotalPkts The total number of receive packets iflnUcastPkts The total number of unicast packets delivered to an appropriate protocol ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free ifInBroadcastPkts The number of packets delivered by this sublayer to a higher sub layer that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol iflnErrors Number of inbound packets discarded because they contain errors ifOutOctets The total number of transmitted octets including framing packets txTotalPkts The to
404. otection types Preemptible PCA circuits will use server trails with the Preemptible attribute e Unprotected In Unprotected Server Trail CTC assumes that the circuits going out from that specific port will not be protected by provider network and will look for a secondary path from source to destination if you are creating a protected circuit Fully Protected In Fully Protected Server Trail CTC assumes that the circuits going out from that specific port will be protected by provider network and will not look for a secondary path from source to destination Note Only SNCP protection is available on server trails MS SPRing procection is not available on server trail 7 12 2 VCAT Circuit Routing over Server Trails An VC4 3c server trail can be used to route VC4 3c circuits and an VC4 server trail can be used to route VCA circuits Similarly a VC3 server trail can be used to route VC3 circuits For example to route a VC4 3c 2v circuit over a server trail you must enable split fiber routing and create two VC4 3c server trails and route each member manually or automatically over each server trail To route a VC4 12c 2v circuit over a server trail you must enable split fiber routing and create two VC4 server trails and route each member manually or automatically over each server trail Note Server trails can only be created between any two optical ports or STM 1E ports VCAT circuities can be created over server
405. other routers When all LSPs are propagated to all routers each router has a complete map of the network topology in the form of LSPs Routers use the LSPs and the SPF algorithm to compute routes to every destination in the network OSI networks are divided into areas and domains An area is a group of contiguous networks and attached hosts that is designated as an area by a network administrator A domain is a collection of connected areas Routing domains provides full connectivity to all ESs within the domains Routing within the same area is known as Level routing Routing between two areas is known as Level 2 routing LSPs that are exchanged within a Level 1 area are called L1 LSPs LSPs that are exchanged across Level 2 areas are called L2 LSPs Figure 8 16 shows an example of Level and Level 2 routing Note The ONS 15310 MA SDH do not support Level 1 Level 2 routing Level 1 Level 2 routing is supported by the ONS 15454 ONS 15454 SDH and the ONS 15600 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking Figure 8 16 Level 1 and Level 2 OSI Routing lt a lt N ES Level 1 g g Level 1 g 5 routing routing Domain When you provision an ONS 15310 MA SDH for a network with NEs that use both the TCP IP and OSI protocol stacks you will provision it as one of the following
406. ou have completed this procedure Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Administrative and Service States This appendix describes the administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH cards ports and cross connects For circuit state information see Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels Software Release 6 0 and later states are based on the generic state model defined in Telcordia GR 1093 Core Issue 2 and ITU T X 731 B 1 Service States Service states include a Administrative State a Operational State and one or more Secondary States SST Table B 1 lists the service state PSTs and PSTQs supported by the ONS 15310 MA SDH Table B 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers Primary State Primary State Qualifier Definition unlocked enabled In Service and Normal The entity is fully operational and will perform as provisioned locked disabled Out of Service and Autonomous The entity is not operational because of an autonomous event locked disabled Out of Service and Autonomous Management The entity is not operational because of an autonomous event and has also been manually removed from service locked enabled Out of Service and Management The entity has been manually removed from service Table B 2 defines the SSTs supported by the ONS 15310 MA SDH 78 19417 01 Cisco ON
407. ound Description MI Figure 1 6 Ground Holes on the Left and Right Sides of the ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15310 MA SDH For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge ESD and Grounding Guide Note Use an external disconnect for service purposes and install it according to local site practice The ONS 15310 MA SDH DC power provides redundant 48 VDC power terminals on the rear of the chassis The terminals are labeled A and B and are located at each end of the shelf assembly 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Shelf Temperature To install redundant power feeds use four power cables and one ground cable For a single power feed only two power cables and one ground cable are required A 1 inch minimum wide copper braid is required to ground the ONS 15310 MA SDH outside plant OSP cabinet and is recommended for indoor installations For example central office Use 12 AWG power cables and a 6 AWG ground cable and to ensure circuit overcurrent protection use a conductor with low impedance The conductor must have the capability to safely conduct any fault current that might be imposed Do not use aluminum conductors Not
408. ount E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1 day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1 day SAS 8 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1 day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 0 38700 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day CV 3820 BIP 0 3715200 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day ES 250 0 86400 seconds E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 387 BPV 0 38700 count E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LOSS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 E1 63 E3 DS3 3 DS3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 3865
409. pan remains on the network map but its color changes to gray to indicate that the span is down If you restart your CTC session while the failure is active the new CTC session cannot discover the span and its span line does not appear on the network map Subsequently circuits routed on a network span that goes down appear as DISCOVERED during the current CTC session but appear as PARTIAL to users who log in after the span failure DISCOVERED TL A TL 1 created circuit or a TL1 like CTC created circuit is complete A complete path from source to destinations exists PARTIAL TLI1 A TL 1 created circuit or a TL1 like CTC created circuit is missing a cross connect or circuit span network link and a complete path from source to destinations does not exist CONVERSION PENDING An existing circuit in a topology upgrade is set to this status The circuit returns to the DISCOVERED status when the topology upgrade is complete For more information about in service topology upgrades see Chapter 9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Circuit Properties Table 7 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Circuit Status continued Status Definition Activity PENDING MERGE Any new circuits created to represent an alternate path in a topology upgrade are set to this status to indicate that the circuit is temporary Th
410. pared to another route with different properties for transporting a particular packet or class of packets e A routing algorithm Shortest Path First SPF that uses information contained in the RIB to derive routes between ESs In OSI networking discovery is based on announcements An ES uses the ES IS protocol end system hello ESH message to announce its presence to ISs and ESs connected to the same network Any ES or IS that is listening for ESHs gets a copy ISs store the NSAP address and the corresponding subnetwork address pair in routing tables ESs might store the address or they might wait to be informed by ISs when they need such information An IS composes intermediate system hello ISH messages to announce its configuration information to ISs and ESs that are connected to the same broadcast subnetwork Like the ESHs the ISH contains the addressing information for the IS the NET and the subnetwork point of attachment address SNPA and a holding time ISHs might also communicate a suggested ES configuration time recommending a configuration timer to ESs The exchange of ISHs is called neighbor greeting or initialization Each router learns about the other routers with which they share direct connectivity After the initialization each router constructs a link state packet LSP The LSP contains a list of the names of the IS s neighbors and the cost to reach each of the neighbors Routers then distribute the LSPs to all of the
411. plications where the complete end to end VCAT circuit is not in a CTC managed network CTC will only see either the source or the destination of the Virtual Concatenated Group VCG and some of the intermediate nodes Figure 7 5 shows an end to end VCAT circuit The termination points of the end to end VCAT circuit with VCAT functionality are referred to as the VCAT Source and VCAT Destination The termination points of the CTC managed circuit which is the Open Ended VCAT circuit is referred to as simply the Source and Destination 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Virtual Concatenated Circuits Figure 7 5 Open Ended VCAT N Non CTC Managed Network SONET SDH Port Destination Ny Destination CTC Managed Network VCAT Destination VCAT Source Source SONET SDH Port Open ended Circuit End to end VCAT Circuit gt 240645 Open ended VCAT circuits can originate or terminate on any pair of OC N ports and you can route open ended VCAT circuits using any of the cards and ports supported by VCAT The CTC circuit creation wizard provides an additional check box in the VCAT attributes pane to enable Open VCAT circuit creation Enabling the check box differentiates open ended VCAT from reg
412. pmthresholds vclo farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 S8 TMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day BBE 150 count 0 51753600 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 2 15310E CTX K9 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTX 2500 S TMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day EB 125 count 0 172800000 CTX 2500 S TMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 S TMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 S8 TMI PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min BBE 15 count 0 539100 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min EB 15 count 0 1800000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds velo nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend I day BBE 150 count 0 51753600 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend I day EB 125 coun
413. port from the unlocked enabled service state to the locked enabled disabled service state You must first put the port in the locked enabled maintenance service state Once a port is in the locked enabled maintenance state the NODE general ForceToOosDsbldStateChange default setting of TRUE allows you to put a port in locked enabled disabled even if the following conditions exist The port is a timing source The port is used for line section or tunneling DCC e The port supports 1 1 protection or bidirectional line switched rings MS SPRings e Cross connects are present on the port e Overhead connections or overhead terminations are in use such as express orderwire local orderwire or user data channels UDCs To change this behavior so that you cannot put a port in locked enabled disabled if any of these conditions exist set the NODE general ForceToOosDsbldStateChange default setting to FALSE For the procedure to change node defaults refer to the Maintain the Node chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Note Deleting a port or cross connect removes the entity from the system The deleted entity does not transition to another service state Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States Table B 5 Transitions Current Service State Action Service State Transitions ONS 15310 MA SDH Port
414. pport Over Firewalls 12 8 SNMPv1 v2 Proxy Support Over Firewalls Firewalls often used for isolating security risks inside networks or from outside have traditionally prevented SNMP and other NMS monitoring and control applications from accessing NEs beyond a firewall An application level proxy is available at each firewall to transport SNMP protocol data units PDU between the NMS and NEs This proxy integrated into the firewall NE SNMP agent exchanges requests and responses between the NMS and NEs and forwards NE autonomous messages to the NMS The usefulness of the proxy feature is that network operations centers NOCs can fetch performance monitoring data such as remote monitoring RMON statistics across the entire network with little provisioning at the NOC and no additional provisioning at the NEs The firewall proxy interoperates with common NMS such as HP OpenView It is intended to be used with many NEs through a single NE gateway in a gateway network element GNE end network element ENE topology Up to 64 SNMP requests such as get getnext or getbulk are supported at any time behind single or multiple firewalls For security reasons the SNMP proxy feature must be turned on at all receiving and transmitting NEs to be enabled For instructions to do this refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide The feature does not interoperate with earlier releases 12 9 SNMPv3 Proxy Configuration The GNE can act as a p
415. profiles Available Displays all profiles available on each node Usage Displays all entities nodes and alarm subjects present in the network and which profiles contain the alarm Can be printed 10 4 3 Alarm Profile Editing Table 10 9 lists and describes the five profile editing options available when you right click an alarm item in the profile column Table 10 9 Alarm Profile Editing Options Button Description Store Saves a profile in a node or in a file Rename Changes a profile name Clone Creates a profile that contains the same alarm severity settings as the profile being cloned Reset Restores a profile to its previous state or to the original state if it has not yet been applied Remove Removes a profile from the table editor 10 4 4 Alarm Severity Options To change or assign alarm severity left click the alarm severity you want to change in the alarm profile column Seven severity levels appear for the alarm e Not reported NR e Not alarmed NA Minor MN e Major MJ Critical CR e Use Default Inherited I Inherited and Use Default severity levels only appear in alarm profiles They do not appear when you view alarms history or conditions Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Bl Alarm Suppression 10 4 5 Row Display Options In the network v
416. protection switch protection paths For more information see the 7 6 Subnetwork Connection Protection Circuits section on page 7 9 State Allows you to edit cross connect service states Merge Allows you to merge aligned circuits For more information see the 7 10 Merged Circuits section on page 7 22 Using the Export command from the File menu you can export data from the Linear Multiplex Section Protection Selectors Linear Multiplex Section Protection Switch Counts State and Merge tabs in HTML comma separated values CSV or tab separated values TSV format The Show Detailed Map checkbox in the Edit Circuit window updates the graphical view of the circuit to show more detailed routing information such as Circuit direction unidirectional bidirectional The nodes VCs and VTs through which the circuit passes including slots and port numbers The circuit source and destination points Open Shortest Path First OSPF area IDs Link protection linear multiplex section protection unprotected 1 1 and bandwidth STMN Alarms and states can also be viewed on the circuit map including Alarm states of nodes on the circuit route Number of alarms on each node organized by severity Port service states on the circuit route Alarm state color of most severe alarm on port Loopbacks Path trace states Path selectors states Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01
417. pter 2 Card Reference CE 100T 8 Card Each 10 100 Ethernet port can be mapped to an SDH channel in increments of VC12 or VC3 granularity There are eight backend packet over SDH POS ports VCAT groups VCGs available on the ML 100T 8 card Additionally the CE 100T 8 card supports packet processing classification quality of service QoS based queuing and traffic scheduling Figure 2 3 shows the CE 100T 8 card faceplate and block diagram Figure 2 3 CE 100T 8 Faceplate and Block Diagram CE 100T 8 POS Mapper c and eem ENS nn 455 Mbit f Processor lt lt 8 5 Engine gt HL LINK Octal 1 SMII Wd B 1 x 8 8 an u a DIAC RJas 7 PHY lt Z gt Queuing Demux 622 Mbit SMII r lt gt BTC48 gt k gi UNK 7 POS 155 Mbit p g act SMII Mapper L LINK and 5 3 VCAT n H ACT LCAS Engine Intercard 4 ru Ethernet Links E SMI PHY lt L LINK 5 AGT SMII Mil H unk to gt CPU Complex S 6 E act Adapter E L LINK 7 ri L LINK 8 ri act The following paragraphs describe the general functions of the CE 1
418. r procedures see the Turn Up a Node chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Provisioning IP over CLNS tunnels on Cisco routers requires the following prerequisite tasks as well as other OSI provisioning Required Enable IS IS e Optional Enable routing for an area on an interface Optional Assign multiple area addresses Optional Configure IS IS interface parameters Optional Configure miscellaneous IS IS parameters The Cisco IOS commands used to create IP over CLNS tunnels CTunnels are shown in Table 8 13 Table 8 13 IP Over CLNS Tunnel Cisco IOS Commands Step Step Purpose 1 Router config interface ctunnel Creates a virtual interface to transport IP over a interface number CLNS tunnel and enters interface configuration mode The interface number must be unique for each CTunnel interface 2 Router config if ctunnel destination Configures the destination parameter for the remote nsap address CTunnel Specifies the destination NSAPI address of the CTunnel where the IP packets are extracted 3 Router config if ip address Sets the primary or secondary IP address for an ip address mask interface If you are provisioning an IP over CLNS tunnel on a Cisco router always follow procedures provided in the Cisco IOS documentation for the router you are provisioning For information about ISO CLNS provisioning including IP over CLNS tunnels refer to the Configuring ISO CLN
419. r the default gateway is set to router interface A If the LAN uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP the default gateway and IP address are assigned automatically In Figure 8 2 a DHCP server is not available 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 2 Scenario 2 CTC and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Connected to Router LANA B os o CTC Workstation Int Router IP Address 192 168 1 100 IP Address of interface iAi to LAN iAi 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address of interface iBi to LAN iBi 192 168 2 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Host Routes N A Default Router N A Host Routes N A LAN B ONS 15310 2 IP Address 192 168 2 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192 168 2 1 Static Routes N A SDH RING ONS 15310 o s 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 2 10 IP Address 192 168 2 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192 168 2 1 Default Router 192 168 2 1 9 Static Routes N A Static Routes N A 8 2 3 Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15310 MA SDH Gateway ARP matches higher level IP addresses to the physical addresses of the destination host It uses a lookup table called ARP cache to perform the translation When the address is not found in the ARP cache a broadcast is sent o
420. r ASIC ESP P LP UAS Path SASP P EE LP ESR Level lt SESP P gt LP SESR lt UASP P LP BBER CVCP P HP EB ESCP P HP BBE SASCP P HP ES High SESCP P HP SES Order UASCP P HP UAS Path CVCP PFE HP ESR Level ESCP PFE HP SESR SASCP PFE HPSBBER SESCP PFE UASCP PFE PMs read on Mux Demux ASIC lt PMs read on LIU Card STM N 243070 The PM parameters for the DS3 port are listed in Table 11 5 The parameters are defined in Table 11 2 on page 11 4 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards Table 11 5 DS3 Port PMs Line NE Path NE Path FE VC3 Low End Path NE FE VC4 HP Path NE FE MS EB AISS P CVCP PFE LP BBE HP BBE MS ES CVP P ESCP PFE LP BBER HP BBER MS SES ESP P SASCP PFE LP EB HP EB LOSS L SASP P SESCP PFE LP ES HP ES SESP P UASCP PFE LP ESR HP ESR UASP P LP SES HP SES CVCP P LP SESR HP SESR ESCP P LP UAS HP UAS SASP P SESCP P UASCP P 1 C Bit and M23 framing path PM parameters 2 The C bit PMs PMs that contain the text CP P are applicable only if line format is C bit 3 DS3 ports support SAS P only on the Rx path 11 6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards The following sections define PM parameters and definitions for the CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Ethernet cards 11 6 1 CE 100T 8 CE
421. r Capacities 10 9 Alarm Severities 10 9 Alarm Profiles 10 9 10 4 1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles 10 10 10 4 2 Alarm Profile Buttons 10 10 10 4 3 Alarm Profile Editing 10 11 10 4 4 Alarm Severity Options 10 11 10 4 5 Row Display Options 10 12 10 4 6 Applying Alarm Profiles 10 12 Alarm Suppression 10 12 10 5 1 Alarms Suppressed for Maintenance 10 13 10 5 2 Alarms Suppressed by User Command 10 13 External Alarms and Controls 10 13 10 6 1 External Alarm Input 10 13 10 6 2 External Control Output 10 14 Performance Monitoring 11 1 ini is a a ier 11 6 Threshold Performance Monitoring 11 1 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 11 3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring 11 3 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions 11 4 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Ports 11 13 11 5 1 E1 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 14 11 5 2 E3 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 16 11 5 3 DS3 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 17 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards 11 19 11 6 1 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 ML 100T 8 Card Ethernet Performance Monitoring Parameters 11 19 11 6 1 1 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card Ether Ports Statistics Window 11 19 11 6 1 2 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card Ether Ports Utilization Window 11 22 11 6 1 3 100 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Card Ether Ports History Window 11 22 11 6 1 4 CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Car
422. rative States Definition Service State Transitions unlocked Puts the entity in service Automatic In Service Puts the entity in automatic in service locked disabled Removes the entity from service and disables it locked maintenance Removes the entity from service for maintenance locked outOfGroup VCAT circuits only Removes a VCAT member cross connect from service and from the group of members B 3 Service State Transitions This section describes the transition from one service state to the next for cards ports and cross connects A service state transition is based on the action performed on the entity Note When an entity is put in the locked maintenance administrative state the ONS 15310 MA SDH suppresses all standing alarms on that entity All alarms and events appear on the Conditions tab You can change this behavior for the LPBKFACILITY and LPBKTERMINAL alarms To display these alarms on the Alarms tab set the NODE general ReportLoopbackConditionsOnOOS MTPorts to TRUE on the NE Defaults tab B 3 1 Card Service State Transitions Table B 4 lists card service state transitions Table B 4 Current Service State ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Service State Transitions Action Next Service State unlocked enabled Change the administrative state to locked maintenance locked enabled maintenance Delete the card locked disabled unassigned
423. reboots the card and reloads the operating system and the application software A hard reset temporarily removes power from the card and clears all buffer memory 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation Database Backup From the node view select a card and right click to open a menu with the hard reset and soft reset commands A card must be in the Out of Service and Management Maintenance locked enabled maintenance service state before you can perform a hard reset 4 10 Database Backup You can store a back up version of the database on the workstation running CTC This operation should be part of a regular ONS 15310 MA SDH maintenance program performed at approximately weekly intervals and should also be completed when preparing an ONS 15310 MA SDH for a pending natural disaster such as a flood A database backup may be restored in two ways partial or complete A partial database restore operation restores only the provisioning data A complete database restore operation restores both system and provisioning data For more information on restore database refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Note The following parameters are not backed up and restored node name IP address mask and gateway and Internet Inter ORB Protocol IIOP port If you change the node name and then restore a backed up database with a d
424. received including error packets that were 65 to 172 octets in length m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Table 11 6 Parameter Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards CE 100T 8 CE MR 6 and ML 100T 8 Ether Ports Statistics Parameters continued Definition etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets received including error packets that were 128 to 255 octets in length etherStatsPkts256to51 1 Octets The total number of packets received including error packets that were 256 to 511 octets in length etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets The total number of packets received including error packets that were 512 to 1023 octets in length etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octet S The total number of packets received including error packets that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length etherStatsBroadcastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address This does not include multicast packets etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed
425. red value e The etherStatsOwner and its desired value up to 32 characters e The etherStatsStatus with a value of createRequest 2 The etherStatsTable creates a row if the SetRequest PDU is valid according to these rules The SNMP agent decides the value of etherStatsIndex when the row is created and this value changes when an Ethernet interface is added or deleted it is not sequentially allotted or contiguously numbered A newly Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter12 SNMP SNMP Remote Monitoring created row will have an etherStatsStatus value of valid 1 If the etherStatsTable row already exists or if the SetRequest PDU values are insufficient or do not make sense the SNMP agent returns an error code Note EtherStatsTable entries are not preserved if the SNMP agent is restarted 12 10 1 2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests Get requests and getNext requests for the etherStatsMulticastPkts and etherStatsBroadcastPkts columns return a value of zero because the variables are not supported by ONS 15310 MA SDH Ethernet operations 12 10 1 3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable To delete a row in the etherStatsTable the SetRequest PDU should contain an etherStatsStatus invalid value 4 The OID marks the row for deletion If required a deleted row can be recreated 12 10 1 4 64 Bit etherStatsHighCapacity Table The Ethernet statistics group co
426. reen 4 8 NE defaults ONS 15310 MA 2 overview 2 1 protection overview 3 1 SFP compatibility 2 20 to 2 21 card view description 4 14 list of tabs 4 14 caution definition i xxiii CE 100T 8 card block diagram 2 7 console port inactive 2 6 description 2 6 Ethernet ports history window 11 22 Ethernet ports statistics window 11 19 Ethernet ports utilization window 11 22 faceplate 2 7 LCAS 7 13 LEDs 2 8 2 12 ONS 15310 slot 1 26 overview 2 2 performance monitoring 11 19 ports line rate and connector type 1 27 port status 2 8 2 12 POS ports history window 11 25 POS ports statistics window 11 22 POS ports utilization window 11 24 release compatibility 2 3 resetting 4 19 specifications A 6 VCAT circuits 7 11 CE MR 6 card block diagram 2 11 description 2 9 faceplate 2 11 LCAS 7 13 overview 2 2 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 release compatibility 2 3 specifications A 7 VCAT circuits 7 11 CGV parameter definition 11 4 changing alarm profiles 10 10 default alarm severities See alarm profiles display of alarms 10 4 display of conditions 10 5 circuits See also VCAT circuits attributes 7 1 automatically creating 7 2 editing 17 6 exporting data 7 3 7 6 filtering 7 3 finding alarm affected 10 4 merging 7 22 protection types 7 5 provisioning with TL1 7 5 reconfiguring 7 23 States 7 4 status 7 3 types 7 2 Cisco IOS console port See console
427. rements for connecting a PC to the ONS 15310 MA SDH node Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation Bl CTC Login Table 4 2 Method ONS 15310 MA SDH Connection Methods Description Requirements Local craft Refers to onsite network connections between the CTC computer and the ONS 15310 MA SDH using one of the following e The RJ 45 LAN port on the ONS 15310 MA SDH 15310E CTX K9 card faceplate e A hub or switch to which the ONS 15310 MA SDH is connected If you do not use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP you must change the computer IP address subnet mask and default router or use automatic host detection Corporate LAN Refers to a connection to the ONS 15310 MA SDH through a corporate or network operations center NOC LAN The ONS 15310 MA SDH must be provisioned for LAN connectivity including IP address subnet mask default gateway The ONS 15310 MA SDH must be physically connected to the corporate LAN The CTC computer must be connected to the corporate LAN that has connectivity to the ONS 15310 MA SDH TL1 Refers to a connection to the ONS 15310 MA SDH using TL rather than CTC TL1 sessions can be started from CTC or you can use a TL1 terminal The physical connection can be a craft connection corporate LAN or a TL1 terminal Refer to the Cisco ONS SDH T
428. resholds vc4 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day SES 100 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day ES 648 0 86400 seconds E1 21 E3 DS3 3 E1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H AppendixC Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Card Default Settings Table C 3 E1_21_E3_DS3_3 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain
429. ress 192 168 2 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192 168 2 1 Static Routes Destination 192 168 1 100 Mask 255 255 255 255 ES Next Hop 192 168 2 1 Cost 2 SDH RING ONS 15310 Be 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 3 20 IP Address 192 168 4 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 v Default Router N A Default Router N A 2 Static Routes N A Static Routes N A The destination and subnet mask entries control access to the ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes e Ifa single CTC computer is connected to a router enter the complete CTC host route IP address as the destination with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 If CTC computers on a subnet are connected to a router enter the destination subnet in this example 192 168 1 0 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 fall CTC computers are connected to a router enter a destination of 0 0 0 0 and a subnet mask of 0 0 0 0 Figure 8 7 shows an example The IP address of router interface B is entered as the next hop and the cost number of hops from source to destination is 2 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 8 8 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 7 LAN D O Router 3 ZG pC z IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Host Routes N A es ONS 15310 2 IP Address 192 168 2 20 Subnet Mask 255
430. rformance Other encoding will produce slightly slower TL1 tunnel performance Support all IP Yes No TL1 tunnels do not support SNMP or RADIUS Server IP applications applications ITU Standard Yes No Only the static IP over CLNS tunnels meet ITU standards TL1 tunnels are new Tunnel traffic control Good Very good Both tunnel types provide good traffic control Security setup Complex No setup Static IP over CLNS tunnels require careful planning Because needed TL1 tunnels are carried by TL 1 no security provisioning is needed m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation Table 4 11 Category Common Control Card Reset li TL1 and Static IP Over CLNS Tunnels Comparison continued Static IP Over CLNS Tunnel Comments Potential to breach DCN Possible from DCC using IP Not possible potential exists to breach a DCN from a DCC using IP This potential does not exist for TL1 tunnels IP route management Expensive Automatic For static IP over CLNS tunnels route changes require manual provisioning at network routers GNEs and ENEs For TL1 tunnels route changes are automatic Flow control Weak Strong TL1 tunnels provide the best flow control Bandwidth sharing Weak Best among multiple applications Tunnel lifecycle Fixed CTC session TL1 tunnels are terminated when the CTC session ends Static
431. rk Connection Protection as the default A Subnetwork Connection Protection circuit requires two data communications channel DCC provisioned optical spans per node Subnetwork Connection Protection circuits can be created across these spans until their bandwidth is consumed 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Subnetwork Connection Protection Configurations Note If a Subnetwork Connection Protection circuit is created manually by TL1 DCCs are not needed Therefore Subnetwork Connection Protection circuits are limited by the cross connection bandwidth or the span bandwidth but not by the number of DCCs Because each traffic path is transported around the entire ring Subnetwork Connection Protection configurations are best suited for networks where traffic concentrates at one or two locations and is not widely distributed Subnetwork Connection Protection capacity is equal to its bit rate Services can originate and terminate on the same Subnetwork Connection Protection configuration or they can be passed to an adjacent access or interoffice ring for transport to the service terminating location 9 1 1 Subnetwork Connection Protection Bandwidth The span bandwidth consumed by a Subnetwork Connection Protection circuit is two times the circuit bandwidth because the circuit is duplicated The cross connection bandwidth consume
432. rm 23 7 Alarm 7 26 Alarm 24 8 Alarm 8 27 Common 17 24 9 Common 1 8 28 Alarm 25 10 Alarm 9 29 Alarm 26 11 Alarm 10 30 Alarm 27 12 Alarm 11 31 Alarm 28 13 Alarm 12 32 Alarm 29 14 Alarm 13 33 Alarm 30 15 Alarm 14 34 Alarm 31 16 Alarm 15 35 Alarm 32 17 Alarm 16 36 Common 25 32 18 Common 9 16 37 N C 19 Alarm 17 Table 1 6 shows the default output alarm pinouts and the corresponding alarm numbers assigned to each port Refer to this table when connecting alarm cables to the ONS 15310 MA SDH Table 1 6 Default Alarm Pin Assignments Outputs DB 25 Pin Number Function DB 25 Pin Number Function 1 Out 1 14 Out 2 2 Out 1 15 Out 2 3 16 Out 3 4 17 Out 3 5 18 Out 4 6 19 Out 4 7 20 Out 5 8 21 Out 5 9 22 Out 6 10 23 Out 6 11 24 Out 7 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Table 1 6 Default Alarm Pin Assignments Outputs continued DB 25 Pin Number Function DB 25 Pin Number Function 12 Out 8 25 Out 7 13 Out 8 For information about provisioning alarms for external devices refer to Chapter Manage alarms Section Provision External Alarms and Controls in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 1 8 6 BITS Cable Insta
433. rored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval SES SM Section Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds SES SM indicates the severely errored seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval Tx AISS P Transmit Path Alarm Indication Signal AISS P means that an alarm indication signal occurred on the transmit end of the path This parameter is a count of seconds containing one or more AIS defects Tx BBE P Transmit Path Background Block Error BBE P is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES Tx ES P Transmit Path Errored Second ES P is a one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect Tx ESR P Transmit Path Errored Second Ratio ESR P is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval Tx SES P Transmit Path Severely Errored Seconds SES P is a one second period containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect SES is a subset of ES Tx SESR P Transmit Path Severely Errored Second Ratio SESR P is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval Tx UAS P Transmit Path Unavailable Seconds UAS P is a count of one second intervals when the E 1 path is unavailable on the transmit end of the signal The E 1 path is unavailable when ten consecutive SESs occur The ten SESs are included in unavailable time
434. roup administrative state locked enabled maintenance amp outOfGroup locked enabled loopback amp maintenance Release the loopback Note While in locked enabled loopbac k amp maintenance both Cisco Transport Controller CTC and Transaction Language One TL1 allow a cross connect to be deleted which also removes the loopback This applies only to the cross connect not the ports locked enabled maintenance Alarm condition is raised locked disabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance locked disabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance amp outOfGroup for a VCAT cross connect locked enabled loopback amp maintenance amp outOfGroup Alarm condition is raised locked disabled FLT amp loopback amp maintenance amp outOfGroup m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States Table B 5 Transitions continued Current Service State Action Service State Transitions ONS 15310 MA SDH Port and Cross Connect Service State Next Service State locked enabled maintenance State Put the port or cross connect in the unlocked administrative unlocked enabled the Automatic In Service administrative state Put the port or cross connect in locked disabled Automatic In Service the locked disabled administrative state Put the port or cross connect
435. rovides installation turn up test and maintenance procedures Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide Provides alarm descriptions and troubleshooting procedures general troubleshooting procedures error messages performance monitoring parameters and SNMP information e Cisco ONS SONET TLI Command Guide Provides a full TL1 command and autonomous message set including parameters AIDs conditions and modifiers for the Cisco ONS 15454 ONS 15600 and Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH systems Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Moi BE 78 19417 01 Preface e Cisco ONS SONET TLI Reference Guide Provides general information procedures and errors for TL1 in the Cisco ONS 15454 ONS 15600 and Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH systems Cisco ONS 15310 CL and Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide Provides software feature and operation information for Ethernet cards in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Release 9 1 and 9 2 Provides new features and functionality information For an update on End of Life and End of Sale notices refer to http www cisco com en US products hw optical ps2001 prod eol notices list html Document Conventions This publication uses the following conventions Convention boldface italic xIxix Ctrl Screen font boldface screen font lt gt Application Commands
436. roxy for the ENEs and forward SNMP requests to other SNMP entities ENEs irrespective of the types of objects that are accessed For this you need to configure two sets of users one between the GNE and NMS and the other between the GNE and ENE In addition to forwarding requests from the NMS to the ENE the GNE also forwards responses and traps from the ENE to the NMS The proxy forwarder application is defined in RFC 3413 Each entry in the Proxy Forwarder Table consists of the following parameters e Proxy Type Defines the type of message that may be forwarded based on the translation parameters defined by this entry If the Proxy Type is read or write the proxy entry is used for forwarding SNMP requests and their response between the NMS and the ENE If the Proxy Type is trap the entry is used for forwarding SNMP traps from the ENE to the NMS Context Engine ID Context Name Specifies the ENE to which the incoming requests should be forwarded or the ENE whose traps should be forwarded to the NMS by the GNE e TargetParamsIn Points to the Target Params Table that specifies the GNE user who proxies on behalf of an ENE user When the proxy type is read or write TargetParamsIn specifies the GNE user who receives requests from an NMS and forwards requests to the ENE When the proxy type is trap TargetParamsIn specifies the GNE user who receives notifications from the ENE and forwards them to the NMS TargetParamsIn and the contextEngineI
437. s Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Specifications A 1 2 UDC Interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH 64 kbps user data channel UDC digital interface has the following specifications The 64 kbps digital interface provides a digital input and output e Any FI byte that is accessible on the system is interfaced at the UDC connector The UDC provides a simplex interface Protection for UDC overhead channel s follows interface line protection for traffic The UDC can be enabled or disabled through the management interfaces The default state is disabled The physical interface is defined in ITU T G 703 as a 120 ohm twisted pair connection The jitter specification is defined in ITU T G 823 The UDC supports a serial port interface adaptation function to overhead bytes F1 This is an EIA TIA 232 interface capable of 9 6 19 2 38 4 and 56 kbps operation The rate is selectable through the management interface The default is 56 kbps with no parity and 1 stop bit Connector J3 UDC A 1 3 Cisco Transport Controller LAN Interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH CTC LAN interface has the following specifications 10 100BaseT e 15310E CTX K9 access RJ 45 connector Connector J3 LAN port A 1 4 TL1 Craft Interface The ONS 15310 MA SDH TLI craft interface has the following specifications e Speed 9600 baud no parity I stop bit e 15310E CTX K9 EIA TIA 232 with RJ 45 type connector Connector J2 Craft port A 1 5 Confi
438. s DCN Generic router 2 Zn 7 adjacency DCN oa o m 8 6 5 4 Manual TID to NSAP Provisioning TIDs can be manually linked to NSAPs and added to the TDC Static TDC entries are similar to static routes For a specific TID you force a specific NSAP Resolution requests for that TID always return that NSAP No TARP network propagation or instantaneous replies are involved Static entries allow you to forward TL1 commands to NEs that do not support TARP However static TDC entries are not dynamically updated so outdated entries are not removed after the TID or the NSAP changes on the target node 8 6 6 OSI Virtual Routers The ONS 15310 MA SDH support one OSI virtual router The router is provisioned on the Provisioning gt OSI gt Routers tabs The router has an editable manual area address and a unique NSAP System ID that is set to the node MAC address The router can be enabled and connected to different OSI routing areas The Router 1 manual area address and System ID create the NSAP address assigned to the node s TID Router 1 supports OSI TARP and tunneling functions These include e TARP data cache P over CLNS tunnels LAN subnet Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 E 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking In addition to the primary manual area address you can also create two additional manual area
439. s continued Parameter Definition UASCP PFE Unavailable Seconds CP bit Far End Path UASCP PFE is a count of one second intervals when the DS3 path becomes unavailable A DS3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive far end CP bit SESs occur The ten CP bit SESs are included in unavailable time After the DS3 path becomes unavailable it becomes available when ten consecutive seconds occur with no CP bit SESs The ten seconds with no CP bit SESs are excluded from unavailable time UAS P Path Unavailable Seconds UAS P is a count of the seconds when the path was unavailable A path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as P SESs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as P SESs UAS PFE Far End Path Unavailable Seconds UAS PFE is a count of the seconds when the path was unavailable A path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as P SESs and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as P SESs UAS PM Path Monitoring Unavailable Seconds UAS PM indicates the unavailable seconds recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval UASP P Unavailable Second Path UASP P is a count of one second intervals when the DS3 path is unavailable A DS3 E3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive SESP Ps occur The ten SESP Ps are included in unavailable time A
440. s are used for two purposes Toconnect ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes to CTC sessions on one subnet that are connected by a router to ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes residing on another subnet These static routes are not needed if OSPF is enabled Scenario 6 shows an OSPF example To enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes residing on the same subnet In Figure 8 6 one CTC residing on subnet 192 168 1 0 connects to a router through interface A The router is not set up with OSPF ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes residing on different subnets are connected through Node 1 to the router through interface B Because Nodes 2 and 3 are on different subnets proxy ARP does not enable Node 1 as a gateway To connect to CTC computers on LAN A a static route is created on Node 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EN Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Figure 8 6 Scenario 5 Static Route with One CTC Computer Used as a Destination Router IP Address of interface iAi to LAN A 192 168 1 1 IP Address of interface IBi to LAN B 192 168 2 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Static Routes Destination 192 168 3 20 Gateway 192 168 2 10 Destination 192 168 4 30 Gateway 192 168 2 10 Int A Gs d CTC Workstation Int B IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Host Routes N A LAN B ONS 15310 1 IP Add
441. s recorded in the optical transport network OTN section during the PM time interval BIE The number of bit errors BIE corrected in the dense wavelength division multiplexing DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval BIEC The number of Bit Errors Corrected BIEC in the DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval CGV Code Group Violations CGV is a count of received code groups that do not contain a start or end delimiter CVCP P Code Violation Path CVCP P is a count of CP bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation period CVCP PFE Code Violation CVCP PFE is a parameter that is counted when the three far end block error FEBE bits in a M frame are not all collectively set to 1 MS EB Indicates the number of coding violations occurring on the line This parameter is a count of BPVs and EXZs occurring over the accumulation period Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 11 2 Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Parameter Definition CVP P Code Violation Path CVP P is a code violation parameter for M23 applications CVP P is a count of P bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation period DCG Date Code Groups DCG is a count of received data code groups th
442. s used The value configured is a threshold and any value greater than that value is set as a priority For example if a CoS of 5 is set as the threshold only CoS values of 6 and 7 would be set to priority 2 3 1 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators The CE 100T 8 card faceplate has two card level LED indicators described in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description SF LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the CE 100T 8 card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED blinks until the software deems the card operational then it turns off ACT LED Green The ACT LED provides the operational status of the CE 100T 8 When the ACT LED is green it indicates that the CE 100T 8 card is active and the software is operational otherwise it is off 2 3 2 CE 100T 8 Port Level Indicators The CE 100T 8 card has two LEDs embedded into each of the eight Ethernet port RJ 45 connectors The LEDs are described in Table 2 5 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter2 Card Reference CE MR 6 Card Table 2 5 CE 100T 8 Port Level Indicators Port Level Indicators Description ACT LED Amber A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected but there is an issue inhibiting traffic A blinking amber LED means traffic is flowing LINK LED Green A s
443. sco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H 78 19417 01 Chapter4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes Figure 4 8 TL1 Tunnels Central office Other vendor GNE 1 TL1 tunnel Other vendor c NS ENE 2 EE A o EZ GNE 2 du e 239 p OSI DCC SD ne OSI DCC IP DCC by TL1 tunnel TL1 tunnels provide several advantages over static IP over CLNS tunnels Because tunnel provisioning is needed only at CTC computer they are faster to set up Because they use TL 1 for TCP transport they are more secure TL1 tunnels also provide better flow control On the other hand IP over CLNS tunnels require less overhead and usually provide a slight performance edge over TL1 Tunnels depending on network conditions TL1 tunnels do not support all IP applications such as SNMP and RADIUS Authentication Table 4 11 shows a comparison between the two types of tunnels Table 4 11 TL1 and Static IP Over CLNS Tunnels Comparison Static Category IP Over CLNS TL1 Tunnel Comments Setup Complex Simple Requires provisioning at ONS NE GNE and DCN routers For TL1 tunnels provisioning is needed at CTC computer Performance Best Average to Static tunnels generally provide better performance than TL1 good tunnels depending on TL1 encoding used LV Binary provides the best pe
444. se SFPs certified for use in Cisco Optical Networking Systems ONSs The qualified Cisco SFP top assembly numbers TANs are provided in Table 2 11 Table 2 11 SFP Card Compatibility Compatible SFP Cisco Top Assembly Card Cisco Product ID Number TAN 15310E CTX K9 ONS SI 2G I 1 10 1993 02 ONS SI 2G L1 10 2102 02 ONS SI 2G S1 10 1992 02 ONS SI 2G L2 10 1990 02 ONS SI 622 L2 10 1936 02 ONS SE 2G S1 10 2017 01 ONS SE 2G 1470 through 10 2461 01 through ONS SE 2G 1610 10 2468 01 ONS SE 155 1470 10 1996 02 ONS SE 155 1490 10 1998 02 ONS SE 155 1510 10 1999 02 ONS SE 155 1530 10 2000 02 ONS SE 155 1550 10 2001 02 ONS SE 155 1570 10 2002 02 ONS SE 155 1590 10 2003 02 ONS SE 155 1610 10 1997 02 ONS SE 622 1470 10 2004 02 ONS SE 622 1490 10 2005 02 ONS SE 622 1510 10 2006 02 ONS SE 622 1530 10 2007 02 ONS SE 622 1550 10 2008 02 ONS SE 622 1570 10 2009 02 ONS SE 622 1590 10 2010 02 ONS SE 622 1610 10 2011 02 ONS SI 622 I1 10 1956 02 ONS SI 622 L1 10 1958 02 ONS SC 2G 30 3 10 2155 02 ONS SC 2G 31 1 10 2156 02 ONS SC 2G 31 9 10 2157 02 ONS SC 2G 32 6 10 2158 02 ONS SC 2G 34 2 10 2159 02 ONS SC 2G 35 0 10 2160 02 ONS SC 2G 35 8 10 2161 02 ONS SC 2G 36 6 10 2162 02 ONS SC 2G 38 1 10 2163 02 ONS SC 2G 38 9 10 2164 02 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter 2 Card Reference Table 2 11 SFP Card Compatibility continued Compatible SFP SFP Mo
445. static routes RIP on the LAN IPv4 NE to IPv6 NE if RIP is enabled on the LAN Not supported on static routes proxy tunnels and Supported on static routes proxy tunnels and firewall tunnels firewall tunnels Routing decisions are based on the default IPv6 router provisioned 8 8 1 IPv6 Enabled Mode The default IP address configured on the node is IPv4 You can use either CTC or the TL1 management interface to enable IPv6 For more information about enabling IPv6 from the CTC interface see the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide For more information about enabling IPv6 using TL1 commands see the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Cisco ONS 15600 SDH and Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH TLI Command Guide 8 8 2 IPv6 Disabled Mode You can disable IPv6 either from the CTC or from the TL1 management interface For more information about disabling IPv6 from the CTC interface see the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide For more information about disabling IPv6 using TL1 commands see the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Cisco ONS 15600 SDH and Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH TLI Command Guide 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity FTP Support for ENE Database Backup 8 8 3 IPv6 in Non secure Mode In non secure mode IPv6 is supported on the front and the rear Ethernet interfaces You can start a CTC or TL1 session using the IPv6 address provisione
446. supported features of each individual card see Chapter 2 Card Reference For further information about the supported features of Ethernet cards consult the Cisco ONS 15310 CL and Cisco ONS 15310 MA Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide C 32 Threshold Defaults Threshold default settings define the default cumulative values thresholds beyond which a TCA will be raised making it possible to monitor the network and detect errors early Card threshold default settings are provided as follows PMthresholds 15310E CTX K9 21 DS3 3 and El 63 DS3 3cards Applicable to E1 DS3 and STMN ports Can be expressed in counts or seconds includes line electrical and SDH thresholds e Physical Layer thresholds 15310E CTX K9 cards only Applicable to STMN ports Expressed in percentages includes optics thresholds Threshold defaults are defined for near end and or far end at 15 minute and one day intervals Thresholds are further broken down by type such as Section Line VC high order path or VC low order path for PM thresholds and TCA warning or Alarm for physical thresholds PM threshold types define the layer to which the threshold applies Physical threshold types define the level of response expected when the threshold is crossed Note For full descriptions of the thresholds you can set for each card see Chapter 11 Performance Monitoring S Note For additional infor
447. switching are revertive and what the reversion time is set optimized 1 1 detection recovery and verify guard timer values Legal Disclaimer Set the legal disclaimer that warns users at the login screen about the possible legal or contractual ramifications of accessing equipment systems or networks without authorization e Security Access settings Set default security settings for LAN access shell access serial craft access EMS access including IIOP listener port number TL1 access and SNMP access e Security Grant Permissions Set default user security levels for activating reverting software PMC learning database restoring and retrieving audit logs e Security RADIUS settings Sets default RADIUS server settings for the accounting port number and the authentication port number and whether to enable the node as a final authenticator e Security Policy settings Set the allowable failed logins before lockout idle user timeout for each user level optional lockout duration or manual unlock enabled password reuse and change frequency policies number of characters difference that is required between the old and new password password aging by security level enforced single concurrent session per user and option to disable inactive user after a set inactivity period e Security Password settings Set when passwords can be changed how many characters they must differ by whether or not password reuse is allowed and whet
448. t 0 172800000 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend I day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds vclo nearend I day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM1 PORT pmthresholds velo nearend I day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line AdminSSMIn STU G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line AlsMode Disabled Disabled Auto Restart Manual Restart Manual Restart for Test CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line AlsRecoveryPulseDuration 2 0 seconds 2 0 2 1 2 2 100 0 when AlsMode Disabled Auto Restart Manual Restart 80 0 80 1 80 2 100 0 when AlsMode Manual Restart for Test CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line AlsRecoveryPulseInterval 100 seconds 60 300 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line PJVC4Mon 0 VC4 0 16 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 E 9 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line Send lt FF gt DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE FALSE CTX 2500 STM16 PORT config line SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE Cisco ONS
449. t that is transmitted through a network CLNS relies on transport layer protocols to perform error detection and correction CLNP is an OSI network layer protocol that carries upper layer data and error indications over connectionless links CLNP provides the interface between the CLNS and upper layers CLNP performs many of the same services for the transport layer as IP The CLNP datagram is very similar to the IP datagram It provides mechanisms for fragmentation data unit identification fragment total length and offset Like IP a checksum computed on the CLNP header verifies that the information used to process the CLNP datagram is transmitted correctly and a lifetime control mechanism Time to Live limits the amount of time a datagram is allowed to remain in the system Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ez 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking CLNP uses network service access points NSAPs to identify network devices The CLNP source and destination addresses are NSAPs In addition CLNP uses a network element title NET to identify a network entity in an end system ES or intermediate system IS NETs are allocated from the same name space as NSAP addresses Whether an address is an NSAP address or a NET depends on the network selector value in the NSAP The ONS 15310 MA SDH support the ISO Data Country Code ISO DCC NSAP address f
450. t Controller CTC the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH software interface For CTC set up and login information refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 4 1 CTC Software Delivery Methods page 4 1 4 2 CTC Installation Overview page 4 3 4 3 PC UNIX and Mac Workstation Requirements page 4 3 4 4 ONS 15310 MA SDH Connection page 4 5 4 5 CTC Login page 4 6 4 6 CTC Window page 4 7 4 7 Using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes page 4 16 4 8 Common Control Card Reset page 4 19 4 9 Traffic Card Reset page 4 19 4 10 Database Backup page 4 20 4 11 Software Revert page 4 20 4 1 CTC Software Delivery Methods ONS 15310 MA SDH provisioning and administration is performed using CTC software CTC is a Java application that is stored on the 15310E CTX K9 card in the ONS 15310 MA SDH CTC is downloaded to your workstation the first time you log into a ONS 15310 MA SDH with a new software release 4 1 1 CTC Software Installed on the 15310E CTX K9 Card CTC software is preloaded on the 15310E CTX K9 cards therefore you do not need to install software You can view the software versions that are installed on an ONS 15310 MA SDH by selecting the Maintenance Software tabs in node view Figure 4 1 Select the Maintenance Software tabs in network view to display the software versions installed on all the network nodes 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Releas
451. t is generated when an alarm entry RMON MIB crosses the rising threshold and the entry generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps fallingAlarm RFC2819 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry RMON MIB crosses the falling threshold and the entry generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter12 SNMP B SNMPv1 v2 Community Names 12 6 2 Variable Trap Bindings Each SNMP trap contains variable trap bindings that are used to create MIB tables ONS 15310 MA SDH traps and bindings are listed in Table 12 5 Table 12 5 Supported ONS 15310 MA SDH SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings Trap Number ONS 15454 Name ONS 15310 MA SDH Name Description 1 sysUpTime sysUpTime The first variable binding in the variable binding list of an SNMPv2 Trap PDU 2 snmpTrapOID snmpTrapOID The second variable binding in the variable binding list of an SNMPv2 Trap PDU cerent454NodeTime cerentGenericNodeTime The time that an event occurred 4 cerent454AlarmState cerentGenericAlarmState The alarm severity and service affecting status Severities are Minor Major and Critical Service affecting statuses are service affecting and non service affecting 5 cerent454AlarmObjectType cerentGenericAlarmObjectType The entity type that raised the alarm The NMS should use this value to decide which table to poll for further inform
452. t to the nearest Level 2 IS Forwarding through Level 2 ISs continues until the packet reaches a Level 2 IS in the destination area Within the destination area the ISs forward the packet along the best path until the destination ES is reached Link state update messages help ISs learn about the network topology Each IS generates an update specifying the ESs and ISs to which it is connected as well as the associated metrics The update is then sent to all neighboring ISs which forward flood it to their neighbors and so on Sequence numbers terminate the flood and distinguish old updates from new ones Using these updates each IS can build a complete topology of the network When the topology changes new updates are sent IS IS uses a single required default metric with a maximum path value of 1024 The metric is arbitrary and typically is assigned by a network administrator Any single link can have a maximum value of 64 and path links are calculated by summing link values Maximum metric values were set at these levels to provide the granularity to support various link types while at the same time ensuring that the shortest path algorithm used for route computation is reasonably efficient Three optional IS IS metrics costs delay expense and error are not supported by the ONS 15310 MA SDH IS IS maintains a mapping of the metrics to the quality of service QoS option in the CLNP packet header IS IS uses the mappings to compute routes
453. tal number of transmit packets ifOutUcastPkts The total number of unicast packets requested to transmit to a single address ifOutMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames transmitted error free ifOutBroadcastPkts The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer including those that were discarded or not sent dot3statsAlignmentErrors The number of frames with an alignment error that is frames with a length that is not an integral number of octets and where the frame cannot pass the frame check sequence FCS test dot3StatsFCSErrors The number of frames with frame check errors that is where there is an integral number of octets but an incorrect FCS dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames The number of successfully transmitted frames that had exactly one collision dot3StatsFrameTooLong The count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size etherStats UndersizePkts The number of packets received with a length less than 64 octets etherStatsFragments The total number of packets that are not an integral number of octets or have a bad FCS and that are less than 64 octets long etherStatsPkts64Octets The total number of packets received including error packets that were 64 octets in length etherStatsPkts65to127Octets The total number of packets
454. te The ONS 15310 MA SDH and the 15310E CTX K9 card do not support SNCP switching for VC3 circuits containing BIP errors The SF SD alarm is not raised for VC3 circuits If there are any path protection or 1 1 protected ports configured across the two 15310E CTX K9 cards a protection switch will cause the port on the active 153 10E CTX K9 card to become the active port for 1 1 or the path protection selector Note e Any unprotected port on the 15310E CTX K9 card being reset may undergo a traffic loss when the 15310E CTX K9 is reinitialized e If protection exists between two optical ports on the same 15310E CTX K9 card and if that 15310 9 card is reset the traffic might be affected when the 15310 9 card is reinitialized Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter 3 Card Protection Automatic Protection Switching The two items above do not apply for a user initiated soft reset or software upgrade These resets are errorless 3 3 Automatic Protection Switching Unidirectional switching allows traffic on the transmit and receive optical fibers to switch independently With nonrevertive 1 1 protection automatic protection switching APS switches a signal after a failure from the working port to the protect port and the signal stays switched to the protect port until it is manually switched back Revertive switching automatically s
455. teady green LED indicates that a link is detected but there is no traffic A blinking green LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port Both ACT and LINK LED Unlit green and amber LEDs indicate no traffic OFF 2 4 CE MR 6 Card S This section describes the features and functions of the CE MR 6 Ethernet card This card is compatible with the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH The CE MR 6 card provides six IEEE 802 3 compliant 10 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports at the ingress At the egress the CE MR 6 card provides an integrated Ethernet over SDH mapper with six virtual ports to transfer Ethernet packets over an SDH network The CE MR 6 card uses pluggable Small Form Factor Pluggable Interface Converters SFPs to transport Ethernet traffic over an SDH network SFP modules are offered as separate orderable products for flexibility For details see the 2 8 SFP Modules section on page 2 19 The Ethernet frames are encapsulated using the ITU T generic framing procedure GFP with or without cyclic redundancy check CRC or LAN extension LEX the point to point protocol PPP with high level data link control HDLC The Ethernet ports automatically configure to operate at either half or full duplex and can determine whether to enable or disable flow control The Ethernet ports can also be oversubscribed using flow control The CE MR 6 card supports the link capaci
456. ter definition 11 6 HP ES parameter definition 11 6 HP ESR parameter definition 11 6 HP NPJC Pdet parameter definition 11 6 HP NPJC Pgen parameter definition 11 6 HP PJCDIFF parameter definition 11 6 HP PJCS Pdet parameter definition 11 6 HP PJCS Pgen parameter definition 11 6 HP PPJC Pdet parameter definition 11 6 HP PPJC Pgen parameter definition 11 6 HP SES parameter definition 11 6 HP SESR parameter definition 11 6 HP UAS parameter definition 11 6 idle user timeout 5 6 In Group member 7 11 insertion and removal tool BNC 1 15 Installing m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 E 1 cable ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 15 installing alarm cable ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 18 coaxial cables ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 14 dual shelf assemblies ONS 15310 MA 1 2 fiber ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 13 multiple nodes ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 5 power supply ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 7 to 1 10 reversible mounting bracket ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 3 single node ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 4 single shelf assembly ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 2 UDC cable ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 20 intermediate path performance monitoring See IPPM Intermediate System Level 1 8 28 Internet Explorer 4 3 Internet protocol See IP interoperability DCC connections to ONS 154545 4 3 logging into an ONS 15454 with an earlier software release 4 2 manage multiple ONS nodes 4 16 overview 9 4 IOS parameter definition 11 7 IP environments 8 2 networ
457. ter you can log into ONS 15454s running Release 4 1 or later o manage ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes that are connected by DCCs to the ONS 15454s Each ONS 15310 MA SDH can handle up to five concurrent CTC sessions CTC performance can vary depending on the volume of activity in each session network bandwidth and 15310E CTX K9 card load 4 3 PC UNIX and Mac Workstation Requirements To use CTC your computer must have a web browser with the correct Java Runtime Environment JRE installed for the software release in use The correct JRE and Java plug in for each CTC software release are included on the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH software CDs Table 4 1 lists the requirements for PCs and UNIX workstations 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter 4 Cisco Transport Controller Operation UNIX and Mac Workstation Requirements Table 4 1 CTC Computer Requirements Area Requirements Notes Processor Pentium 4 processor or equivalent A faster CPU is recommended if your PC only workstation runs multiple applications or if CTC manages a network with a large number of nodes and circuits RAM 512 MB RAM or more 1 GB RAM or more minimum of 1 GB is recommended if for Release 9 2 your workstation runs multiple applications or if CTC manages a network with a large number of nodes and circuits Hard drive 20 GB hard drive with 100MB of free space application files
458. the protect span the MS PSC of the protect span will increment again MS PSC R In a four fiber MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Count Ring MS PSC R is a count of the number of times service switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to a working line A count is only incremented if ring switching is used MS PSC S In a four fiber MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Count Span MS PSC S is a count of the number of times service switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to the working line A count is only incremented if span switching is used Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Table 11 2 Parameter Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Performance Monitoring Parameters continued Definition MS PSC W For a working line in a two fiber MS SPRing Multiplex Section Protection Switching Count Working MS PSC W is a count of the number of times traffic switches away from the working capacity in the failed line and back to the working capacity after the failure is cleared MS PSC W increments on the failed working line and MS PSC increments on the active protect line For a working line in a four fiber MS SPRing MS PSC W is acount of the number of times service switches fr
459. these conditions can exist independently and must be cleared independently Caution Use alarm suppression with caution If multiple CTC or TL1 sessions are open suppressing the alarms in one session suppresses the alarms in all other open sessions 10 6 External Alarms and Controls External alarm physical connections are made with the ONS 15310 MA SDH ALARM port However the alarms are provisioned using the 15310E CTX K9 card view for external sensors such as an open door and flood sensors temperature sensors and other environmental conditions External control outputs on the 15310E CTX K9 cards allow you to drive external visual or audible devices such as bells and lights They can control other devices such as generators heaters and fans Provision external alarms in the 15310E CTX K9 card view Provisioning gt External Alarms tab and provision controls in the 15310E CTX K9 card view Provisioning gt External Controls tab Up to 32 alarm contact inputs and 8 alarm contact outputs are available with the 15310E CTX K9 cards 10 6 1 External Alarm Input You can provision each alarm input separately Provisionable characteristics of external alarm inputs include 1 AS MT can be seen in the Alarms window as well if you have set the Filter dialog box to show NA severity events 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Extern
460. through the internetwork TARP is used when TL1 target identifiers TIDs must be translated to NSAP addresses The TID to NSAP translation occurs by mapping TIDs to the NETs then deriving NSAPs from the NETs by using the NSAP selector values see Table 8 8 on page 8 25 TARP uses a selective PDU propagation methodology in conjunction with a distributed database that resides within the NEs of TID to NET mappings TARP allows NEs to translate between TID and NET by automatically exchanging mapping information with other NEs The TARP PDU is carried by the standard CLNP Data PDU TARP PDU fields are shown in Table 8 9 Table 8 9 TARP PDU Fields Field Abbreviation Size bytes Description TARP Lifetime tar lif 2 The TARP time to live in hops TARP Sequence tar seq 2 The TARP sequence number used for loop detection Number Protocol tar pro 1 Used to identify the type of protocol address that the Address Type TID must be mapped to The value FE is used to identify the CLNP address type TARP Type tar tcd 1 The TARP Type Code identifies the TARP type of Code PDU Five TARP types shown in Table 8 10 are defined TID Target tar tln 1 The number of octets that are in the tar ttg field Length TID Originator tar oln 1 The number of octets that are in the tar tor field Length Protocol tar pin 1 The number of octets that are in the tar por field Address Length 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 1531
461. tion 4 13 linking multiple nodes 9 8 load balance 7 8 loading alarm profiles 10 10 lockout See external switching commands Log 12 19 login node groups 4 11 loopbacks card view indicator 4 9 LOSS L parameter definition 11 7 low order path background block error 11 7 background block error ratio 11 7 errored block 11 7 errored second 11 7 errored second ratio 11 7 severely errored second ratio 11 7 severely errored seconds 11 7 unavailable seconds 11 7 LP BBE parameter definition 11 7 LP BBER parameter definition 11 7 LP EB parameter definition 11 7 LP ES parameter definition 11 7 LP ESR parameter definition 11 7 LP SES parameter definition 11 7 LP SESR parameter definition 11 7 LP UAS parameter definition 11 7 MAC address 8 4 Maintenance user description 5 1 idle user timeout 5 6 network level actions 5 4 node level actions 5 2 management information base See MIB Manual switch See external switching commands memory A 6 merged circuits 7 22 MIB groups 12 14 SNMP 12 5 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 3 ML 100T 8 card block diagram 2 14 console port 2 13 description 2 13 Ethernet ports history window 11 22 Ethernet ports statistics window 11 19 Ethernet ports utilization window 11 22 faceplate 2 14 LCAS 7 13 LEDs 2 15 ONS 15310 MA slot 1 26 overview 2 2 performance monitoring 11 19 ports line rate and connector type 1 27 port status 2 15 POS ports history window 11 25 POS ports statistics window 11 22 POS ports
462. tions that are raised and suppressed on it for example a transmit failure TRMT alarm are reported in the Conditions window and show their normal severity in the Sev column The suppressed alarms are not shown in the Alarms and History windows These windows only show AS MT When you place the port back into Automatic In Service administrative state the AS MT condition is resolved in all three windows Suppressed alarms remain raised in the Conditions window until they are cleared 10 5 2 Alarms Suppressed by User Command A In the Provisioning gt Alarm Profiles gt Alarm Behavior tabs the ONS 15310 MA SDH have an alarm suppression option that clears raised alarm messages for the node chassis one or more slots cards or one or more ports Using this option raises the alarms suppressed by user command or AS CMD condition The AS CMD condition like the AS MT condition appears in the Conditions and History windows Suppressed conditions including alarms appear only in the Conditions window showing their normal severity in the Sev column When the Suppress Alarms check box is unchecked the AS CMD condition is cleared from all three windows A suppression command applied at a higher level does not supersede a command applied at a lower level For example applying a node level alarm suppression command makes all raised alarms for the node appear to be cleared but it does not cancel out card level or port level suppression Each of
463. tivity in a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third party network you must create a server trail between the ports For more details refer to the Create Circuits and VC low order path Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 7 7 1 VCAT Circuit States The state of a VCAT circuit is an aggregate of its member circuits You can view whether a VCAT member is In Group or Out of Group in the VCAT State column in the Edit Circuits window If all member circuits are unlocked the VCAT circuit is unlocked If all In Group member circuits are locked the VCAT circuit state is locked Ifno member circuits exist or if all are Out of Group the state of a VCAT circuit is locked Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter7 Circuits and Tunnels Virtual Concatenated Circuits e VCAT circuit is locked PARTIAL when In Group member states are mixed and not all member states are unlocked 1 1 2 VCAT Member Routing The automatic and manual routing selection applies to the entire VCAT circuit that is all members are manually or automatically routed Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric which means that the same number of members travel in each direction With automatic routing you can specify the constraints for individual members with manual routing you can select different spans for different members Two types of automatic and ma
464. to reach the gateway 8 1 External Firewalls Table 8 6 shows the ports that are used by the 15310E CTX K9 cards 8 18 Table 8 6 Ports Used by the 15310E CTX K9 Port Function Action 0 Never used D 20 FTP D 21 FTP control D 22 SSH Secure Shell D 23 Telnet D 80 HTTP D 111 SUNRPC Sun Remote Procedure Call NA 161 SNMP traps destinations D 162 SNMP traps destinations D 513 rlogin NA 683 CORBA IIOP OK 1080 Proxy server socks D 2001 2017 I O card Telnet D 2018 DCC processor on active 15310 MA D SDH CTX 2361 TL1 D 3082 Raw TL1 D 3083 TL1 D 5001 Multiplex section shared protection ring D MS SPRing server port 5002 MS SPRing client port D 7200 SNMP alarm input port D 9100 EQM port D 9401 TCC boot port D 9999 Flash manager D Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity External Firewalls Table 8 6 Ports Used by the 15310E CTX K9 continued Port Function Action 10240 12287 Proxy client D 57790 Default TCC listener port OK 1 D deny NA not applicable OK do not deny The following access control list ACL examples show a firewall configuration when the proxy server gateway setting is not enabled In the example the CTC workstation address is 192 168 10 10 and the ONS 15310 MA SDH address is 10 10 10 100 The firewall is
465. to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide For information about creating circuits that perform a switch refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide 11 7 2 STM4 Port Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 11 10 shows the signal types that support near end and far end PM parameters Figure 11 11 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the STM4 ports Figure 11 10 Monitored Signal Types for the STM4 Ports PTE ONS 15310 MA SDH ONS 15310 MA SDH PTE ee 5 Signal e A e STM4 Signal do im Gre Fiber CER STM4 STM N STM N STM4 STS Path STS XX P PMs Near and Far End Supported 271809 S Note The XX in Figure 11 10 represents all PM parameters listed in Figure 11 11 with the given prefix and or suffix Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 EIE Chapter11 Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring for Optical Ports Figure 11 11 PM Parameter Read Points on the STM4 Ports ONS 15310 MA SDH STM4 Port Cross Connect STM N Pointer Processors RS EB BTC RS ES RS SES ASIG VC CV P N MS EB VC ES P gt MS ES VG VC SES P HERE I VCUAS P MS UAS s PPJC PDET gt jeu PPJC Pdet NPJC PDET PPJC PGEN gt NPJC Pdet NPJC PGEN PPJC Pgen NPJC Pgen PJC DIFF P PJCS PDET P PMs read on PMC
466. trunk port m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios 8 2 1 Scenario 1 and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes on the Same Subnet Scenario shows a basic ONS 15310 MA SDH LAN configuration Figure 8 1 The ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes and CTC computer reside on the same subnet All nodes connect to LAN A and have DCC connections Figure 8 1 Scenario 1 CTC and ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes on the Same Subnet CTC Workstation IP Address 192 168 1 100 gt Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway N A Host Routes N A LANA ONS 15310 2 IP Address 192 168 1 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Static Routes N A e SDH RING e ONS 15310 Hn 15310 3 IP Address 192 168 1 10 IP Address 192 168 1 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Default Router N A 2 Static Routes N A Static Routes N A 8 2 2 Scenario 2 CTC and 0NS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Connected to a Router In Scenario 2 the CTC computer resides on a subnet 192 168 1 0 and attaches to LAN A Figure 8 2 The ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes reside on a different subnet 192 168 2 0 and attach to LAN B A router connects LAN A to LAN B The IP address of router interface A is set to LAN A 192 168 1 1 and the IP address of router interface B is set to LAN B 192 168 2 1 On the CTC compute
467. ttings Default Value Default Domain NODE security dataComm CtcBackplaneIpDisplaySuppression TRUE FALSE TRUE when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro ICard TRUE NOT SUPPORTED when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro 1 FALSE NODE security dataComm DefaultTCCEthernetIP 10 0 0 1 IP Address NODE security dataComm DefaultTCCEthernetIPNetmask 24 bits 8 9 10 32 NODE security dataComm SecureModeLocked FALSE FALSE TRUE when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro TRUE NOT SUPPORTED when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro FALSE NODE security dataComm SecureModeOn May reboot node FALSE FALSE TRUE when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro Card TRUE NOT SUPPORTED when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro 1 FALSE NODE security dataComm isSecureModeSupportedOnControlCard TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE security emsAccess AccessState NonSecure NonSecure Secure NODE security emsAccess 1OPListenerPort May reboot node 57790 port 0 65535 NODE security grantPermission ActivateRevertSoftware Superuser Provisioning Superuser NODE security grantPermission PMClearingPrivilege Provisioning Provisioning Superuser NODE security grantPermission RestoreDB Superuser Provisioning Superuser 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H
468. twork two nodes or as a line of add drop multiplexers ADMs 3 or more nodes by configuring the STMN ports as the working path and a second set as the protect path Unlike rings terminal and linear ADMs require that the STMN port at each node be in 1 1 protection to ensure that a break to the working line is automatically routed to the protect line Note In a linear ADM configuration two STMN ports in 1 1 protection are connected to two STMN ports in 1 1 protection on a second node On the second node two more STMN ports are connected to a third node The third node can be connected to a fourth node and so on depending on the number of nodes in the linear ADM The 15310 MA SDH has four optical ports so it can operate either as a terminal or intermediate node in a linear ADM network Figure 9 3 shows three ONS 15310 MAs ina linear ADM configuration In this example working traffic flows from Node 1 Slot 3 Port 2 1 to Node 2 Slot 4 Port 2 1 and from Node 2 Slot 3 Port 2 1 to the Node 3 Slot 4 Port 2 1 You create the protect path by placing Slot 3 Port 2 1 in 1 1 protection with Slot 4 Port 2 2 at Nodes 1 through 3 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Interoperability Figure 9 3 ONS 15310 MA SDH Linear ADM Configuration ONS 15310 MASDH Slot 3 Port 2 1 to ONS 15310 MA SDH 110 ONS 15310 MA SDH Slot 3 Port 2 1 to Slot 4 Port 2 1
469. ty adjustment scheme LCAS which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SDH link bandwidth The CE MR 6 card s LCAS is hardware based but the CE MR 6 also supports software LCAS SW LCAS This makes it compatible with ML Series cards which support only SW LCAS along with the CE 100T 8 cards The CE MR 6 card also supports the non link capacity adjustment scheme no LCAS The CE MR 6 card supports both flexible and fixed VCAT groups VCG Note The SW LCAS is not supported on CE MR 6 cards for interoperation with the CE 100T 8 ML MR 10 cards Note The CE MR 6 card does not support interoperation between the LCAS and non LCAS circuits The Ethernet frames can be mapped into EIXI G 707 based high order virtual concatenated HO VCAT payloads VC4 nv where n is 1 to 7 VC3 nv where n is 1 to 21 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Chapter2 Card Reference CE MR 6 Card EIXI G 707 based low order virtual concatenated LO VCAT payloads VC12 nv where n is 1 to 63 e Contiguously concatenated CCAT SDH payloads Standard CCAT sizes VC3 VC4 VC4 4c VC4 8c and VC4 16c Non standard CCAT sizes VC4 2c and VC4 3c To configure a CE MR 6 card circuit refer to the Create Circuits and VC low order path Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15310 MASDH Procedure Guide The CE MR 6 card provides multiple management options throu
470. ty passwordChange RequirePasswordChangeOnFirstLoginToNewAccount FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security passwordComplexity IdenticalConsecutiveCharacters Allowed 3 or more 0 2 3 or more NODE security passwordComplexity MaximumLength 20 20 80 NODE security passwordComplexity MinimumLength 6 6 8 10 12 NODE security passwordComplexity MinimumRequiredCharacters 1 num 1 1 num I letter amp letter amp 1 1 TL1 special 1 TL1 special num 1 letter amp 1 special 2 each of any 2 of num upper lower amp TL1 special 2 each of any 2 of num upper lower amp special NODE security passwordComplexity ReverseUserIdAllowed TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE security radiusServer AccountingPort 1813 port 0 32767 NODE security radiusServer AuthenticationPort 1812 port 0 32767 NODE security radiusServer EnableNodeAsFinalAuthenticator TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE security serialCraftAccess EnableCraftPortA TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE security serialCraftAccess EnableCraftPortB TRUE TRUE FALSE 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 H Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE security shellAccess AccessState NonSecure Disabled NonSecure Secure NODE security shellA
471. tyType 2MHz NODE timing bits 1 FramingOut FAS CAS CRC FAS CRC FAS CAS FAS CAS CRC FAS Unframed when FacilityTypeOut E1 N A when FacilityTypeOut 2MHz NODE timing bits 1 SaBit SA Bit 4 SA Bit 4 SA Bit 5 SA Bit 6 SA Bit 7 SA Bit 8 when FacilityType E1 N A when FacilityType 2MHz NODE timing bits 1 State unlocked unlocked locked disabled NODE timing bits 1 StateOut unlocked unlocked locked disabled NODE timing bits 2 AISThreshold DUS G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS NODE timing bits 2 AdminSSMIn STU G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS NODE timing bits 2 CableType 120 ohm 75 ohm 120 ohm NODE timing bits 2 Coding HDB3 HDB3 AMI when FacilityType E1 N A when FacilityType 2MHz Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 E Appendix Network Element Defaults BN Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings Table C 7 ONS 15310 MA SDH Node Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE timing bits 2 CodingOut HDB3 HDB3 AMI when FacilityTypeOut E1 N A when FacilityTypeOut 2MHz NODE timing bits 2 Facility Type El E1 2MHz NODE timing bits 2 Facility TypeOut El El 2MHz NODE timing bits 2 Framing FAS CAS CRC FAS CRC FAS CAS FAS CAS CRC FAS Unframed when FacilityType E1
472. ude multiple ONS 15310 MA SDH topologies and extend the protection provided by a single LMSP configuration to the meshed architecture of several interconnecting rings In a PPMN circuits travel diverse paths through a network of single or multiple meshed rings When you create circuits CTC can automatically route circuits across the PPMN or you can manually route them You can also choose levels of circuit protection For example if you choose full protection CTC creates an alternate route for the circuit in addition to the main route The second route follows a unique path through the network between the source and destination and sets up a second set of cross connections For example in Figure 9 8 a circuit is created from the ONS 15454 shown at Node 3 to the ONS 15454 shown at Node 9 CTC determines that the shortest route between the two nodes passes through Node 8 and Node 7 shown by the dotted line and automatically creates cross connections at Nodes 3 8 7 and 9 to provide the primary circuit path If full protection is selected CTC creates a second unique route between Nodes 3 and 9 which in this example passes through Nodes 2 1 and 11 Cross connections are automatically created at Nodes 3 2 1 11 and 9 shown by the dashed line If a failure occurs on the primary path traffic switches to the second circuit path In this example Node 9 switches from the traffic coming in from Node 7 to the traffic coming in from Node 11 and ser
473. ui accompagnent cet appareil r f rez vous au num ro de l instruction situ la fin de chaque avertissement CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in einer Situation die zu Verletzungen f hren kann Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Ger ten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und den blichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfallen vertraut Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen bersetzung in den bersetzten Sicherheitshinweisen die zusammen mit diesem Gerat ausgeliefert wurden BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Preface Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare Du er i en situasjon som kan f re til skade p person F r du begynner
474. ular VCAT Circuits The routing preferences for an open ended VCAT circuit must be specified in the initial stages of circuit provisioning For example if the circuit is independent fiber routing then multiple OC N ports can be involved Alternatively the source of an open VCAT circuit should always be a card capable of participating in a VCG This allows CTC to determine which routing preferences are permissible 7 7 5 1 Open Ended VCAT Protection Table 7 8 summarizes the protection options for open ended VCAT circuits Note that members can have different routing preferences Table 7 8 Protection options for Open Ended VCAT Circuits Routing Preferences Routing Mode Protection Options Common fiber Manual Auto e Fully protected Line only Unprotected e PCA Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 za 78 19417 01 Chapter 7 Circuits and Tunnels Section and Path Trace Table 7 8 Protection options for Open Ended VCAT Circuits Routing Preferences Routing Mode Protection Options Split fiber Manual Auto Fully protected Line only Unprotected e PCA DRI Note Path protection is not supported Split fiber with secondary Manual Auto e Fully protected destinations S Note Line protection is not supported e DRI 7 8 Section and Path Trace SDH JO section and J1 and J2 path trace are repeated fixed length strings composed of 1
475. ultiplexed into an VC4 4 frame the frame carries at most an VC4 2c payload leaving half of the VC4 4 bandwidth free In the egress direction SDH to Ethernet the mux demux extracts the first and second VC4 SPEs from the VC4 4 frame it receives from the BTC 48 before sending them to the POS mappers The VC4 SDH SPE carrying GFP or PPP HDLC encapsulated Ethernet frames are then extracted and buffered in the external memory of the POS mappers This memory is used for providing alignment and differential delay compensation for the received low high order virtual concatenated payloads When alignment and delay compensation are complete the Ethernet frames are decapsulated with one of the framing protocols GFP or PPP HDLC Decapsulated Ethernet frames are then passed onto the packet processor for QoS queuing and traffic scheduling The network processor switches the frame to one of the corresponding PHY channels and then onto the Ethernet port for transmission to the external clients With regard to QoS the VLAN class of service CoS threshold value 0 to 7 default 7 and the IP type of service ToS threshold value 0 to 255 default 255 on incoming Ethernet packets are both available for priority queuing These thresholds are provisionable through CTC TL1 and Cisco Transport Manager CTM CoS takes precedence over ToS unless the CoS threshold is set to the default of 7 This threshold value does not prioritize any packets based on CoS so ToS i
476. unassigned Change the administrative state to unlocked locked disabled FLT Reset the card locked disabled maintenance amp softwareDownload Alarm condition is cleared locked enabled maintenance locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp maintenance Change the administrative state to unlocked locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment Pull the card locked disabled maintenance amp notInstalled Delete the card locked disabled unassigned if the card is valid locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp unassigned if the card is invalid locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp unassigned Pull the card locked disabled unassigned amp notInstalled Provision the card locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment locked disabled maintenance amp softwareDownload Restart completed locked enabled maintenance Pull the card locked disabled maintenance amp notInstalled locked disabled maintenance amp notInstalled Change the administrative state to unlocked locked disabled notInstalled Insert a valid card locked disabled maintenance amp softwareDownload Insert an invalid card locked disabled mismatchofEqu ipment amp maintenance Delete the card locked disabled unassigned amp notInstalled locked disabled unassigned Pull the card locked disabled unassigned amp notInstalled Provision an invalid card
477. unnel ends are configured on NEs A and D which support both IP and OSI NEs B and C only support OSI so they only route the OSI packets Figure 8 18 IP over CLNS Tunnel Flow NE D NE C NE B NE A GNE EMS SNMP HTTP SNMP HTTP RMON FTP RMON FTP Telnet Telnet I l I UDP 1 TCP 1UDP TCP I 1 i GRE GRE 1 mm m um mm um mm m mom um oum eau mm jum mm mm eee mg IPv4 Tunnel CLNP CLNP i 1 CLNP i CLNP Tunnel I IPv4 i IPv4 1 i i 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 LLC1 1 LAPD A LAPD LAPD i I LAPD LLC1 I LLC1 I I 1 i 1 T U I I I 1 I 1 I LAN DCC DCC 1 DCC I DCC 1 LAN LAN 8 1 I l nuc lacs JOEL em DENT Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity TCP IP and OSI Networking 8 6 7 1 Provisioning IP over CLNS Tunnels IP over CLNS tunnels must be carefully planned to prevent nodes from losing visibility or connectivity Before you begin a tunnel verify that the tunnel type either Cisco IP or GRE is supported by the equipment at the other end Always verify IP and NSAP addresses Provisioning of IP over CLNS tunnels in CTC is performed on the node view Provisioning OSI IP over CLNS Tunnels tab Fo
478. uperusers can select secure shell SSH instead of Telnet at the CTC Provisioning gt Security gt Access tab SSH is a terminal remote host Internet protocol that uses encrypted links It provides authentication and secure communication over channels that are not secure Port 22 is the default port and cannot be changed 5 3 Audit Trail The ONS 15310 MA SDH maintain a GR 839 CORE compliant audit trail log that resides on the 15310E CTX K9 cards Audit trails are useful for maintaining security recovering lost transactions and tracing user activities The audit trail log shows who has accessed the node and what operations were performed during a given period of time The log includes authorized Cisco support logins and logouts using the operating system command line interface CLI CTC and TL1 the log also includes FTP actions circuit creation deletion and user system generated actions Event monitoring is also recorded in the audit log An event is defined as a change in status of an element within the network External events internal events attribute changes and software upload download activities are recorded in the audit trail To view the audit trail log refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Procedure Guide Users can access the audit trail logs from any management interface CTC Cisco Transport Manager CTM or TL1 The audit trail is stored in persistent memory and is not corrupted by processor switches or upgrades Note T
479. upply inputs A and B This allows the ONS 15310 MA SDH to blow the low current fuse when there is a failure or loss of the main fuse and report an alarm FAN alarm The front of the fan tray assembly has CRIT MAJ and MIN alarm LEDs that illuminate if a Critical Major or Minor alarm is present anywhere on the ONS 15310 MA SDH assembly 1 10 1 Fan Speed and Power Requirements Fan speed is controlled by temperature sensors on the 15310 9 card The sensors measure the input air temperature at the fan tray assembly Fan speed options are low medium and high 1 10 2 Fan Failure If one or more fans fail on the fan tray assembly replace the entire assembly You cannot replace individual fans The red Fan Fail LED on the front of the fan tray illuminates when one or more fans fail For fan tray replacement instructions refer to the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide The red Fan Fail LED is unlit after you install a working fan tray Note The red Fan Fail LED on the front of the fan tray illuminates when only one power source is connected to the chassis or any fuse blows 1 10 3 Air Filter The ONS 15310 MA SDH contains a reusable air filter 15310 MA SDH FTF that is installed above the fan tray assembly The reusable filter is made of a gray open cell polyurethane foam that is specially coated to provide fire and fungi resistance Spare filters should be kept in stock A Caution Do not operate an ONS 15310
480. ur filter activation setting For example if you turn the filter on and then log out CTC keeps the filter active the next time you log in 10 2 4 Viewing Alarm Affected Circuits To view which ONS 15310 MA SDH circuits are affected by a specific alarm right click an alarm in the Alarm window A shortcut menu appears as shown in Figure 10 1 This figure illustrates the ONS 15310 MA SDH Select Affected Circuits shortcut menu When you select the Select Affected Circuits option the Circuits window opens to show the circuits that are affected by the alarm Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EIN 78 19417 01 Chapter 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management Viewing Alarms Figure 10 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH Select Affected Circuits Option Ele Edt View Tool Help ajej a sitel ema sels Addr 10 255 255 255 Booted 5 3 06 6 25 PM User CISCOlS Authority Superuser SW Version 08 00 X06E 03 10 Defaults Factory Defaults iz m H z EE i HEHH B SE Alarms conditions History Circuits Provisioning Inventory Maintenance Egpt Type Slot Port Path width sev 5 Description BKUPMEME Synchronize Filer Delete Cleared Alarms AutoDelete Cleared Alarms Los B 10 2 5 Conditions Tab The Conditions window displays retrieved fault conditions A condition is a fault or status detected b
481. ure 1 2 Mounting a Single ONS 15310 MA SDH ina Rack 1 4 Figure 1 3 High Density Connectors 1 6 Figure 1 4 ONS 15310 MA SDH Door Ground Strap 1 7 Figure 1 5 Ground Holes on the Bottom of the ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly 1 8 Figure 1 6 Ground Holes on the Left and Right Sides of the ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly 1 9 Figure 1 7 ACS Cable 015654 1 1 Figure 1 8 32 PAIR 24 GAUGE T1 SHIELDED CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 12 Figure 1 9 25 PR 24 GA CORR SHIELD OUTDOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 12 Figure 1 10 Shelf Assembly with Fiber Guide Installed 1 14 Figure 1 11 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool 1 15 Figure 1 12 Installing the Standard Cable Management Bracket 1 22 Figure 1 13 Installing the Extended Cable Management Bracket 1 23 Figure 1 14 RJ 11 Cable Connector 1 26 Figure 1 15 Installing a Card in an ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 27 Figure 2 1 ONS 15310 MA SDH with Cards Installed 2 2 Figure 2 2 15310E CTX K9 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 4 Figure 2 3 100 8 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 7 Figure 2 4 CE MR 6 Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 11 Figure 2 5 Console Cable Adapter 2 13 Figure 2 6 ML 100T 8 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 14 Figure 2 7 E1 21 DS3 and E1 63 DS3 3 Card Faceplates and Block Diagram 2 16 Figure 2 8 BIC Configuration on WBE Cards 2 17 Figure 2 9 Filler Card 2 18 Figure 2 10 15310E CTX K9 Filler Card 2 19 Figure 2 11 Mylar Tab SFP 2 22 Figure 2 12 Actuator Button SFP 2 22 Figure 2 13 Bail Clasp SFP 2 22 Figure 3
482. ure occurred 9 6 2 Manual Span Upgrades Manual span upgrades are mainly provided as error recovery for the Span Upgrade Wizard but they can be used to perform span upgrades You can perform a manual span upgrade on a 1 1 protection group if you are upgrading two ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes Downgrading can be performed to back out of a span upgrade The procedure for downgrading is the same as upgrading except that you provision a lower rate PPM STMI or STM4 for the 15310 MA SDH and install a lower rate PPM if you are not using a multi rate PPM You cannot downgrade if circuits exist on the VCs that will be removed the higher VCs 9 7 Overlay Ring Circuits An overlay ring configuration consists of a core ring and subtended rings Figure 9 11 An Overlay Ring Circuit routes traffic around multiple rings in an overlay ring configuration passing through one or more nodes more than once This results in multiple cross connections on the nodes connecting the core ring to the subtended rings For example a customer having a core ring with cross connects provisioned using TL1 can create cross connects on subtended rings due to a business need without having to hamper the existing cross connects on the core ring This circuit can be either protected or unprotected A typical path protected overlay ring configuration is shown in Figure 9 11 where the circuit traverses the nodes B D and F twice resulting in two cross connections on these nodes
483. used 17 Unused 49 Unused 18 Unused 50 Unused 19 Unused 51 Unused 20 Unused 52 Unused 21 Unused 53 Unused 22 Unused 54 Unused 23 Unused 55 Unused 24 Unused 56 Unused 25 Unused 57 Unused 26 Unused 58 Unused 27 Unused 59 Unused 28 Unused 60 Unused 29 Unused 61 Unused 30 Unused 62 Unused 31 Unused 63 Unused 32 Unused 64 1 8 5 Alarm Cable Installation The alarm cables attach to the rear of the ONS 15310 MA SDH at the ALARM In and ALARM Out ports The other ends of the cables plug into the alarm collection equipment Terminate the ends of these cables according to local site practice The pins on the ALARM In and ALARM Out ports correspond to the 32 external alarm inputs and the 8 external alarm outputs controls that you can define using Cisco Transport Controller CTC Table 1 5 shows the default input alarm pinouts and the corresponding alarm numbers assigned to each port Refer to this table when connecting alarm cables to the ONS 15310 MA SDH m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 1 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Shelf Assembly Hardware Cable Description and Installation Table 1 5 Default Alarm Pin Assignments Inputs DB 37 Pin Number Function DB 37 Pin Number Function 1 Alarm 1 20 Alarm 18 2 Alarm 2 21 Alarm 19 3 Alarm 3 22 Alarm 20 4 Alarm 4 23 Alarm 21 5 Alarm 5 24 Alarm 22 6 Alarm 6 25 Ala
484. user SW Version 08 00 X06E 03 10 Defaults Factory Defaults Alarms Conditions History Circuits Provisioning Inventory Maintenance General Alarm Behavior alarm Profile Editor Network Intt Egpt Type Profile Suppress Alarms Appl Protection 1 CE MR 6 Inherited From Node profile ri Security B CE 100T 8 Inherited from Node profile SNMP pn n fi b CTX 2500 Inherited from Node profile r Comm Channels t i y gt PPM 1 Port Inherited from Node profile 1 Orderwire 4 2500 Inherited from Node profile ri Alarm Extenders Backplane All non card Inherited from Node profile r Alarm Profiles r H bel 5 Defaults Node Profile Default Suppress Alarms 10 5 Alarm Suppression The following sections explain alarm suppression features for the ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Ka 78 19417 01 Chapter 10 Alarm Monitoring and Management External Alarms and Controls 10 5 1 Alarms Suppressed for Maintenance When you place a port in locked maintenance administrative state this raises the alarm suppressed for maintenance AS MT condition in the Conditions and History windows and causes subsequently raised alarms for that port to be suppressed While the facility is in the locked maintenance state any alarms or condi
485. ut on the network with a special format called the ARP request If one of the machines on the network recognizes its own IP address in the request it sends an ARP reply back to the requesting host The reply contains the physical hardware address of the receiving host The requesting host stores this address in its ARP cache so that all subsequent datagrams packets to this destination IP address can be translated to a physical address Proxy ARP enables one LAN connected ONS 15310 MA SDH to respond to the ARP request for ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes not connected to the LAN Proxy ARP requires no user configuration For the proxy ARP node to require no user confirmation the DCC connected nodes must reside on the same subnet When a LAN device sends an ARP request to an ONS 15310 MA SDH that is not connected to the LAN the gateway ONS 15310 MA SDH returns its MAC address to the LAN device The LAN device then sends the datagram for the remote ONS 15310 MA SDH to the MAC address of the proxy node The proxy ONS 15310 MA SDH uses its routing table to forward the datagram to the non LAN ONS 15310 MA SDH Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 Chapter 8 Management Network Connectivity IP Addressing Scenarios Scenario 3 is similar to Scenario 1 but only one ONS 15310 MA SDH node 1 connects to the LAN Figure 8 3 Two ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes 2 and 3 connect to Node 1 through the SDH DC
486. utilization window 11 24 release compatibility 2 3 resetting 4 19 soak timer 7 5 specifications A 6 VCAT circuits 7 11 modifying See changing monitoring performance See performance monitoring traffic 7 17 mounting bracket ONS 15310 MA SDH 1 3 MS BBE parameter definition 11 7 m Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 MS BBER parameter definition 11 7 MS EB parameter definition 11 7 MS ES parameter definition 11 8 MS ESR parameter definition 11 8 MS NPJC Pgen parameter definition 11 8 MS PPJC Pgen parameter definition 11 8 MS PSC parameter definition 1 1 protection 11 8 MS SPRing 11 8 MS PSC R parameter definition 11 8 MS PSC S parameter definition 11 8 MS PSC W parameter definition 11 9 MS PSD parameter definition 11 9 MS PSD R parameter definition 11 9 MS PSD S parameter definition 11 9 MS PSD W parameter definition 11 9 MS SES parameter definition 11 9 MS SESR parameter definition 11 9 MS SPRing MS PSC parameter definition 11 8 MS UAS parameter definition 11 9 multiplex section protection switching duration parameter PSD 11 9 Netscape 4 3 network element defaults card settings ONS 15310 MA 2 CTC settings 2 node settings 0 29 networks autodiscovery of newer software releases 4 3 building circuits 7 1 compatibility with IPv6 8 40 IP networking 8 1 to 8 16 SDH topologies 9 1 9 9 9 10 third party using server trails 7 23 timing example 6 2 Index
487. va XETE UTTOWN roug KIVOUVOUG GXETICOVTAI HE N EKTPIK KAI VA XETE ECOIKEIWOE pe ouvrjBglg TNV UTUXNN TWV XPNOIHOTTOI OTE rov apiOu S AWONG Trou OTO T o KAGE TTPOEI OTTO NONG yia va EVTOTTIOETE Tn TNG ugraqgpaop vegg TIPOEISOTIOINCEIG ao aAe ag TOU TN CUOKEUI TIZ OAHMEZ NIAIWN NIN VA THY DV 97 Ny y97 Ona 7 yn AYNA ANN NID0 Mon AT MTN m o DMN NX WA NN 0207 VTM Nin nw niann NX INN TD 72 76 n9103 j 9SIonn nain 39ona WANWA NNINN Ny Nn jenn Niowynw nimaamnna nin van NNATRA AYN NINA Opomena na
488. vice affecting statuses are also displayed in the Condition tab unless you choose to filter the alarm from the display using the Filter button 10 2 6 3 Filtering Conditions The condition display can be filtered to prevent the appearance of conditions including alarms with certain severities or that occurred between certain dates You can set the filtering parameters by clicking the Filter button at the bottom left of the Conditions window You can turn the filter on or off by clicking the Filter tool at the bottom right of the window CTC retains your filter activation setting For example if you turn the filter on and then log out CTC keeps the filter active the next time you log in 10 2 7 Viewing History The History window displays historic alarm or condition data for the node or for your login session You can chose to display only alarm history only events or both by checking check boxes in the History gt Shelf window You can view network level alarm and condition history such as for circuits for all the nodes visible in network view At the node level you can see all port facility card VC high order path and system level history entries for that node For example protection switching events or performance monitoring threshold crossings appear here If you double click a card you can view all port card and VC high order path alarm or condition history that directly affects the port Note p In the Preference dialog
489. vice resumes The switch occurs within 50 ms Figure 9 8 Path Protected Mesh Network for ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Source Node Node 5 a Node 6 Node 7 59 Destination 1 Protect traffic Node 11 by Node 9 Node me Primary path Secondary path 124462 For example in Figure 9 9 a circuit is created from Node 3 to Node 9 CTC determines that the shortest route between the two nodes passes through Node 8 and Node 7 shown by the dotted line and automatically creates cross connections at Nodes 3 8 7 and 9 to provide the primary circuit path Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Chapter 9 SDH Topologies and Upgrades Path Protected Mesh Networks If full protection is selected CTC creates a second unique route between Nodes 3 and 9 which in this example passes through Nodes 2 1 and 11 Cross connections are automatically created at Nodes 3 2 1 11 and 9 shown by the dashed line If a failure occurs on the primary path traffic switches to the second circuit path In this example Node 9 switches from the traffic coming in from Node 7 to the traffic coming in from Node 11 and service resumes The switch occurs within 50 ms Figure 9 9 Path Protected Mesh Network for ONS 15310 MA SDH Nodes Source Node Node 5 MEL 2 e Node 4 uy lt gt Node 6 IN
490. witches the signal back to the working port when the working port comes back online 1 1 protection is unidirectional and nonrevertive by default revertive switching is easily provisioned using CTC 3 4 External Switching Commands The external switching commands on the ONS 15310 MA SDH are Manual Force and Lock Out A Manual switch will switch traffic if the path has an error rate less than the signal degrade SD A Force switch will switch traffic even if the path has SD or signal fail SF conditions A Force switch has a higher priority than a Manual switch In 1 1 mode however if there is an SF condition on the protect line the SF condition has a higher priority than Force and Force cannot override the SF condition to make a switch to the protect line Lockouts can only be applied to a protect port in 1 1 configurations and prevent traffic from switching to the protect port under any circumstance Lockouts have the highest priority In a 1 1 configuration you can also apply a lock on to the working port A working port with a lock on applied cannot switch traffic to the protect port in the protection group pair 78 19417 01 Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 m Chapter3 Card Protection External Switching Commands Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 Em 78 19417 01 Cisco Transport Controller Operation This chapter describes Cisco Transpor
491. works for node discovery circuit routing and node management You can enable OSPF on the ONS 15310 MA SDH so that the ONS 15310 MA SDH topology is sent to OSPF routers on a LAN Advertising the ONS 15310 MA SDH network topology to LAN routers eliminates the need to enter static routes for ONS 15310 MA SDH subnetworks manually OSPF divides networks into smaller regions called areas An area is a collection of networked end systems routers and transmission facilities organized by traffic patterns Each OSPF area has a unique ID number known as the area ID Every OSPF network has one backbone area called area 0 All other OSPF areas must connect to area 0 When you enable an ONS 15310 MA SDH OSPF topology for advertising to an OSPF network you must assign an OSPF area ID in decimal format to the network Coordinate the area ID number assignment with your LAN administrator All DCC connected ONS 15310 MA SDH nodes should be assigned the same OSPF area ID Figure 8 8 shows a network enabled for OSPF Figure 8 8 Scenario 6 OSPF Enabled Router IP Address of interface iAi to LAN A 192 168 1 1 LANA IP Address of interface iBi to LAN B 192 168 2 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Int A gt CTC Workstation Int B IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Host Routes N A LAN B ONS 15310 1 IP Address 192 168 2 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192
492. xy is unchecked CTC is not able to see nodes on the DCC side of the ONS 15310 MA SDH If Craft Access Only is checked check Enable Proxy If Enable Proxy is not checked CTC is not able to see nodes on the DCC side of the ONS 15310 MA SDH If nodes become unreachable in cases 1 2 and 3 you can correct the setting with one of the following actions Disconnect the craft computer from the unreachable ONS 15310 MA SDH Connect to the ONS 15310 MA SDH through another ONS 15310 MA SDH in the network that has a DCC connection to the unreachable node Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the unreachable ONS 15310 MA SDH Connect a CTC computer directly to the ONS 15310 MA SDH 8 3 Routing Table ONS 15310 MA SDH routing information appears on the Maintenance gt Routing Table tabs The routing table provides the following information Destination Displays the IP address of the destination network or host Mask Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network Gateway Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host Usage Shows the number of times the listed route has been used Interface Shows the ONS 15310 MA SDH interface used to access the destination Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 EZE 78 19417 01 Chapter8 Management Network Connectivity Routing Table cpm0 The ONS 15310 MA SDH Ethernet interface RJ45 LAN
493. y ONS 15310 MA SDH hardware or software When a condition occurs and continues for a minimum period CTC raises a standing condition which is a flag showing that this particular condition currently exists on the ONS 15310 MA SDH The Conditions window in contrast with the Alarms window shows all conditions that occur including those that are superseded For instance if a network problem causes two alarms such as LOF and LOS CTC shows both the LOF and LOS conditions in this window even though LOS supersedes LOF Having all conditions visible can be helpful when troubleshooting the ONS 15310 MA SDH If you want to retrieve conditions that obey a root cause hierarchy that is LOS supersedes and replaces LOF you can exclude the same root causes by checking Exclude Same Root Cause check box in the window Fault conditions include reported alarms and Not Reported or Not Alarmed conditions Refer to the trouble notifications information in the Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Troubleshooting Guide for more information about alarm and condition classifications 10 2 6 Controlling the Conditions Display You can control the display of the conditions on the Conditions window Table 10 5 shows the actions you can perform in the window Cisco ONS 15310 MA SDH Reference Manual Release 9 1 and Release 9 2 78 19417 01 ELE Chapter10 Alarm Monitoring and Management viewing Alarms Table 10 5 Button Conditions Display Action

Cisco Systems 15310-CL Network Card User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents